2010 Chevrolet Equinox Owner's Manual

2010 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual M
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 1-1 Instruments and Controls . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 4-4 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 7-1
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Warning Lights, Gages, and
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 8-1
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 8-28
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 4-39 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 8-35
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 8-41
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Object Detection Systems . . . . 8-46
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 8-64
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 3-1 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Additional Storage Features . . . 3-1 Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 6-33
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
2010 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual M
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33 Customer Information . . . . . . . 12-1
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 12-1
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 12-13
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74 Vehicle Data Recording and
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Service and Maintenance . . . 10-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 10-2
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 10-7
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 10-10
Introduction iii
Please refer to the purchase

documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of
the features found on your vehicle.
For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the Motors of Canada Limited” for Manufactured under license
GM Emblem, CHEVROLET, the Chevrolet Motor Division wherever under U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;
CHEVROLET Emblem, the name it appears in this manual. 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
Equinox and the Equinox Emblem Keep this manual in the vehicle for 6,487,535 & other U.S. and
are registered trademarks of quick reference. worldwide patents issued &
General Motors. pending. DTS and DTS Digital
Surround are registered trademarks
This manual describes features that and the DTS logos and Symbol
may or may not be on your specific are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
vehicle either because they are © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights
options that you did not purchase Reserved.
or due to changes subsequent to
the printing of this owner manual.
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 25798562 B Second Printing 2009 General Motors. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
limited viewing uses only unless Canadian Vehicle Owners

otherwise authorized by
Macrovision. Reverse engineering Propriétaires Canadiens
or disassembly is prohibited. A French language copy of this
manual can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer or from:
Manufactured under license from
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the
ce guide en français auprès du
double-D symbol are trademarks
concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
of Dolby Laboratories. Copyright
suivante:
1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories.
All rights reserved. “Made for iPod” means that an Helm, Incorporated
electronic accessory has been P.O. Box 07130
This product incorporates copyright designed to connect specifically Detroit, MI 48207
protection technology that is to iPod and has been certified
protected by U.S. patents and other by the developer to meet Apple 1-800-551-4123
intellectual property rights. Use of performance standards. iPod is a Numéro de poste 6438 de langue
this copyright protection technology trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., française
must be authorized by Macrovision, registered in the U.S. and other www.helminc.com
and is intended for home and other countries.
Introduction v
Using this Manual Symbols

{ WARNING
To quickly locate information about The vehicle has components and
the vehicle, use the Index in the These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of
back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with
alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation or
manual and the page number where information relating to a specific
it can be found. Notice: This means there is component, control, message, gage,
something that could result in or indicator.
Danger, Warnings, and property or vehicle damage.
This would not be covered by the
M : This symbol is shown when
Cautions vehicle's warranty.
you need to see your owner manual
for additional instructions or
Warning messages found on vehicle
information.
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown when
reduce them. you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
Danger indicates a hazard with a
information.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
A circle with a slash through it is
Warning or Caution indicates a a safety symbol which means
hazard that could result in injury or “Do Not,” “Do not do this” or “Do not
death. let this happen.”
vi Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Chart # : Fog Lamps

Here are some additional symbols . : Fuel Gage
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more + : Fuses
information on the symbol, refer to i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
the index. Changer
9 : Airbag Readiness Light j : LATCH System Child
# : Air Conditioning Restraints
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
g : Audio®Steering Wheel Controls : : Oil Pressure
or OnStar } : Power
$ : Brake System Warning Light / : Remote Vehicle Start
" : Charging System > : Safety Belt Reminders
I : Cruise Control 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
B : Engine Coolant Temperature F : Traction Control
O : Exterior Lamps M : Windshield Washer Fluid
Keys, Doors and Windows 1-1
Keys, Doors and Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Windows Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-14
1-15
Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Keys and Locks Interior Mirrors
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 1-15
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Automatic Dimming Rearview
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Windows
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Roof
Doors Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Liftgate (Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Liftgate (Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Vehicle Security
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 1-12
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 1-13
1-2 Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys and Locks

Keys
{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the ignition key is dangerous for
many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even
killed. They could operate the
power windows or other controls The key, that is part of the Remote Press the button on the RKE
or even make the vehicle move. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, transmitter to extend the key.
The windows will function with the can be used for the ignition and all Press the button and the key blade
keys in the ignition and children locks. to retract the key.
could be seriously injured or killed
See your dealer/retailer if a new key
if caught in the path of a closing is needed.
window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children. Notice: If you ever lock your keys
in the vehicle, you may have to
damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of the vehicle,
see Roadside Assistance Program
on page 12‑6 or OnStar® System
on page 4‑44.
. Check the transmitter's battery.
Remote Keyless Entry See “Battery Replacement” later
(RKE) System in this section.
See Radio Frequency Statement on . If the transmitter is still not
page 12‑16 for information working correctly, see your
regarding Part 15 of the Federal dealer/retailer or a qualified
Communications Commission (FCC) technician for service.
Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry
and Science Canada. Remote Keyless Entry
Changes or modifications to this (RKE) System Operation
system by other than an authorized
service facility could void The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
authorization to use this equipment. transmitter will work up to 60 m RKE without Remote Start Shown
(195 feet) away from the vehicle.
If there is a decrease in the RKE The following may be available:
operating range: There are other conditions which
can affect the performance of the Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.
. Check the distance. The transmitter. See Remote Keyless The turn signal indicators may flash
transmitter may be too far from Entry (RKE) System on page 1‑3. and/or the horn may sound to
the vehicle. indicate locking, see “Remote
Lock Feedback” under Vehicle
. Check the location. Other
Personalization on page 4‑39. If a
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. passenger door is open when Q is
pressed, all doors lock. If the driver
door is open when Q is pressed, all
doors lock except the driver door.
These settings can be modified.
See “Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out” V (Remote Liftgate Release): Programming Transmitters to
under Vehicle Personalization on First press K , then press and the Vehicle
page 4‑39.
hold V to unlock the liftgate. Only RKE transmitters
Pressing Q may also arm the For vehicles with the power liftgate, programmed to this vehicle will
theft-deterrent system. See press and hold V until the liftgate work. If a transmitter is lost or
Anti-Theft Alarm System on stolen, a replacement can be
begins to move to open the liftgate.
page 1‑12. purchased and programmed
K (Unlock): Press to unlock
7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic through your dealer/retailer.
Alarm): Press and release one When the replacement transmitter
the driver door or all doors, see time to locate the vehicle. The is programmed to this vehicle, all
“Remote Door Unlock” under exterior lamps flash and the horn remaining transmitters must also be
Vehicle Personalization on
page 4‑39. The turn signal chirps. Press and hold 7 for at least reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen
two seconds to sound the panic transmitters will no longer work
indicators flash to indicate unlocking
alarm. The horn sounds and the once the new transmitter is
has occurred. For more information
turn signals flash until 7 is pressed programmed.
see “Remote Unlock Light
Feedback” under Vehicle again or the key is placed in the Battery Replacement
Personalization on page 4‑39. ignition and turned to ON/RUN.
Replace the battery if the “Replace
Pressing K may also disarm / (Remote Vehicle Start): For Battery in Remote Key” message
the theft-deterrent system. vehicles with this feature, first press displays in the DIC. See “Replace
See Anti-Theft Alarm System on Q then press and hold / to start Battery in Remote Key” under Key
page 1‑12. the engine from outside the vehicle and Lock Messages on page 4‑35.
using the RKE transmitter. See
Remote Vehicle Start on page 1‑5 The battery is not rechargeable.
for additional information. See your dealer/retailer to replace
the battery.
Remote Vehicle Start There are other conditions which Extending Engine Run Time
can affect the performance of the For a 10-minute extension, repeat
The vehicle may have this feature transmitter, see Remote Keyless
that allows you to start the engine Steps 1 and 2 while the engine is
Entry (RKE) System on page 1‑3 still running. The remote start can
from outside the vehicle. for additional information. be extended once.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Starting the Engine Using Remote
This button will be on the RKE When the remote start is extended,
Start the second 10 minutes will start
transmitter if the vehicle has remote
start. To enable and disable remote To start the engine using the remote immediately.
start, see “Remote Vehicle Start” start feature: For example, if the engine has been
under Vehicle Personalization on running for five minutes, and
page 4‑39.
1. Press Q on the RKE transmitter.
10 minutes are added, the engine
2. Press and hold / for about will run for a total of 15 minutes.
Vehicles with an automatic climate
two seconds. The turn signal
control system will default to a A maximum of two remote starts or
lamps will briefly flash to confirm
heating or cooling mode depending remote start attempts are allowed
the vehicle has been started.
on the outside temperature during a between ignition cycles.
The parking lamps will turn on
remote start. Once the key is turned
and remain on as long as the The vehicle's ignition switch must
to ON/RUN, the system will turn on
engine is running. The vehicle's be turned to ON/RUN and then back
at the setting the vehicle was last
doors will be locked. to LOCK/OFF using the key, before
set to.
3. The key must be inserted and the remote start procedure can be
Laws in some local communities used again.
turned to ON/RUN before
may restrict the use of remote
driving.
starters. For example, some laws
require a person using remote The engine will shut off after
start to have the vehicle in view. 10 minutes unless a time
Check local regulations for any extension is done or the key is
requirements. inserted and turned to ON/RUN.
Shutting the Engine Off After a

. The oil pressure is low.
Remote Start . Two remote vehicle starts have WARNING (Continued)
To shut off the engine: already been used. . Young children who get into
. Press / until the parking lamps
. The vehicle is not in P (Park). unlocked vehicles may be
turn off. unable to get out. A child can
. Turn on the hazard warning
Door Locks be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
flashers. injuries or even death from
. Insert the key and turn it to
{ WARNING heat stroke. Always lock the
ON/RUN and then back to Unlocked doors can be vehicle whenever leaving it.
LOCK/OFF. dangerous. . Outsiders can easily enter
Conditions in Which Remote Start . Passengers, especially through an unlocked door
Will Not Work children, can easily open the when you slow down or stop
doors and fall out of a moving your vehicle. Locking your
The remote vehicle start feature will doors can help prevent this
not operate if: vehicle. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in from happening.
. The key is in the ignition. a crash is increased if the
To lock or unlock a door from the
. The hood or doors are not doors are not locked. So, all
outside of the vehicle, use the
closed. passengers should wear
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
safety belts properly and
. The hazard warning flashers transmitter. Pull the handle once
the doors should be locked
are on. from the inside to unlock the door,
whenever the vehicle is
and a second time to open it.
. There is an emission control driven.
system malfunction. (Continued)
. The engine coolant temperature
is too high.
Power Door Locks When locking the doors with the Safety Locks
power lock switch and a door or the
liftgate is open, the doors will lock Rear door security locks prevent
five seconds after the last door is passengers from opening the rear
closed. You will hear three chimes doors from the inside.
to signal that the delayed locking Press (C) to activate the safety
feature is in use. locks. Once activated, the LED
Pressing the power lock switch light, changes to amber.
twice or Q on the RKE transmitter Pressing the button again
twice will override the delayed deactivates the safety locks.
locking feature and immediately See Power Door Locks on
lock all the doors. page 1‑7.
This feature will not operate if the
A. Door Unlock key is in the ignition.
B. Door Lock This feature can be programmed.
See “Delayed Door Lock” under
C. Safety Lock Vehicle Personalization on
The power door lock switches are page 4‑39.
located on the instrument panel.
. Press (A) to unlock the doors.
. Remove the key from the
ignition and press (B) to lock the
doors.
Doors WARNING (Continued)

Notice: If you open the liftgate
without checking for overhead
obstructions such as a garage
Liftgate (Manual) If the vehicle must be driven with door, you could damage the
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: liftgate or the liftgate glass.
{ WARNING . Close all of the windows. Always check to make sure the
area above and behind the liftgate
Exhaust gases can enter the . Fully open the air outlets on is clear before opening it.
vehicle if it is driven with the or under the instrument
panel. Press the touchpad located in the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
handle of the liftgate, above the
any objects that pass through . Adjust the Climate Control license plate, and lift up to open.
the seal between the body system to a setting that
and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. brings in only outside air Do not press the touchpad while
Engine exhaust contains Carbon and set the fan speed to the closing the liftgate. This will cause
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be highest setting. See Climate the liftgate to be unlatched.
seen or smelled. It can cause Control System in the Index. Always close the liftgate before
unconsciousness and even death. For more information about driving.
(Continued) carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 8‑34.
Liftgate (Power) WARNING (Continued) { WARNING

Power Liftgate Operation
. Adjust the Climate Control You or others could be injured if
caught in the path of the power
{ WARNING system to a setting that
brings in only outside air liftgate. Make sure there is no one
Exhaust gases can enter the and set the fan speed to the in the way of the liftgate as it is
vehicle if it is driven with the highest setting. See Climate opening and closing.
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with Control System in the Index.
Notice: If you open the liftgate
any objects that pass through . If the vehicle is equipped with without checking for overhead
the seal between the body a power liftgate, disable the obstructions such as a garage
and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. power liftgate function. door, you could damage the
Engine exhaust contains Carbon liftgate or the liftgate glass.
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine Always check to make sure the
seen or smelled. It can cause area above and behind the liftgate
unconsciousness and even death. Exhaust on page 8‑34.
is clear before opening it.
If the vehicle must be driven with On vehicles with a power liftgate, The power liftgate has three modes
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: the switch is located on the of operation. Mode selection is
. Close all of the windows. overhead console. The vehicle controlled by the interior mode
must be in P (Park) to use the switch.
. Fully open the air outlets on power feature. The taillamps flash
or under the instrument when the power liftgate moves.
panel.
(Continued)
such as a garage door or roof

. Pressing the power liftgate
mounted cargo during power button on the center of the mode
operation. The liftgate can still be switch, located on the overhead
fully opened manually. console.
OFF: The liftgate only operates
. Pressing the touchpad switch on
manually in this position. the liftgate outside handle to
open the liftgate.
Manual operation of a liftgate that
also has power operation requires
more effort than with a standard
manual liftgate.
In either the MAX or the 3/4 mode,
Choose the power liftgate mode the liftgate can be power opened
by turning the dial on the switch and closed by:
until the indicator lines up with the
desired position. The vehicle must
. First pressing K and then
be in P (Park). pressing and holding V on the
The three modes are: Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter until the liftgate starts
MAX : The liftgate power opens to moving. See Remote Keyless
the full open height. Entry (RKE) System Operation Press and release & on the
3/4 : The liftgate power opens to a on page 1‑3.
liftgate adjacent to the latch to close
reduced open height that can be set the liftgate.
by the vehicle operator. Use this
setting to prevent the liftgate from
opening into overhead obstructions
Pressing any button, or the position. Cargo could fall out of the will display. After removing the
touchpad switch while the liftgate is vehicle. Always make sure the obstructions, the liftgate will
moving stops it. Pressing the button power liftgate is closed and latched resume normal power operation.
or RKE switch again reverses the before you drive away. Your vehicle has pinch sensors
direction. The touch pad switch If you power open the liftgate and located on the side edges of the
will stop the liftgate from moving. the liftgate support struts have lost liftgate. If an object is caught
There is a minimum distance that pressure, the turn signals flash and between the liftgate and the body
the power liftgate must already be a chime sounds. The liftgate stays and presses against this sensor, the
open for the system to hold it open. open temporarily, then slowly liftgate will reverse direction and
If movement is stopped below that closes. See your dealer/retailer for open fully. The liftgate will remain
minimum the liftgate closes. service before using the liftgate. open until it is activated again or
Do not force the liftgate open or closed manually.
closed during a power cycle. Obstacle Detection Features
If the liftgate encounters an obstacle Setting the Power Liftgate
The power liftgate may be 3/4 Mode
temporarily disabled under extreme during a power open or close
temperatures or low battery cycle, a warning chime will sound To change the liftgate stop position:
conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate and the liftgate will automatically
1. Turn the liftgate switch to the
can still be operated manually. reverse direction to the full closed
3/4 mode position and power
or open position. After removing
If you shift the transmission out of open the liftgate.
the obstruction, the power liftgate
P (Park) while the power function operation can be used again. 2. Stop the liftgate movement at
is in progress, the liftgate power If the liftgate encounters multiple the desired height by pressing
function will continue to completion. obstacles on the same power any switch.
If you shift the transmission out of cycle, the power function will
P (Park) and accelerate before the 3. Press and hold the button on the
deactivate. The “Manually Close liftgate adjacent to the latch until
power liftgate latch is closed, the Power Liftgate” warning message in
liftgate may reverse to the open the turn signals flash and a beep
the Driver Information Center (DIC) sounds to indicate that the new
setting is recorded.
When power opened with the To open the liftgate, press the Vehicle Security
3/4 mode selected, the liftgate touchpad on the handle on the
stops at the new set position. outside of the liftgate, and lift the Vehicle theft is big business,
gate open. To close the liftgate, use especially in some cities. This
There is a minimum that the power
the pull cup to lower the liftgate vehicle has theft-deterrent features,
liftgate must already be open for the
and close. With the power liftgate however, they do not make it
system to hold it open. The liftgate
disabled the liftgate electric latch impossible to steal.
cannot be set to stop below that
minimum. will still power latch once contact is
made with the striker. Always close Anti-Theft Alarm System
Manual Operation of Power the liftgate before driving.
This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm
Liftgate If the RKE button is pressed while system.
To change the liftgate to manual power operation is disabled, the turn
operation, turn the mode switch to signals flash and the liftgate will Arming the System
the OFF position. not move. To arm the system, either:
With the power liftgate disabled The liftgate has an electric latch.
If the battery is disconnected or
. Press Q on the RKE transmitter.
and all of the doors unlocked, the
liftgate can be manually opened has low voltage, the liftgate will . Or, lock the vehicle using the
and closed. Manual operation of not open. The liftgate will resume key in the driver door.
a liftgate that also has power operation when the battery is The alarm automatically arms after
operation requires more effort than reconnected and charged. about 30 seconds. The security
with a standard manual liftgate. light, located on the instrument
panel, flashes.
Press V on the RKE transmitter to
open the liftgate without setting off
the alarm. The system rearms when
the liftgate is closed.
Disarming the System If the alarm has been activated, The key uses a transponder that
the “Theft Attempted” message will matches an immobilizer control unit
To disarm the system, do one of the
appear on the DIC. See Key and in the vehicle and automatically
following:
Lock Messages on page 4‑35 for disarms the system. Only the
. Press K on the RKE transmitter. additional information. correct key starts the vehicle. The
vehicle may not start if the key is
. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
Immobilizer damaged.
. Allow the alarm to time out after
See Radio Frequency Statement on
about 30 seconds and reset
page 12‑16 for information
itself.
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
The alarm automatically disarms. Communications Commission (FCC)
If the system is armed and any door Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry
and Science Canada.
is unlocked without pressing K on
the RKE transmitter the alarm The security light, located in the
sounds.
Immobilizer Operation instrument panel cluster, comes
This vehicle has a passive on if there is a problem with arming
How to Detect a Tamper theft-deterrent system. or disarming the theft-deterrent
Condition system.
The system does not have to be
If K is pressed and the horn manually armed or disarmed. When trying to start the vehicle, the
sounds, an attempted break-in has security light comes on briefly when
The vehicle is automatically the ignition is turned on.
occurred while the system was immobilized when the key is
armed. removed from the ignition. If the engine does not start and the
security light stays on there is a
The system is automatically problem with the system. Turn the
disarmed when the vehicle is ignition off and try again.
started with the correct key.
If the engine still does not start, and Exterior Mirrors Power Mirrors
the key appears to be undamaged
or the light continues to stay on, try
another ignition key. If the engine Convex Mirrors
does not start with the other key, the
vehicle needs service. If the vehicle { WARNING
does start, the first key may be
damaged. See your dealer/retailer A convex mirror can make things,
who can service the theft-deterrent like other vehicles, look farther
system and have a new key made. away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane,
Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the theft you could hit a vehicle on the
deterrent system in the vehicle. right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
Controls for the outside power
mirrors are located on the
The passenger side mirror is convex
driver door.
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from To adjust the mirrors:
the driver seat. 1. Move the selector switch to
L (left) or R (right) to choose the
driver or passenger mirror.
2. Press the arrows on the control
pad to move each mirror to the
desired direction.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so Park Tilt Mirrors Interior Mirrors

that the side of the vehicle and
the area behind are seen. If the vehicle has the memory
package, the outside mirrors have Manual Rearview Mirror
4. Return the selector switch to the a park tilt feature. This feature
middle position. Hold the inside rearview mirror in
autiomatically tilts the outside the center to move it for a clearer
mirrors to a preselected position view of behind your vehicle. Adjust
Heated Mirrors when the vehicle is in R (Reverse). the mirror to avoid glare from the
For vehicles with heated mirrors: This allows the driver to view the headlamps behind you. Push the
curb for parallel parking. tab forward for daytime use and pull
< (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to heat the mirrors. The passenger and driver mirrors it for nighttime use.
return to their original position Vehicles with OnStar® have three
See “Rear Window Defogger” under when the vehicle is shifted out of
Automatic Climate Control System additional control buttons located at
R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned the bottom of the mirror. See your
on page 7‑3 for more information. off or to OFF/LOCK. dealer/retailer for more information
This feature can be turned on or on the system and how to subscribe
off through the Driver Information to OnStar. See OnStar® System on
Center (DIC). See Vehicle page 4‑44 for more information
Personalization on page 4‑39 for about the services OnStar provides.
more information.
Automatic Dimming Automatic Dimming Mirror Windows

Rearview Mirror Operation
The vehicle may have an automatic Automatic dimming reduces the
glare from the headlamps of the
{ WARNING
dimming inside rearview mirror.
vehicle behind you. The dimming Leaving children, helpless adults,
Vehicles with OnStar® have three feature comes on and the indicator or pets in a vehicle with the
additional control buttons located at light comes on each time the vehicle windows closed is dangerous.
the bottom of the mirror. See your is started. They can be overcome by
dealer/retailer for more information the extreme heat and suffer
on the system and how to subscribe Cleaning the Mirror
permanent injuries or even death
to OnStar. See OnStar® System on Do not spray glass cleaner directly from heat stroke. Never leave a
page 4‑44 for more information on the mirror. Use a soft towel child, a helpless adult, or a pet
about the services OnStar provides. dampened with water. alone in a vehicle, especially with
O : Press to turn automatic the windows closed in warm or
dimming on or off. hot weather.
If the vehicle has a rear vision
camera (RVC) the O button for
turning the automatic dimming
feature on or off will not be
available. See Rear Vision Camera
(RVC) on page 8‑49 for more
information.
Power Windows
{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the keys is dangerous for many
reasons, children or others could
be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power
windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function and
they could be seriously injured or Uplevel shown, base similar
killed if caught in the path of a The power window controls are
closing window. Do not leave located on each of the side doors.
keys in a vehicle with children. The driver door also has switches
When there are children in the that control the passenger and
rear seat use the window lockout rear windows. The power windows
button to prevent unintentional work when the ignition is in
operation of the windows. ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN or
when Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) is active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 8‑29.
Press or pull on the switch to lower
or raise the window.
Express Down Windows To program the window: Window Lockout

Windows that have the 1. Close all doors with the ignition o (Window Lockout): The window
express‐down feature allow the in the ACC/ACCESSORY, lockout switch is located on the
windows to be lowered without ON/RUN position, or when driver door. This feature prevents
holding the switch. Press the Retained Accessory the rear passenger windows from
window switch fully and release Power (RAP) is active. operating, except from the driver
it to activate the express‐down See Retained Accessory position. Press the switch to turn
feature. The express mode can Power (RAP) on page 8‑29. the lockout feature on or off. An
be canceled at any time by briefly 2. Press and continue to hold the indicator light shows the feature
pressing, or pulling the switch. window switch until the window is on.
Programming the Power is fully open.
Sun Visors
Windows 3. Pull up and hold the window
switch to close the window. Pull the sun visor down to block
Programming the power windows glare. Detach the sun visor from the
may be necessary if the vehicle's Continue to hold it briefly after
the window is fully closed. center mount and slide it along the
battery has been disconnected or rod from side-to-side to cover the
discharged. driver or passenger side of the front
window. Swing the sun visor to
the side to cover the side window.
It can be moved along the rod from
side-to-side in this position also.
Roof Express-open/Express-close
Press and release the front or
Sunroof rear of the driver side switch to
express-open or express-close the
On vehicles with a sunroof, the sunroof.
switches used to operate it are
located on the headliner above the Anti-Pinch Feature
rearview mirror. The ignition must be
If an object is in the path of the
in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,
sunroof when it is closing, the
or in Retained Accessory Power
anti-pinch feature detects the object
(RAP) to operate the sunroof. See
and stops the sunroof from closing
Ignition Positions on page 8‑28 and
. Press and hold the front or at the point of the obstruction. The
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
rear of the driver side switch to sunroof then returns to the full-open
on page 8‑29.
open or close the sunroof. The position.
sunshade automatically opens
with the sunroof, but must be
closed manually.
. Press and hold the front of the
passenger side switch to vent
the sunroof. Press and hold the
rear of the switch to close.
2 NOTES
Seats and Restraints 2-1
Seats and Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 2-24

Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Restraints Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 2-46
Airbag System Where to Put the Restraint . . . 2-48
Head Restraints Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 2-27 for Children (LATCH
Front Seats When Should an Airbag System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Replacing LATCH System
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 2-4 What Makes an Airbag Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Securing Child Restraints
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 How Does an Airbag (Rear Seat ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Securing Child Restraints
What Will You See After an (Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 2-58
Rear Seats Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Safety Belts Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
How to Wear Safety Belts Adding Equipment to the
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 2-38
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 2-40
Safety Belt Use During Replacing Airbag System
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
The vehicle's front and rear seats
have head restraints in all outboard
seating positions.
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not Adjust the head restraint so that the 1. Pull the head restraint up to
drive until the head restraints for top of the restraint is at the same raise it. To lower the head
all occupants are installed and height as the top of the occupant's restraint, press the release
adjusted properly. head. This position reduces the button, located on the head
chance of a neck injury in a crash. restraint post on the top of the
seatback, while you push the
head restraint down.
2. Push down on the head restraint
after the button is released to
make sure that it is locked in
place.
The vehicle's rear seat head
restraints are not adjustable.
Front Seats { WARNING

To adjust the seat position:
1. Pull the handle located at the
Seat Adjustment You can lose control of the front of the seat.
vehicle if you try to adjust a 2. Move the seat forward or
manual driver's seat while the backward to adjust the seat
vehicle is moving. The sudden position.
movement could startle and
3. Release the handle to stop the
confuse you, or make you push a seat from moving.
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Power Seat Adjustment Adjust the power seat by moving the

control (B) forward or rearward, up
or down, or by pressing the top or
bottom of control (E).
Adjust the seatback by moving the
control (C) forward or rearward.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 2‑6 for more information.
Adjust the lumbar support by
using the control (D). See Lumbar
Adjustment on page 2‑6 for
Driver Seat with Power Seat more information.
Control, Power Lumbar,
Driver Seat with Power Seat Memory Seats
and Manual Recline shown
Control, Power Recline, The vehicle may have a memory
and Power Lumbar shown D: Power Lumbar Adjustment seat allowing saved and recalled
A: Memory Seat Adjustment E: Power Seat Adjustment seat settings. Controls (A) are
F: Manual Recline Adjustment located on the outboard side of
B: Power Seat Adjustment the seat.
C: Power Recline Adjustment On vehicles with power seats, the
controls are located on the outboard
D: Power Lumbar Adjustment side of the seats.
To save: Entry using the Remote Keyless Memory Seat recall may stop if
1. Adjust the driver seat, including Entry (RKE) transmitter with the seat is blocked. Remove the
the seatback recliner, and both the remote recall feature on obstruction and then press the
outside mirrors, to a comfortable automatically adjusts the seat and memory button again. If the memory
position. mirrors. There is no adjustment function does not work properly, see
when the position has not been your dealer/retailer for service.
2. Press and hold the MEM button changed by another seating
and button 1 at the same time position. Easy Exit Seat
until a beep indicates the If the easy exit seat feature is on in
position is stored. When the remote recall feature is
on, the seat and mirror position will the Driver Information Center (DIC),
A second seating and mirror be stored when the ignition is turned automatic adjustment occurs when
position can be programmed by to LOCK/OFF. It is stored according the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF
repeating the above steps and to the RKE transmitter used to start and the driver door is opened. The
pressing button 2. the vehicle. driver seat moves back.
To recall the memory positions, the To stop recall movement of the RKE See Vehicle Personalization on
vehicle must be in P (Park). Press remote recall feature, press one of page 4‑39 for more information.
and hold either button 1 or button 2 the power seat controls, memory
corresponding to the desired driving buttons, or power mirror buttons.
position. The seat, outside mirrors
and pedals, if available move to the
stored position. Releasing the
button before the stored position
is reached cancels the recall.
Lumbar Adjustment Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING
Power Lumbar Manual Reclining Seatbacks
If either seatback is not locked, it
Seats with power lumbar have could move forward in a sudden
controls located on the outboard { WARNING stop or crash. That could cause
side of the seat. See Power Seat injury to the person sitting there.
Adjustment on page 2‑4 for more You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a Always push and pull on the
information.
manual driver's seat while the seatbacks to be sure they are
Adjust lumbar support by using the vehicle is moving. The sudden locked.
rocker switch (D) on the outboard movement could startle and
side of the driver seat. Vehicles with manual reclining
confuse you, or make you push a
Release the switch when the seatbacks have a lever on the
pedal when you do not want to.
seatback reaches the desired level outboard side of the seat. Lift the
Adjust the driver's seat only when lever and move the seatback to the
of lumbar support. the vehicle is not moving. desired position, then release the
lever. The seatback should not
move when pushed or pulled.
Power Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job when reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its
job because it will not be against
your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash, you could
go into it, receiving neck or other Do not have a seatback reclined if
injuries. your vehicle is moving.
On vehicles with power reclining
seatbacks, the switch is located on The lap belt cannot do its job
the outboard side of the seat. See either. In a crash, the belt could
Power Seat Adjustment on go up over your abdomen. The
page 2‑4 for more information. belt forces would be there, not at
your pelvic bones. This could
Move the switch forward or rearward cause serious internal injuries.
to adjust the seatback.
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.
Heated Front Seats On vehicles with heated front seats, lower setting, and then the off
the controls are located near the setting. The lights indicate three for
climate controls. To operate the the highest setting and one for the
{ WARNING heated seats the ignition must be lowest.
If you cannot feel temperature in ON/RUN. The passenger seat may take
change or pain to the skin, the longer to heat up.
seat heater may cause burns When Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
even at low temperatures. To transmitter is used to remote start
reduce the risk of burns, people the vehicle, the front heated seats
with such a condition should use will heat to the highest setting if it is
care when using the seat heater, cold outside. When the ignition is
especially for long periods of turned on with the key the heated
time. Do not place anything on seat feature turns off. Press the
the seat that insulates against button to turn the feature back on.
heat, such as a blanket, cushion, See Remote Vehicle Start on
cover or similar item. This may page 1‑5.
cause the seat heater to
overheat. An overheated seat
Press the button L to heat the seat
heater may cause a burn or
cushion and seatback.
may damage the seat.
Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press, the
heated seat will change to the next
Rear Seats WARNING (Continued)

Split Folding Seatbacks
The person wearing the belt could
With this feature, either side of the be seriously injured. After raising
rear seatback can be folded down the rear seatback, always check
for more cargo space.
to be sure that the safety belts
are properly routed and attached,
{ WARNING and are not twisted.
If either seatback is not locked, it Notice: Folding a rear seat with
could move forward in a sudden the safety belts still fastened may
stop or crash. That could cause cause damage to the seat or the 2. Lift the lever located on the top
injury to the person sitting there. safety belts. Always unbuckle the of the seatback.
Always push and pull on the safety belts and return them to
seatbacks to be sure they are their normal stowed position 3. Fold the seatback forward.
locked. before folding a rear seat. Keep the seat in the upright locked
1. To fold the seatback down: position when not in use.
To recline the seatback:
{ WARNING The rear safety belts must be
unbuckled and the front 1. Lift and hold the lever located on
A safety belt that is improperly seatbacks are not reclined. top of the seatback.
routed, not properly attached, 2. Tilt the seatback rearward, then
or twisted will not provide the release the lever when the
protection needed in a crash. seatback is in the desired
(Continued) position.
Safety Belts { WARNING

In most states and in all Canadian
provinces, the law requires wearing
This section of the manual safety belts. Here is why:
describes how to use safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside You never know if you will be in a
properly. It also describes some
of a vehicle. In a collision, people crash. If you do have a crash, you
things not to do with safety belts.
riding in these areas are more do not know if it will be a
serious one.
{ WARNING likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride A few crashes are mild, and some
Do not let anyone ride where a in any area of your vehicle that is crashes can be so serious that even
safety belt cannot be worn not equipped with seats and buckled up, a person would not
properly. In a crash, if you or your safety belts. Be sure everyone in survive. But most crashes are in
passenger(s) are not wearing your vehicle is in a seat and using between. In many of them, people
safety belts, the injuries can be a safety belt properly. who buckle up can survive and
much worse. You can hit things sometimes walk away. Without
This vehicle has indicators as a safety belts they could have been
inside the vehicle harder or be
reminder to buckle the safety belts. badly hurt or killed.
ejected from the vehicle. You and
your passenger(s) can be See Safety Belt Reminders on After more than 40 years of safety
seriously injured or killed. In the page 4‑15 for additional belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
information. In most crashes buckling up does
same crash, you might not be,
if you are buckled up. Always matter ... a lot!
fasten your safety belt, and check
that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything,
you go as fast as it goes.
Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the

vehicle. The rider does not stop.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose

it is just a seat on wheels.
The person keeps going until or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!
stopped by something. In a real With safety belts, you slow down as
vehicle, it could be the windshield... the vehicle does. You get more time
to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety
belts make such good sense.
Questions and Answers About Q: If I am a good driver, and I How to Wear Safety Belts
Safety Belts never drive far from home,
why should I wear safety
Properly
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle belts? This section is only for people of
after a crash if I am wearing a adult size.
safety belt? A: You may be an excellent driver,
but if you are in a crash — even Be aware that there are special
A: You could be — whether you are one that is not your fault — you things to know about safety belts
wearing a safety belt or not. But and your passenger(s) can be and children. And there are different
your chance of being conscious hurt. Being a good driver does rules for smaller children and
during and after an accident, so not protect you from things infants. If a child will be riding in the
you can unbuckle and get out, is beyond your control, such as vehicle, see Older Children on
much greater if you are belted. bad drivers. page 2‑41 or Infants and Young
And you can unbuckle a safety Children on page 2‑43. Follow
belt, even if you are Most accidents occur within
40 km (25 miles) of home. And those rules for everyone's
upside down. protection.
the greatest number of serious
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why injuries and deaths occur at It is very important for all occupants
should I have to wear safety speeds of less than to buckle up. Statistics show that
belts? 65 km/h (40 mph). unbelted people are hurt more often
A: Airbags are supplemental Safety belts are for everyone. in crashes than those who are
systems only; so they work with wearing safety belts.
safety belts — not instead of Occupants who are not buckled up
them. Whether or not an airbag can be thrown out of the vehicle in a
is provided, all occupants still crash. And they can strike others in
have to buckle up to get the the vehicle who are wearing safety
most protection. That is true not belts.
only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other
collisions.
First, before you or your touching the thighs. In a crash, this Q: What is wrong with this?
passenger(s) wear a safety belt, applies force to the strong pelvic
there is important information you bones and you would be less likely
should know. to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force
on your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a
sudden stop or crash.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose.
It will not give as much
protection this way.
Sit up straight and always keep your
feet on the floor in front of you. The
lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just
Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING { WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if your You can be seriously hurt if your
shoulder belt is too loose. In a lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
crash, you would move forward you could slide under the lap
too much, which could increase belt and apply force on your
injury. The shoulder belt should fit abdomen. This could cause
snugly against your body. serious or even fatal injuries. The
lap belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching
the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will

not give nearly as much
protection this way.
Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured if
your belt is buckled in the wrong
place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there,
not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt
into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong A: The belt is over an armrest.

buckle.
Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING { WARNING
You can be seriously injured if You can be seriously injured if
your belt goes over an armrest you wear the shoulder belt under
like this. The belt would be much your arm. In a crash, your body
too high. In a crash, you can slide would move too far forward,
under the belt. The belt force which would increase the chance
would then be applied on the of head and neck injury. Also, the
abdomen, not on the pelvic belt would apply too much force
bones, and that could cause to the ribs, which are not as
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure strong as shoulder bones. You
the belt goes under the armrests. could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under The shoulder belt should go over
the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder and across the
the shoulder at all times. chest.
Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured by
not wearing the lap-shoulder belt
properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder
belt. Your body could move too
far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
A: The belt is behind the body. injuries. The shoulder belt should A: The belt is twisted across
go over the shoulder and across the body.
the chest.
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured by a
twisted belt. In a crash, you would
not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it
can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
Lap-Shoulder Belt 4. If equipped with a shoulder belt

height adjuster, move it to the
All seating positions in the vehicle height that is right for you.
have a lap-shoulder belt. See “Shoulder Belt Height
The following instructions explain Adjustment” later in this section
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt for instructions on use and
properly. important safety information.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see “Seats”
in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull 3. Push the latch plate into the
the belt across you. Do not let it buckle until it clicks.
get twisted.
Pull up on the latch plate to
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if make sure it is secure. If the belt
you pull the belt across you very is not long enough, see Safety
quickly. If this happens, let the Belt Extender on page 2‑23.
belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you Position the release button on
more slowly. the buckle so that the safety belt 5. To make the lap part tight, pull
could be quickly unbuckled if up on the shoulder belt.
If the shoulder portion of a necessary.
passenger belt is pulled out all It may be necessary to pull
the way, the child restraint stitching on the safety belt
locking feature may be engaged. through the latch plate to fully
If this happens, let the belt go tighten the lap belt on smaller
back all the way and start again. occupants.
Before a door is closed, be sure the

safety belt is out of the way. If a
door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver and
right front passenger seating
positions.
Adjust the height so that the
To unlatch the belt, push the button shoulder portion of the belt is Move the height adjuster up to the
on the buckle. For outboard seating centered on the shoulder. The belt desired position by pushing up on
positions, slide the latch plate up should be away from the face and the height adjuster.
the safety belt webbing when the neck, but not falling off the shoulder. After the height adjuster is set to the
safety belt is not in use. The latch Improper shoulder belt height desired position, try to move it up or
plate should rest on the stitching on adjustment could reduce the down without pressing the release
the safety belt, near the guide loop. effectiveness of the safety belt in a button (A) to make sure it has
crash. locked into position. Press the
release button to lower the height
adjuster.
Safety Belt Pretensioners Rear Safety Belt Comfort There is one guide for each outside
Guides passenger position in the rear seat.
This vehicle has safety belt
Here is how to install a comfort
pretensioners for front outboard This vehicle may have rear shoulder guide to the safety belt:
occupants. Although the safety belt belt comfort guides. If not, they are
pretensioners cannot be seen, they available through your dealer/
are part of the safety belt assembly. retailer. The guides may provide
They can help tighten the safety added safety belt comfort for older
belts during the early stages of a children who have outgrown booster
moderate to severe frontal and near seats and for some adults. When
frontal crash if the threshold installed and properly adjusted, the
conditions for pretensioner comfort guide positions the belt
activation are met. away from the neck and head.
Pretensioners work only once. If the
pretensioners activate in a crash,
they need to be replaced, and other
new parts for the vehicle's safety
belt system may be required. See 1. Remove the guide from its
Replacing Safety Belt System Parts storage pocket on the side of the
After a Crash on page 2‑24. seatback.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
2. Place the guide over the belt, 3. The belt should not be twisted
and insert the two edges of the and it should lie flat. The elastic
belt into the slots of the guide. cord must be under the belt and
the guide on top.
Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely
Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a
including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for
occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety
be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them
wear safety belts. properly.
Safety Belt Extender

If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.
4. Buckle, position, and release
the safety belt as described But if a safety belt is not long
previously in this section. Make enough, your dealer/retailer will
sure that the shoulder belt order you an extender. When you
crosses the shoulder. go in to order it, take the heaviest
coat you will wear, so the extender
To remove and store the comfort will be long enough for you. To help
guide, squeeze the belt edges avoid personal injury, do not let
together so that the safety belt can someone else use it, and use it only
be removed from the guide. Slide for the seat it is made to fit. The
the guide back into its storage A pregnant woman should wear a
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap extender has been designed for
pocket located on the side of the adults. Never use it for securing
seatback. portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding, child seats. To wear it, attach it to
throughout the pregnancy. the regular safety belt. For more
information, see the instruction
sheet that comes with the extender.
Safety System Check Safety Belt Care WARNING (Continued)

Now and then, check that the safety Keep belts clean and dry.
belt reminder light, safety belts, safety belt systems are working
buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly.
{ WARNING properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
Look for any other loose or Do not bleach or dye safety belts. replacements made as soon as
damaged safety belt system parts It may severely weaken them. In possible.
that might keep a safety belt system a crash, they might not be able to
from doing its job. See your dealer/ provide adequate protection. After a minor crash, replacement of
retailer to have it repaired. Torn or Clean safety belts only with mild safety belts may not be necessary.
frayed safety belts may not protect soap and lukewarm water. But the safety belt assemblies that
you in a crash. They can rip apart were used during any crash may
under impact forces. If a belt is torn have been stressed or damaged.
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Replacing Safety Belt See your dealer/retailer to have the
Make sure the safety belt reminder
System Parts After a safety belt assemblies inspected or
light is working. See Safety Belt Crash replaced.
Reminders on page 4‑15 for more New parts and repairs may be
information. { WARNING necessary even if the safety belt
Keep safety belts clean and dry. system was not being used at the
A crash can damage the safety time of the crash.
See Safety Belt Care on
belt system in the vehicle.
page 2‑24. Have the safety belt pretensioners
A damaged safety belt system checked if the vehicle has been in a
may not properly protect the crash, or if the airbag readiness light
person using it, resulting in stays on after you start the vehicle
serious injury or even death in a or while you are driving. See Airbag
crash. To help make sure the Readiness Light on page 4‑16.
(Continued)
Airbag System All of the airbags in the vehicle will

have the word AIRBAG embossed { WARNING
The vehicle has the following in the trim or on an attached label
airbags: near the deployment opening. Be sure that cargo is not near an
airbag. In a crash, an inflating
. A frontal airbag for the driver. For frontal airbags, the word airbag might force that object
. A frontal airbag for the right front AIRBAG will appear on the middle toward a person. This could
passenger. part of the steering wheel for the cause severe injury or even
driver and on the instrument panel death. Secure objects away from
. A seat-mounted side impact for the right front passenger.
airbag for the driver. the area in which an airbag would
With seat-mounted side impact inflate. For more information, see
. A seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word AIRBAG will Where Are the Airbags? on
airbag for the right front appear on the side of the seatback page 2‑27 and Vehicle Load
passenger. closest to the door. Limits on page 8‑24.
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver With roof-rail airbags, the word
and the passenger seated AIRBAG will appear along the trim. Airbags are designed to supplement
directly behind the driver. the protection provided by safety
Even if you do not have a right front belts. Even though today's airbags
. A roof-rail airbag for the right passenger seat in the vehicle there are also designed to help reduce
front passenger and the is still an active frontal airbag in the the risk of injury from the force of an
passenger seated directly right side of the instrument panel. inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
behind the right front passenger. Do not place cargo in front of this very quickly to do their job.
airbag.
Here are the most important things

to know about the airbag system: { WARNING { WARNING
Airbags inflate with great force, Children who are up against,
{ WARNING faster than the blink of an eye. or very close to, any airbag when
You can be severely injured or Anyone who is up against, or very it inflates can be seriously
killed in a crash if you are not close to, any airbag when it injured or killed. Airbags plus
wearing your safety belt — even if inflates can be seriously injured lap-shoulder belts offer protection
you have airbags. Airbags are or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily for adults and older children, but
designed to work with safety close to the airbag, as you would not for young children and infants.
belts, but do not replace them. be if you were sitting on the edge Neither the vehicle's safety belt
Also, airbags are not designed to of your seat or leaning forward. system nor its airbag system is
deploy in every crash. In some Safety belts help keep you in designed for them. Young
crashes safety belts are your only position before and during a children and infants need the
restraint. See When Should an crash. Always wear your safety protection that a child restraint
Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑29. belt, even with airbags. The driver system can provide. Always
should sit as far back as possible secure children properly in your
Wearing your safety belt during a while still maintaining control of vehicle. To read how, see Older
crash helps reduce your chance the vehicle. Children on page 2‑41 or Infants
of hitting things inside the vehicle and Young Children on
or being ejected from it. Airbags Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side page 2‑43.
are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. Everyone in your windows in seating positions with
vehicle should wear a safety belt seat-mounted side impact airbags
properly — whether or not there is and/or roof-rail airbags.
an airbag for that person.
Where Are the Airbags?
There is an airbag readiness light

on the instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag The right front passenger frontal
Readiness Light on page 4‑16 for airbag is in the instrument panel on
more information. The driver frontal airbag is in the the passenger side.
middle of the steering wheel.
{ WARNING
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
Driver Side shown, Passenger Driver Side shown, Passenger airbag, and do not attach or put
Side similar Side similar anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
The seat-mounted side impact The roof-rail airbags for the driver, airbag covering.
airbags for the driver and right front right front passenger, and second
passenger are in the side of the row outboard passengers are in the (Continued)
seatbacks closest to the door. ceiling above the side windows.
WARNING (Continued)
When Should an Airbag Frontal airbags may inflate at
different crash speeds. For
Inflate? example:
Do not use seat accessories Frontal airbags are designed to . If the vehicle hits a stationary
that block the inflation path of a inflate in moderate to severe frontal object, the airbags could inflate
seat-mounted side impact airbag. or near-frontal crashes to help at a different crash speed than if
Never secure anything to the roof reduce the potential for severe the vehicle hits a moving object.
injuries mainly to the driver's or right
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags . If the vehicle hits an object that
front passenger's head and chest.
by routing a rope or tie down deforms, the airbags could
However, they are only designed to
through any door or window inflate if the impact exceeds a inflate at a different crash speed
opening. If you do, the path of an predetermined deployment than if the vehicle hits an object
inflating roof-rail airbag will be threshold. Deployment thresholds that does not deform.
blocked. are used to predict how severe a . If the vehicle hits a narrow object
crash is likely to be in time for the (like a pole), the airbags could
airbags to inflate and help restrain inflate at a different crash speed
the occupants. than if the vehicle hits a wide
Whether the frontal airbags will or object (like a wall).
should deploy is not based on how . If the vehicle goes into an object
fast your vehicle is traveling. at an angle, the airbags could
It depends largely on what you hit, inflate at a different crash speed
the direction of the impact, and how than if the vehicle goes straight
quickly your vehicle slows down. into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with Seat-mounted side impact and deploy when either side of the
specific vehicle design. roof-rail airbags are intended to vehicle is struck, or if the sensing
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate in moderate to severe side system predicts that the vehicle is
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear crashes. In addition, these roof-rail about to roll over, or in a severe
impacts, or in many side impacts. airbags are intended to inflate frontal impact.
during a rollover or in a severe In any particular crash, no one can
In addition, the vehicle has frontal impact. Seat-mounted side
dual-stage frontal airbags. say whether an airbag should have
impact and roof-rail airbags will inflated simply because of the
Dual-stage airbags adjust the inflate if the crash severity is above
restraint according to crash severity. damage to a vehicle or because of
the system's designed threshold what the repair costs were. For
The vehicle has electronic frontal level. The threshold level can vary
sensors, which help the sensing frontal airbags, inflation is
with specific vehicle design. determined by what the vehicle hits,
system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more Seat-mounted side impact airbags the angle of the impact, and how
severe frontal impact. For moderate are not intended to inflate in frontal quickly the vehicle slows down. For
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags impacts, near-frontal impacts, seat-mounted side impact and
inflate at a level less than full rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-rail roof-rail airbags, deployment is
deployment. For more severe frontal airbags are not intended to inflate in determined by the location and
impacts, full deployment occurs. rear impacts. A seat-mounted side severity of the side impact. In a
impact airbag is intended to deploy rollover event, roof-rail airbag
The vehicle has seat-mounted side on the side of the vehicle that is deployment is determined by the
impact and roof-rail airbags. See struck. Both roof-rail airbags will direction of the roll.
Airbag System on page 2‑25.
What Makes an Airbag How Does an Airbag Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
are designed to help contain the
Inflate? Restrain? head and chest of occupants in the
In a deployment event, the sensing In moderate to severe frontal or outboard seating positions in the
system sends an electrical signal near frontal collisions, even belted first and second rows. The rollover
triggering a release of gas from the occupants can contact the steering capable roof-rail airbags are
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the wheel or the instrument panel. In designed to help reduce the risk of
airbag causing the bag to break out moderate to severe side collisions, full or partial ejection in rollover
of the cover and deploy. The inflator, even belted occupants can contact events, although no system can
the airbag, and related hardware are the inside of the vehicle. prevent all such ejections.
all part of the airbag module. Airbags supplement the protection But airbags would not help in
Frontal airbag modules are located provided by safety belts. Frontal many types of collisions, primarily
inside the steering wheel and airbags distribute the force of the because the occupant's motion is
instrument panel. For vehicles with impact more evenly over the not toward those airbags. See When
seat-mounted side impact airbags, occupant's upper body, stopping Should an Airbag Inflate? on
there are airbag modules in the side the occupant more gradually. page 2‑29 for more information.
of the front seatbacks closest to the Seat‐mounted side impact and Airbags should never be regarded
door. For vehicles with roof-rail roof-rail airbags distribute the force as anything more than a supplement
airbags, there are airbag modules in of the impact more evenly over the to safety belts.
the ceiling of the vehicle, near the occupant's upper body.
side windows that have occupant
seating positions.
What Will You See After You can lock the doors, turn off the
an Airbag Inflates?
{ WARNING interior lamps and hazard warning
flashers by using the controls for
After the frontal airbags and When an airbag inflates, there those features.
seat-mounted side impact airbags may be dust in the air. This dust
could cause breathing problems
inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not for people with a history of { WARNING
even realize an airbag inflated. asthma or other breathing trouble. A crash severe enough to inflate
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least To avoid this, everyone in the the airbags may have also
partially inflated for some time after vehicle should get out as soon as damaged important functions in
they deploy. Some components of it is safe to do so. If you have the vehicle, such as the fuel
the airbag module may be hot for breathing problems but cannot system, brake and steering
several minutes. For location of the get out of the vehicle after an systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
airbag modules, see What Makes airbag inflates, then get fresh air appears to be drivable after a
an Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑31. by opening a window or a door. moderate crash, there may be
The parts of the airbag that come If you experience breathing concealed damage that could
into contact with you may be warm, problems following an airbag make it difficult to safely operate
but not too hot to touch. There may deployment, you should seek the vehicle.
be some smoke and dust coming medical attention.
from the vents in the deflated Use caution if you should attempt
airbags. Airbag inflation does not The vehicle has a feature that may to restart the engine after a crash
prevent the driver from seeing out of automatically unlock the doors, turn has occurred.
the windshield or being able to steer on the interior lamps and hazard
the vehicle, nor does it prevent warning flashers, and shut off the
people from leaving the vehicle. fuel system after the airbags inflate.
In many crashes severe enough to

. The vehicle has a crash sensing
inflate the airbag, windshields are and diagnostic module which
broken by vehicle deformation. records information after a
Additional windshield breakage may crash. See Vehicle Data
also occur from the right front Recording and Privacy on
passenger airbag. page 12‑15 and Event Data
Recorders on page 12‑15.
. Airbags are designed to inflate United States
only once. After an airbag
. Let only qualified technicians
inflates, you will need some new work on the airbag systems.
parts for the airbag system. Improper service can mean that
If you do not get them, the an airbag system will not work
airbag system will not be there properly. See your dealer/retailer
to help protect you in another for service.
crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly Passenger Sensing Canada
other parts. The service manual System The words ON and OFF, or the
for your vehicle covers the need symbol for on and off, are visible
to replace other parts. The vehicle has a passenger during the system check. If you are
sensing system for the right front using remote start, if equipped, to
passenger position. The passenger start the vehicle from a distance,
airbag status indicator will be visible you may not see the system check.
on the overhead console when the When the system check is
vehicle is started. complete, either the word ON or
OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will
be visible. See Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 4‑17.
The passenger sensing system We recommend that children be

turns off the right front passenger secured in a rear seat, including: WARNING (Continued)
frontal airbag under certain an infant or a child riding in a
conditions. The driver airbag, rear-facing child restraint; a child injured or killed if the right front
seat‐mounted side impact airbags riding in a forward-facing child seat; passenger airbag inflates and the
and the roof-rail airbags are not an older child riding in a booster passenger seat is in a forward
affected by the passenger sensing seat; and children, who are large position.
system. enough, using safety belts.
Even if the passenger sensing
The passenger sensing system A label on the sun visor says, system has turned off the right
works with sensors that are part of “Never put a rear-facing child seat in front passenger frontal airbag, no
the right front passenger seat. The the front.” This is because the risk to system is fail-safe. No one can
sensors are designed to detect the the rear-facing child is so great, guarantee that an airbag will not
presence of a properly-seated if the airbag deploys. deploy under some unusual
occupant and determine if the right circumstance, even though the
front passenger frontal airbag
should be enabled (may inflate)
{ WARNING airbag is turned off.
or not. A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints
According to accident statistics, restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the
children are safer when properly or killed if the right front airbag is off. If you secure a
secured in a rear seat in the correct passenger airbag inflates. This forward-facing child restraint in
child restraint for their weight is because the back of the the right front seat, always move
and size. rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far
be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to
airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a
child restraint can be seriously rear seat.
(Continued)
The passenger sensing system is The passenger sensing system is build. Everyone in the vehicle
designed to turn off the right front designed to turn on (may inflate) the who has outgrown child restraints
passenger frontal airbag if: right front passenger frontal airbag should wear a safety belt
. The right front passenger seat is anytime the system senses that a properly — whether or not there
unoccupied. person of adult size is sitting is an airbag for that person.
properly in the right front
. The system determines that an
infant is present in a child
passenger seat. { WARNING
restraint. When the passenger sensing
system has allowed the airbag to be If the airbag readiness light ever
. A right front passenger takes enabled, the on indicator will light comes on and stays on, it means
his/her weight off of the seat for and stay lit to remind you that the that something may be wrong
a period of time. airbag is active. with the airbag system. To help
. Or, if there is a critical problem avoid injury to yourself or others,
For some children, including
with the airbag system or the have the vehicle serviced right
children in child restraints, and for
passenger sensing system. away. See Airbag Readiness
very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn Light on page 4‑16 for more
When the passenger sensing information, including important
system has turned off the right front off the right front passenger frontal
airbag, depending upon the safety information.
passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator will light and stay lit to person’s seating posture and body
remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 4‑17.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a 5. If, after reinstalling the child If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Child Restraint restraint and restarting the Adult-Size Occupant
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
If a child restraint has been installed turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
and the on indicator is lit: recline the vehicle seatback
1. Turn the vehicle off. and adjust the seat cushion,
if adjustable, to make sure that
2. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle seatback is not
the vehicle.
pushing the child restraint into
3. Remove any additional items the seat cushion.
from the seat such as blankets,
Also make sure the child
cushions, seat covers, seat
restraint is not trapped under
heaters, or seat massagers.
the vehicle head restraint. If this
4. Reinstall the child restraint happens, adjust the head
following the directions restraint. See Head Restraints
provided by the child restraint on page 2‑2. If a person of adult-size is sitting in
manufacturer and refer to the right front passenger seat, but
6. Restart the vehicle.
Securing Child Restraints the off indicator is lit, it could be
(Rear Seat ) on page 2‑56 or The passenger sensing system because that person is not sitting
Securing Child Restraints (Front may or may not turn off the properly in the seat. If this happens,
Passenger Seat) on page 2‑58. airbag for a child in a child
restraint depending upon the
child’s seating posture and body
build. It is better to secure the
child restraint in a rear seat.
use the following steps to allow the Additional Factors Affecting A wet seat can affect the
system to detect that person and System Operation performance of the passenger
enable the right front passenger sensing system. Here is how:
frontal airbag: Safety belts help keep the
passenger in position on the seat . The passenger sensing system
1. Turn the vehicle off. during vehicle maneuvers and may turn off the passenger
2. Remove any additional material braking, which helps the passenger airbag when liquid is soaked into
from the seat, such as blankets, sensing system maintain the the seat. If this happens, the off
cushions, seat covers, seat passenger airbag status. See indicator will be lit, and the
heaters, or seat massagers. “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” airbag readiness light on the
in the Index for additional instrument panel will also be lit.
3. Place the seatback in the fully information about the importance
upright position.
. Liquid pooled on the seat that
of proper restraint use. has not soaked in may make it
4. Have the person sit upright in A thick layer of additional material, more likely that the passenger
the seat, centered on the seat such as a blanket or cushion, sensing system will enable (turn
cushion, with legs comfortably or aftermarket equipment such as on) the passenger airbag while a
extended. seat covers, seat heaters, and seat child restraint or child occupant
5. Restart the vehicle and have the massagers can affect how well is on the seat. If the passenger
person remain in this position for the passenger sensing system airbag is turned on, the on
two to three minutes after the on operates. We recommend that indicator will be lit.
indicator is lit. you not use seat covers or other If the passenger seat gets wet, dry
aftermarket equipment except when the seat immediately. If the airbag
approved by GM for your specific readiness light is lit, do not install a
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to child restraint or allow anyone to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on occupy the seat. See Airbag
page 2‑38 for more information Readiness Light on page 4‑16
about modifications that can affect for important safety information.
how the system operates.
The on indicator may be lit if an Your dealer/retailer and the service Adding Equipment to the
object, such as a briefcase, manual have information about
handbag, grocery bag, laptop or servicing the vehicle and the airbag
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
other electronic device, is put on an system. To purchase a service Q: Is there anything I might add
unoccupied seat. If this is not manual, see Service Publications to or change about the vehicle
desired remove the object from Ordering Information on page 12‑12. that could keep the airbags
the seat. from working properly?
{ WARNING A: Yes. If you add things that
{ WARNING For up to 10 seconds after the
change the vehicle's frame,
bumper system, height, front end
Stowing of articles under the ignition is turned off and the or side sheet metal, they may
passenger seat or between the battery is disconnected, an airbag keep the airbag system from
passenger seat cushion and can still inflate during improper working properly. Changing or
seatback may interfere with the service. You can be injured if you moving any parts of the front
proper operation of the passenger are close to an airbag when it seats, safety belts, the airbag
sensing system. inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. sensing and diagnostic module,
They are probably part of the steering wheel, instrument
Servicing the airbag system. Be sure to follow panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle proper service procedures, and ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
make sure the person performing trim, overhead console, front
Airbags affect how the vehicle work for you is qualified to do so. sensors, side impact sensors,
should be serviced. There are parts rollover sensor module, or airbag
of the airbag system in several wiring can affect the operation of
places around the vehicle. the airbag system.
In addition, the vehicle has a This could either prevent proper Q: Because I have a disability,
passenger sensing system for deployment of the passenger I have to get my vehicle
the right front passenger airbag(s) or prevent the modified. How can I find out
position, which includes sensors passenger sensing system whether this will affect my
that are part of the passenger from properly turning off the airbag system?
seat. The passenger sensing passenger airbag(s). See A: If you have questions, call
system may not operate properly Passenger Sensing System on Customer Assistance. The
if the original seat trim is page 2‑33. phone numbers and addresses
replaced with non-GM covers, If you have questions, call for Customer Assistance are in
upholstery or trim, or with GM Customer Assistance. The Step Two of the Customer
covers, upholstery or trim phone numbers and addresses Satisfaction Procedure in this
designed for a different vehicle. for Customer Assistance are in manual. See Customer
Any object, such as an Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure on
aftermarket seat heater or a Satisfaction Procedure in this page 12‑1.
comfort enhancing pad or manual. See Customer
device, installed under or on top Satisfaction Procedure on In addition, your dealer/retailer and
of the seat fabric, could also page 12‑1. the service manual have information
interfere with the operation of about the location of the airbag
the passenger sensing system. If the vehicle has rollover sensors, sensing and diagnostic
roof-rail airbags, see Different module and airbag wiring.
Size Tires and Wheels on
page 9‑60 for additional
important information.
Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System WARNING (Continued)

The airbag system does not need Parts After a Crash
regularly scheduled maintenance or To help make sure your airbag
replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See
{ WARNING systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
Airbag Readiness Light on A crash can damage the airbag inspected and any necessary
page 4‑16 for more information. systems in your vehicle. replacements made as soon as
Notice: If an airbag covering is A damaged airbag system possible.
damaged, opened, or broken, the may not work properly and may
airbag may not work properly. not protect you and your If an airbag inflates, you will need to
Do not open or break the airbag passenger(s) in a crash, resulting replace airbag system parts. See
coverings. If there are any in serious injury or even death. your dealer/retailer for service.
opened or broken airbag covers, (Continued) If the airbag readiness light stays on
have the airbag covering and/or after the vehicle is started or comes
airbag module replaced. For the on when you are driving, the airbag
location of the airbag modules, system may not work properly. Have
see What Makes an Airbag the vehicle serviced right away. See
Inflate? on page 2‑31. See your Airbag Readiness Light on
dealer/retailer for service. page 4‑16 for more information.
Child Restraints The manufacturer's instructions that

come with the booster seat, state
Safety Belt Comfort Guides”
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
the weight and height limitations for page 2‑19 for more information.
Older Children that booster. Use a booster seat If the shoulder belt still does not
with a lap-shoulder belt until the rest on the shoulder, then return
child passes the below fit test: to the booster seat.
. Sit all the way back on the seat. . Does the lap belt fit low and
Do the knees bend at the seat snug on the hips, touching the
edge? If yes, continue. If no, thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat. return to the booster seat.
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. . Can proper safety belt fit be
Does the shoulder belt rest on maintained for the length of the
the shoulder? If yes, continue. trip? If yes, continue. If no,
If no, try using the rear safety return to the booster seat.
belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Older children who have outgrown

booster seats should wear the
vehicle's safety belts.
Q: What is the proper way to In a crash, children who are not

wear safety belts? buckled up can strike other people
A: An older child should wear a who are buckled up, or can be
lap-shoulder belt and get the thrown out of the vehicle. Older
additional restraint a shoulder children need to use safety belts
belt can provide. The shoulder properly.
belt should not cross the face or
neck. The lap belt should fit { WARNING
snugly below the hips, just
touching the top of the thighs. Never do this.
This applies belt force to the Never allow two children to wear
child's pelvic bones in a crash. the same safety belt. The safety
It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause
belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two
{ WARNING
severe or even fatal internal children can be crushed together Never do this.
injuries in a crash. and seriously injured. A safety Never allow a child to wear the
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort belt must be used by only one safety belt with the shoulder belt
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on person at a time. behind their back. A child can be
page 2‑19.
seriously injured by not wearing
According to accident statistics, the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
children and infants are safer when crash, the child would not be
properly restrained in a child restrained by the shoulder belt.
restraint system or infant restraint
(Continued)
system secured in a rear seating
position.
WARNING (Continued)
Infants and Young WARNING (Continued)
Children
The child could move too far Everyone in a vehicle needs tighten. Never leave children
forward increasing the chance of protection! This includes infants and unattended in a vehicle and never
head and neck injury. The child all other children. Neither the allow children to play with the
might also slide under the lap distance traveled nor the age and safety belts.
belt. The belt force would then be size of the traveler changes the
applied right on the abdomen. need, for everyone, to use safety Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer
That could cause serious or fatal restraints. In fact, the law in every protection for adults and older
injuries. The shoulder belt should state in the United States and in children, but not for young children
go over the shoulder and across every Canadian province says and infants. Neither the vehicle's
the chest. children up to some age must be safety belt system nor its airbag
restrained while in a vehicle. system is designed for them. Every
time infants and young children ride
{ WARNING in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate
Children can be seriously injured child restraints.
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
(Continued)
Children who are not restrained

properly can strike other people, WARNING (Continued)
or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
It is also better to secure a
{ WARNING forward-facing child restraint in a
rear seat. If you must secure a
Never do this. forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
Never hold an infant or a child
the front passenger seat as far
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
back as it will go.
crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it during a crash.
For example, in a crash at only { WARNING
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a Never do this.
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's Children who are up against,
arms. An infant should be or very close to, any airbag when
secured in an appropriate it inflates can be seriously injured
restraint. or killed. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat.
(Continued)
Q: What are the different types of child restraint. In addition, there

add-on child restraints? are many kinds of restraints { WARNING
A: Add-on child restraints, which available for children with
special needs. A young child's hip bones are still
are purchased by the vehicle's so small that the vehicle's regular
owner, are available in four basic safety belt may not remain low
types. Selection of a particular { WARNING on the hip bones, as it should.
restraint should take into Instead, it may settle up around
consideration not only the child's To reduce the risk of neck and
head injury during a crash, infants the child's abdomen. In a crash,
weight, height, and age but also
need complete support. This is the belt would apply force on a
whether or not the restraint will
because an infant's neck is not body area that is unprotected by
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used. fully developed and its head any bony structure. This alone
weighs so much compared with could cause serious or fatal
For most basic types of child injuries. To reduce the risk of
restraints, there are many the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing child serious or fatal injuries during a
different models available. When
restraint settles into the restraint, crash, young children should
purchasing a child restraint, be
so the crash forces can be always be secured in appropriate
sure it is designed to be used in
a motor vehicle. If it is, the distributed across the strongest child restraints.
restraint will have a label saying part of an infant's body, the back
that it meets federal motor and shoulders. Infants should
vehicle safety standards. always be secured in rear-facing
The restraint manufacturer's child restraints.
instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular
Child Restraint Systems
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child restraint
provides restraint for the child's designed to improve the fit of the
A rear-facing infant seat (A) body with the harness. vehicle's safety belt system.
provides restraint with the seating A booster seat can also help a child
surface against the back of the to see out the window.
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Securing an Add-On Child the LATCH system. See Lower Securing the Child Within
Restraint in the Vehicle Anchors and Tethers for Children the Child Restraint
(LATCH System) on page 2‑50 for
more information. Children can be
{ WARNING endangered in a crash if the child
{ WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or restraint is not properly secured in A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child the vehicle. killed in a crash if the child is not
restraint is not properly secured in When securing an add-on child properly secured in the child
the vehicle. Secure the child restraint, refer to the instructions restraint. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle that come with the restraint which properly following the instructions
using the vehicle's safety belt or may be on the restraint itself or in a that came with that child restraint.
LATCH system, following the booklet, or both, and to this manual.
instructions that came with that The child restraint instructions are
child restraint and the instructions important, so if they are not
in this manual. available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
To help reduce the chance of injury, Keep in mind that an unsecured
the child restraint must be secured child restraint can move around in a
in the vehicle. Child restraint collision or sudden stop and injure
systems must be secured in vehicle people in the vehicle. Be sure to
seats by lap belts or the lap belt properly secure any child restraint
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Where to Put the

Restraint
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)
According to accident statistics, A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints
children and infants are safer when restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the airbag
properly restrained in a child or killed if the right front is off. If you secure a
restraint system or infant restraint passenger airbag inflates. This forward-facing child restraint in
system secured in a rear seating is because the back of the the right front seat, always move
position. rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far
be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to
We recommend that children and
airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a
child restraints be secured in a rear
child restraint can be seriously rear seat.
seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Sensing System
a child riding in a forward-facing passenger airbag inflates and the on page 2‑33 for additional
child seat; an older child riding in a passenger seat is in a forward information.
booster seat; and children, who are position.
large enough, using safety belts. Even if the passenger sensing When securing a child restraint in a
A label on your sun visor says, system has turned off the right rear seating position, study the
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in front passenger frontal airbag, no instructions that came with your
the front.” This is because the risk to system is fail-safe. No one can child restraint to make sure it is
the rear-facing child is so great, guarantee that an airbag will not compatible with this vehicle.
if the airbag deploys. deploy under some unusual If the vehicle does not have a rear
circumstance, even though it is seat that will accommodate a
turned off. rear-facing child restraint, we
(Continued) recommend that rear-facing child
restraints not be transported in the
vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
Wherever you install a child Configurations for Use of

restraint, be sure to secure the Child Restraints
child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to A. Child restraint or occupant using
properly secure any child restraint in safety belt
your vehicle — even when no child
is in it. A. Child restraint using LATCH
If you need to secure more than one B. Occupant prohibited
child restraint in the rear seat,
review the following illustrations.
Depending on where you place the
child restraint or the size of the A. Child restraint or occupant using
child restraint, you may not be able safety belt
to access certain safety belt
assemblies or LATCH anchors for B. Child restraint using LATCH
additional passengers or child A. Child restraint using LATCH
restraints. B. Occupant prohibited
C. Child restraint or occupant using
safety belt
Lower Anchors and When installing a child restraint with Lower Anchors
a top tether, you must also use
Tethers for Children either the lower anchors or the
(LATCH System) safety belts to properly secure the
The LATCH system holds a child child restraint. A child restraint must
restraint during driving or in a crash. never be installed using only the top
This system is designed to make tether and anchor.
installation of a child restraint easier. In order to use the LATCH system
The LATCH system uses anchors in in your vehicle, you need a child Lower anchors (A) are metal bars
the vehicle and attachments on the restraint that has LATCH built into the vehicle. There are two
child restraint that are made for use attachments. The child restraint lower anchors for each LATCH
with the LATCH system. manufacturer will provide you with seating position that will
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible instructions on how to use the child accommodate a child restraint
child restraint is properly installed restraint and its attachments. The with lower attachments (B).
using the anchors, or use the following explains how to attach a
vehicle's safety belts to secure the child restraint with these
restraint, following the instructions attachments in your vehicle.
that came with that restraint, and Not all vehicle seating positions or
also the instructions in this manual. child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
Top Tether Anchor Your child restraint may have a Lower Anchor and Top Tether
single tether (A) or a dual tether (C). Anchor Locations
Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow
A top tether (A, C) anchors the the instructions for your child
Rear Seat
top of the child restraint to the restraint.
vehicle. A top tether anchor is built i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
into the vehicle. The top tether positions with top tether anchors.
attachment (B) on the child restraint j (Lower Anchor): Seating
connects to the top tether anchor in positions with two lower anchors.
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of The rear outboard seating positions
the child restraint during driving or in have exposed metal anchors
a crash. located in the crease between the
seatback and the seat cushion.
Be sure to use an anchor located on Securing a Child Restraint

the same side of the vehicle as the Designed for the LATCH
seating position where the child System
restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
{ WARNING
if a national or local law requires If a LATCH-type child restraint is
that the top tether be attached, or if not attached to anchors, the child
the instructions that come with the restraint will not be able to protect
child restraint say that the top tether the child correctly. In a crash, the
must be attached. child could be seriously injured or
According to accident statistics, killed. Install a LATCH-type child
Top Tether Anchors restraint properly using the
children and infants are safer when
The top tether anchors for each rear properly restrained in a child anchors, or use the vehicle's
seating position are located on the restraint system or infant restraint safety belts to secure the
back of the rear seatback. You may system secured in a rear seating restraint, following the instructions
need to adjust the rear compartment position. See Where to Put the that came with the child restraint
storage panel/cover in the rear Restraint on page 2‑48 for and the instructions in this
cargo area to access the anchors. additional information. manual.
This system is designed to make

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) installation of child restraints easier.
When using lower anchors, do not
Do not attach more than one child the shoulder belt all the way out use the vehicle's safety belts.
restraint to a single anchor. of the retractor to set the lock, Instead use the vehicle's anchors
Attaching more than one child if your vehicle has one, after the and child restraint attachments to
restraint to a single anchor could child restraint has been installed. secure the restraints. Some
cause the anchor or attachment restraints also use another vehicle
to come loose or even break Notice: Do not let the LATCH anchor to secure a top tether.
during a crash. A child or others attachments rub against the 1. Attach and tighten the lower
could be injured. To reduce the vehicle’s safety belts. This may attachments to the lower
risk of serious or fatal injuries damage these parts. If necessary, anchors. If the child restraint
during a crash, attach only one move buckled safety belts to does not have lower
child restraint per anchor. avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments or the desired
attachments. seating position does not have
Do not fold the empty rear seat lower anchors, secure the child
{ WARNING with a safety belt buckled. This restraint with the top tether and
could damage the safety belt or the safety belts. Refer to your
Children can be seriously injured the seat. Unbuckle and return the child restraint manufacturer
or strangled if a shoulder belt is safety belt to its stowed position, instructions and the instructions
wrapped around their neck and before folding the seat. in this manual.
the safety belt continues to
Make sure to attach the child 1.1. Find the lower anchors for
tighten. Buckle any unused safety
restraint at the proper anchor the desired seating
belts behind the child restraint so
location. position.
children cannot reach them. Pull
(Continued)
1.2. Put the child restraint on 2.2. Route, attach and tighten
the seat. the top tether according to
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower your child restraint
attachments on the child instructions and the
restraint to the lower following instructions:
anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
child restraint instructions and
If the position you are using
the following steps:
does not have a headrest
2.1. Find the top tether anchor. or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
Replacing LATCH System

Parts After a Crash
{ WARNING
A crash can damage the LATCH
system in the vehicle. A damaged
LATCH system may not properly
secure the child restraint,
resulting in serious injury or even
death in a crash. To help make
If the position you are using If the position you are using sure the LATCH system is
has a fixed headrest or has a fixed headrest or working properly after a crash,
head restraint and you are head restraint and you are see your dealer/retailer to have
using a dual tether, route using a single tether, route the system inspected and any
the tether around the the tether over the headrest necessary replacements made as
headrest or head restraint. or head restraint. soon as possible.
3. Push and pull the child restraint
If the vehicle has the LATCH system
in different directions to be sure
and it was being used during a
it is secure.
crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Securing Child Restraints In Canada, the law requires that

forward-facing child restraints have
(Rear Seat ) a top tether, and that the tether be
When securing a child restraint in a attached.
rear seating position, study the If the child restraint does not have
instructions that came with the child the LATCH system, you will be
restraint to make sure it is using the safety belt to secure the
compatible with this vehicle. child restraint in this position. Be
If the child restraint has the LATCH sure to follow the instructions that
system, see Lower Anchors and came with the child restraint. Secure
Tethers for Children (LATCH the child in the child restraint when
System) on page 2‑50 for how and and as the instructions say.
where to install the child restraint 3. Push the latch plate into the
If more than one child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is buckle until it clicks.
needs to be installed in the rear
secured in the vehicle using a seat, be sure to read Where to Put Position the release button on
safety belt and it uses a top tether, the Restraint on page 2‑48. the buckle so that the safety belt
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for could be quickly unbuckled if
Children (LATCH System) on 1. Put the child restraint on
necessary.
page 2‑50 for top tether anchor the seat.
locations. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
Do not secure a child seat in a the lap and shoulder portions of
position without a top tether anchor the vehicle's safety belt through
if a national or local law requires or around the restraint. The child
that the top tether be anchored, or if restraint instructions will show
the instructions that come with the you how.
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
6. If the child restraint has a top

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 2‑50 for more
information.
it is secure.
To remove the child restraint,
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt 5. To tighten the belt, push down
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
all the way out of the retractor to on the child restraint, pull the
let it return to the stowed position.
set the lock. shoulder portion of the belt to
If the top tether is attached to a top
tighten the lap portion of the belt
tether anchor, disconnect it.
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Armrest Retaining Strap center armrest before installing a Remove the armrest retaining strap
rear‐facing child restraint in the before installing a forward facing
{ WARNING second row center seat position. child restraint in the center seat
position, as it may interfere with the
A rear center armrest that is not attachment of the top tether to the
properly stowed and secured top tether anchor on the seatback.
could fall forward during a sudden
stop or collision. The armrest Securing Child Restraints
could contact an infant secured in (Front Passenger Seat)
a rear‐facing child restraint in the
This vehicle has airbags. A rear
center seat position. Fasten the
seat is a safer place to secure a
retaining strap onto the stowed forward-facing child restraint. See
armrest before installing a rear‐ Where to Put the Restraint on
facing child restraint in the rear page 2‑48.
center seat position.
In addition, the vehicle has a
Stow the rear seat center armrest. passenger sensing system which is
Attach the retaining strap to the designed to turn off the right front
armrest loop (A) and to the passenger frontal airbag under
center top tether anchor on the certain conditions. See Passenger
seatback (B). Make sure the Sensing System on page 2‑33 and
retaining strap's clips are firmly Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
attached. on page 4‑17 for more information,
When new, the vehicle's glove box Install the rear-facing child including important safety
materials included an armrest restraint using the child restraint information.
retaining strap. Use it to secure the manufacturer's instructions and the
instructions described previously.
A label on the sun visor says, If the child restraint has the LATCH
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in WARNING (Continued) system, see Lower Anchors and
the front.” This is because the risk to Tethers for Children (LATCH
the rear-facing child is so great, guarantee that an airbag will not System) on page 2‑50 for how
if the airbag deploys. deploy under some unusual and where to install the child
circumstance, even though it is restraint using LATCH. If a child
{ WARNING turned off. restraint is secured using a safety
belt and it uses a top tether, see
Secure rear-facing child restraints
A child in a rear-facing child Lower Anchors and Tethers for
in a rear seat, even if the Children (LATCH System) on
restraint can be seriously injured
airbag is off. If you secure a page 2‑50 for top tether anchor
or killed if the right front
forward-facing child restraint in locations.
passenger airbag inflates. This
the right front seat, always move
is because the back of the Do not secure a child seat in a
the front passenger seat as far
rear-facing child restraint would position without a top tether anchor
back as it will go. It is better to
be very close to the inflating if a national or local law requires
secure the child restraint in a
airbag. A child in a forward-facing that the top tether be anchored, or if
rear seat.
child restraint can be seriously the instructions that come with the
injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Sensing System child restraint say that the top strap
passenger airbag inflates and the on page 2‑33 for additional must be anchored.
passenger seat is in a forward information. In Canada, the law requires that
position. forward-facing child restraints have
If the vehicle does not have a a top tether, and that the tether be
Even if the passenger sensing rear seat that will accommodate
system has turned off the right attached.
a rear‐facing child restraint, a
front passenger frontal airbag, no rear‐facing child restraint should
system is fail-safe. No one can not be installed in the vehicle, even
(Continued) if the airbag is off.
You will be using the lap-shoulder

belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag
and seat‐mounted side impact
airbag, the off indicator on the
4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt
passenger airbag status
buckle until it clicks. all the way out of the retractor to
indicator should light and stay lit
Position the release button on set the lock.
when you start the vehicle. See
Passenger Airbag Status the buckle, so that the safety
Indicator on page 4‑17. belt could be quickly unbuckled
if necessary.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
If the vehicle does not have a If a child restraint has been installed
rear seat and the child restraint and the on indicator is lit, see “If
has a top tether, follow the the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
child restraint manufacturer's Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
instructions regrading the use System on page 2‑33 for more
of the top tether. See Lower information.
Anchors and Tethers for To remove the child restraint,
Children (LATCH System) on unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
page 2‑50 for more information. let it return to the stowed position.
it is secure.
6. To tighten the belt, push down
If the airbags are off, the off
on the child restraint, pull the
indicator in the passenger airbag
shoulder portion of the belt to
status indicator will come on and
tighten the lap portion of the belt
stay on when the vehicle is started.
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
2 NOTES
Storage 3-1
Storage Storage Additional Storage

Compartments Features
Storage Compartments
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . 3-1 Instrument Panel Storage Cargo Cover
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 There may be a storage For vehicles with a cargo cover, use
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 compartment on the instrument it to cover items in the rear of the
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 3-1 panel. Pull the handle to open. vehicle.
Additional Storage Features To remove the cover from the
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Glove Box vehicle, pull both ends toward each
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Open the glove box by lifting up on other. To reinstall, place each end of
the lever. the cover in the holes behind the
Roof Rack System rear seat.
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Cupholders
Convenience Net
Two cupholders are in the center
console. Cupholders may be located This vehicle may have a
in the second row seat armrest. To convenience net located in the rear
access, pull the armrest down. of the vehicle. Attach it to the cargo
tie-downs for storing small loads.
Center Console Storage Do not use the net to store heavy
For vehicles with center console loads.
storage, use the lever on the front
to open.
3-2 Storage
Roof Rack System Notice: Loading cargo on the

roof rack that weighs more than
100 kg (220 lbs) or hangs over the
{ WARNING rear or sides of the vehicle may
damage the vehicle. Load cargo
If something is carried on top of so that it rests evenly between
the vehicle that is longer or wider the crossrails, making sure to
than the roof rack— like paneling, fasten cargo securely.
plywood, or a mattress— the wind
can catch it while the vehicle is To prevent damage or loss of cargo
being driven. The item being when driving, check to make sure
cross rails and cargo are securely
carried could be violently torn off,
fastened. Loading cargo on the roof
and this could cause a collision, The roof rack crossrails can be
rack will make the vehicle's center
and damage the vehicle. Never of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, locked in four positions along the
carry something longer or wider sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden roof rack side rails.
than the roof rack on top of the braking or abrupt maneuvers,
vehicle unless using a GM otherwise it may result in loss of
Certified accessory carrier. control. If driving for a long distance,
on rough roads, or at high speeds,
This vehicle may be equipped with a occasionally stop the vehicle to
roof rack. For roof racks that do not make sure the cargo remains in its
have cross rails included, GM place. Do not exceed the maximum
Certified cross rails can be vehicle capacity when loading the
purchased as an accessory. See vehicle. For more information on
your dealer/retailer for additional vehicle capacity and loading, see
information. Vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑24.
Storage 3-3
Try sliding the crossrails forward

and backward to ensure that they
are correctly secured and that the
levers stay tight to the cross rails.
Do not stand on the plastic lower
body panels when loading cargo on
the luggage carrier.
When the roof rack is not in use,
lock one crossrail at the furthest
forward position and lock the other
crossrail at the furthest rearward
position to reduce wind noise.
Lift the lever to release and move Push the lever down to completely
the crossrail. engage into the side rail holes.
Position the crossrail on both sides Slide the crossrails back and forth
of the vehicle at the same time. until the lock pins engage in the
holes and a click is heard as the
pins align and the crossrail locks.
3-4 Storage
2 NOTES
Instruments and Controls 4-1
Instruments and Warning Lights, Gages, and

Indicators
Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Controls Warning Lights, Gages, and Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Instrument Panel Overview Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 4-23
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 4-4 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Traction Control System
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 4-23
Controls Fuel Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 4-6 Engine Coolant Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 4-24
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 4-6 Temperature Gage . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Fuel Economy Light . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 4-15 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 4-25
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 4-7 Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 4-16 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Rear Window Wiper/ Passenger Airbag Status High-Beam on Light . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Charging System Light . . . . . . 4-18 Lamps on Reminder . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Clock (With Date Display) . . . 4-10 Malfunction Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Clock (Without Date Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-2 Instruments and Controls
Information Displays Ride Control System

Driver Information Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Airbag System Messages . . . . 4-37
Safety Belt Messages . . . . . . . 4-37
Vehicle Messages Anti-Theft Alarm System
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Battery Voltage and Charging Service Vehicle Messages . . . 4-37
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Brake System Messages . . . . 4-32 Transmission Messages . . . . . 4-38
Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Vehicle Reminder
Cruise Control Messages . . . . 4-32 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Engine Cooling System Vehicle Personalization
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 4-39
Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 4-34
Engine Power Messages . . . . 4-34 OnStar® System
Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 4-35 OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 4-35
Object Detection System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
2 NOTES
Instrument Panel Overview

A. Air Vents on page 7‑6. J. Instrument Panel Illumination V. Driver Information Center
B. Turn and Lane-Change Signals Control on page 5‑4. Buttons. See Driver Information
on page 5‑3. Exterior Lamp K. Steering Wheel Adjustment on Center (DIC) on page 4‑27.
Controls on page 5‑1. Fog page 4‑6. W. Power Door Locks on
Lamps on page 5‑3 L. Horn on page 4‑7. page 1‑7. Hazard Warning
(If Equipped). Flashers on page 5‑2. Safety
M. Steering Wheel Controls on Locks on page 1‑7.
C. Instrument Cluster on page 4‑6.
page 4‑13. X. Glove Box on page 3‑1.
N. Ignition Positions on page 8‑28.
D. Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 4‑7. Rear Window O. Climate Control Systems on
Wiper/Washer on page 4‑8. page 7‑1 or Automatic Climate
Control System on page 7‑3.
E. Power Door Unlock/Lock. See
Power Door Locks on P. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into
page 1‑7. Park on page 8‑32.
F. Instrument Panel Storage on Q. Fuel Economy Mode on
page 3‑1. page 8‑37 (If Equipped).
G. Safety Lock. See Power Door R. StabiliTrak System on
Locks on page 1‑7. page 8‑43.
H. AM-FM Radio on page 6‑11. S. Cupholders on page 3‑1.
Navigation System (If Equipped). T. Power Outlets on page 4‑11.
See Navigation System Manual.
U. CD Player on page 6‑19.
I. Cruise Control on page 8‑44.
Controls To adjust the steering wheel: Steering Wheel Controls

1. Pull the lever down.
Steering Wheel 2. Move the steering wheel up or
Adjustment down and in or out to a
comfortable position.
3. Pull the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
For vehicles with audio steering

wheel controls, some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
The adjustment lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicles _ SRC ^ (Toggle Switch): Press to Windshield Wiper/Washer
with an OnStar®, Bluetooth®, select an audio source.
or navigation system, press to Toggle up or down to select the next
interact with those systems. See or previous favorite radio station or
OnStar® System on page 4‑44, CD track, DVD, if equipped, track,
Bluetooth (Overview) on page 6‑42 or MP3 track.
or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)
on page 6‑43 or Bluetooth (Voice + x − (Volume): Press + to
Recognition) on page 6‑46 or increase the volume, press − to
Bluetooth (Navigation) on decrease the volume.
page 6‑58, or the separate
navigation manual for more Horn
information.
Press near the horn symbols or
$ / c (Mute/End Call): Press to press on the steering wheel pad to
silence the vehicle speakers only. sound the horn. The windshield wiper/washer lever
Press again to turn the sound on. is located on the right side of the
For vehicles with OnStar or steering column.
Bluetooth systems, press to reject Move the lever to one of the
an incoming call, or end a following positions:
current call.
8 (Mist): Single wipe, move the
lever to z and then release. The
wipers stop after one wipe.
( (Off): Turns the wipers off.
& (Adjustable Interval Wipes): Windshield Washer Rear Window

The time between wipes can be Pull the lever toward you to spray Wiper/Washer
adjusted. Turn the & band up for washer fluid on the windshield. The
spray continues until the lever is The rear wiper controls are on the
more frequent wipes or down for
released. The wipers will run a few end of the windshield wiper lever.
less frequent wipes.
times. See Washer Fluid on
1 (Low Speed): Slow wipes.
page 9‑22 for information on filling
2 (High Speed): Fast wipes. the windshield washer fluid
Clear snow and ice from the wiper reservoir.
blades before using them. If frozen
to the windshield, carefully loosen or { WARNING
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
should be replaced. See Wiper In freezing weather, do not use
Blade Replacement on page 9‑29. your washer until the windshield
is warmed. Otherwise the washer
Heavy snow or ice can overload the fluid can form ice on the
wiper motor. A circuit breaker will
windshield, blocking your vision.
stop the motor until it cools down.
Press the upper or lower portion of
the button to control the rear wiper
and rear wiper delay.
The system turns off when the Avoid covering the GPS antenna for
button is returned to the middle { WARNING long periods of time with objects
position. that may interfere with the antenna's
In freezing weather, do not use ability to receive a satellite signal.
Z (Rear Wiper): For continuous your washer until the windshield See Multi-Band Antenna on
rear window wipes. is warmed. Otherwise the washer page 6‑18 for the location of the
5 (Rear Wiper Delay): Sets a fluid can form ice on the vehicle's antennas. The compass
delay between wipes. windshield, blocking your vision. system is designed to operate for a
= (Rear Washer): Push the certain number of miles or degrees
windshield wiper lever forward to Compass of turn before needing a signal from
spray washer fluid on the rear the GPS satellites. When the
The vehicle may have a compass
window. The lever returns to its compass display shows CAL, drive
display on the Driver Information
starting position when released. the vehicle for a short distance in an
Center (DIC). The compass receives
open area where it can receive a
The windshield washer reservoir is its heading and other information
GPS signal. The compass system
used for the windshield and the rear from Global Positioning
will automatically determine when
window. Check the fluid level in the System (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,
GPS signal is restored and provide
reservoir if either washer is not and vehicle speed information.
a heading again. See Compass
working. See Washer Fluid on Messages on page 4‑32 for more
page 9‑22. information on the messages that
may be displayed for the compass.
Clock (With Date Display) 6. To save the time or date Setting the Month & Day
and return to the Time and Format
The infotainment system controls, Date Settings menu, press
located on the instrument panel, are 1. Turn the infotainment
the 0 BACK button at any time system ON.
used to access the time and date
settings through the menu system. or press the MENU/SEL knob
after adjusting the minutes 2. Press the CONFIG button and
See Operation on page 6‑7 for select Time and Date Settings.
information about how to use the or year.
menu system. 3. Highlight Month & Day Format.
Setting the 12/24 Hour Format
4. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
Setting the Time and Date 1. Turn the infotainment
select MM/DD (month/day) or
1. Turn the infotainment system ON.
DD/MM (day/month).
system ON. 2. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time and Date Settings. Setting the Auto Time Adjust
2. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time and Date Settings. 3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format. 1. Turn the infotainment
system ON.
3. Select Set Time or Set Date. 4. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
select the 12 hour or 24 hour 2. Press the CONFIG button and
4. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to select Time and Date Settings.
adjust the highlighted value. display format.
3. Highlight Auto Time Adjust.
select the next value. 4. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
turn Auto Time Adjust on or off.
select Time Zone, and then
select the Time Zone.
turn Daylight Savings on or off.
Clock (Without Date 5. Press the MENU/SEL knob to Power Outlets

select the next value.
Display) The accessory power outlets can be
6. To save the time and return to used to connect electrical
The infotainment system controls, the Time Settings menu, press
located on the instrument panel, are equipment, such as a cellular
used to access the time and date the 0 BACK button at any time phone.
settings through the menu system. or press the SELECT button There are four accessory power
See Operation on page 6‑7 for after adjusting the minutes. outlets in the following locations,
information about how to use the Setting the 12/24 Hour Format below the CD slot, inside the center
menu system. console storage, on the rear of the
1. Turn the infotainment center console storage, and in the
Setting the Time system ON. rear cargo compartment.
1. Turn the infotainment 2. Press the CONFIG button and
system ON. select Time Settings, or press
2. Press the CONFIG button and the H button.
select Time Settings, or press 3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.
the H button.
3. Select Set Time. select the 12 hour or 24 hour
4. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to display format.
adjust the highlighted value.
To use the outlets, remove the Notice: Adding any electrical Warning Lights,
cover. Close the outlet cover, when equipment to the vehicle can
not in use. damage it or keep other Gages, and Indicators
Notice: If electrical devices are components from working as
Warning lights come on when there
left plugged into a power outlet, they should. The repairs would
could be a problem with a vehicle
the battery may drain causing the not be covered by the vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
vehicle not to start or damage to warranty. Do not use equipment
on briefly when the engine is started
the battery. This would not be exceeding maximum amperage
to indicate they are working.
covered by the vehicle warranty. rating of 20 amperes. Check with
your dealer/retailer before adding Gages can indicate when there
Always unplug all electrical
electrical equipment. could be a problem with a vehicle
devices when turning off the
function. Often gages and warning
vehicle. When adding electrical equipment,
lights work together to indicate a
Certain electrical accessories may be sure to follow the installation
problem with the vehicle.
not be compatible with the instructions included with the
equipment. When one of the warning lights
accessory power outlets and could
comes on and stays on while
result in blown vehicle or adapter Notice: Improper use of the
driving, or when one of the gages
fuses. If you experience a problem, power outlet can cause damage
shows there may be a problem,
see your dealer/retailer for not covered by the vehicle
check the section that explains what
additional information on the warranty. Do not hang any type of
to do. Follow this manual's advice.
accessory power outlet. accessory or accessory bracket
Waiting to do repairs can be costly
from the plug because the power
and even dangerous.
outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
Instrument Cluster
US Version Shown, Canada Similar

Speedometer one is set to the mileage of the old Fuel Gage

odometer. If this is not possible, it is
The vehicle's speed can be selected set at zero and a label is put on the
to display on the Driver Information driver's door to show the old
Center (DIC) and the speedometer mileage reading.
in either kilometers per hour (km/h)
or miles per hour (mph). Telltales on Tachometer
the speedometer indicate whether
kilometers or miles were chosen. The tachometer displays the engine United States Canada
The DIC will show the vehicles speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm). When the ignition is on, the fuel
speed after the limit on the
gage shows about how much fuel
speedometer has been reached. Notice: If the engine is operated the vehicle has left in the fuel tank.
with the tachometer in the shaded
Odometer warning area, the vehicle could An arrow on the fuel gage indicates
be damaged, and the damages the side of the vehicle the fuel door
The odometer shows how far the is on.
vehicle has been driven, in either would not be covered by the
kilometers or miles. vehicle warranty. Do not operate The gage will first indicate empty
the engine with the tachometer in before the vehicle is out of fuel and
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant the shaded warning area. the low fuel light comes on, but the
odometer. If the vehicle needs a vehicle's fuel tank should be
new odometer installed, the new filled soon.
Here are some situations that can Engine Coolant Safety Belt Reminders
occur with the fuel gage. None of
these indicate a problem with the
Temperature Gage Driver Safety Belt Reminder
fuel gage. Light
. At the service station, the fuel There is a driver safety belt
pump shuts off before the gage reminder light on the instrument
reads full. panel cluster.
. It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the gage indicated. United States Canada
For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, This gage measures the
but it actually took a little more temperature of the vehicle's
or less than half the tank's engine.
capacity to fill the tank. If the indicator needle moves to the
hot side of the gage towards the When the engine is started this light
. The gage moves a little while and a chime come on and stay on
turning a corner or speeding up. colored line, the engine is too hot.
A temperature indicator light will for several seconds to remind
. The gage takes a few seconds turn on. drivers to fasten their safety belts.
to stabilize after the ignition is The light also begins to flash.
turned on, and goes back to If the vehicle has been operated
under normal driving conditions, and This cycle repeats if the driver
empty when the ignition is remains unbuckled and the vehicle
turned off. the temperature indicator light
comes on, pull off the road, stop the is moving.
vehicle and turn off the engine as If the driver safety belt is already
soon as possible. buckled, neither the light nor chime
come on.
Passenger Safety Belt If the passenger safety belt is

Reminder Light buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
The passenger safety belt reminder
light is by the passenger airbag The front passenger safety belt
status indicator. warning light and chime may turn on
if an object is put on the seat such
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery The airbag readiness light comes on
bag, laptop or other electronic and stays on for several seconds
device. To turn off the warning light when the vehicle is started. Then
and or chime, remove the object the light turns off.
from the seat or buckle the
safety belt. { WARNING
When the engine is started this light If the airbag readiness light stays
and the chime come on and stay on Airbag Readiness Light
on after the vehicle is started or
for several seconds to remind the This light shows if there is an comes on while driving, it means
passenger to fasten their safety belt. electrical problem. The system
The light also begins to flash. the airbag system might not be
check includes the airbag sensor, working properly. The airbags in
This cycle repeats if the passenger the pretensioners, the airbag the vehicle might not inflate in a
remains unbuckled and the vehicle modules, the wiring and the crash crash, or they could even inflate
is moving. sensing and diagnostic module. For without a crash. To help avoid
more information on the airbag
injury, have the vehicle serviced
system, see Airbag System on
right away.
page 2‑25.
Passenger Airbag Status as a system check. If you are using If, after several seconds, both status
remote start to start the vehicle from indicator lights remain on, or if there
Indicator a distance, if equipped, you may not are no lights at all, there may be a
The vehicle has a passenger see the system check. Then, after problem with the lights or the
sensing system. See Passenger several more seconds, the status passenger sensing system. See
Sensing System on page 2‑33 for indicator will light either ON or OFF, your dealer/retailer for service.
important safety information. The or either the on or off symbol to let
overhead console has a passenger
airbag status indicator.
you know the status of the right front
passenger frontal airbag.
{ WARNING
If the word ON or the on symbol is If the airbag readiness light ever
lit on the passenger airbag status comes on and stays on, it means
indicator, it means that the right that something may be wrong
front passenger frontal airbag is with the airbag system. To help
enabled (may inflate). avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
If the word OFF or the off symbol is
United States away. See Airbag Readiness
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the Light on page 4‑16 for more
passenger sensing system has information, including important
turned off the right front passenger safety information.
frontal airbag.
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds
Charging System Light system. Have it checked by your Malfunction

dealer/retailer. Driving while this
light is on could drain the battery.
Indicator Lamp
When this light comes on, the Driver A computer system called OBD II
Information Center (DIC) also (On-Board Diagnostics-Second
displays a message. Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission
See Battery Voltage and Charging control systems. It ensures that
Messages on page 4‑32. emissions are at acceptable levels
The charging system light comes on
briefly when the ignition is turned This light and a Transport Mode On for the life of the vehicle, helping to
on, but the engine is not running, as message display when the vehicle produce a cleaner environment.
a check to show the light is working. is in Transport Mode. For more
The light turns off when the engine information, see Key and Lock
is started. If it does not, have Messages on page 4‑35.
the vehicle serviced by your If a short distance must be driven
dealer/retailer. with the light on, be sure to turn off
If the light stays on, or comes on all accessories, such as the radio
while driving, there may be a and air conditioner. This light comes on when the
problem with the electrical charging ignition is on, but the engine is not
running, as a check to show it is
working. If it does not, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer.
If the check engine light comes on Notice: Modifications made to the The following can prevent more
and stays on, while the engine is engine, transmission, exhaust, serious damage to the vehicle:
running, this indicates that there is intake, or fuel system of the . Reduce vehicle speed.
an OBD II problem and service is vehicle or the replacement of the
required. original tires with other than . Avoid hard accelerations.
Malfunctions often are indicated by those of the same Tire . Avoid steep uphill grades.
the system before any problem is Performance Criteria (TPC) can
affect the vehicle's emission
. If towing a trailer, reduce the
apparent. Being aware of the light amount of cargo being hauled as
can prevent more serious damage controls and can cause this light
to come on. Modifications to soon as it is possible.
to the vehicle. This system assists
the service technician in correctly these systems could lead to If the light continues to flash, when
diagnosing any malfunction. costly repairs not covered by the it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.
vehicle warranty. This could also Find a safe place to park the
Notice: If the vehicle is result in a failure to pass a vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at
continually driven with this light required Emission Inspection/ least 10 seconds, and restart the
on, after a while, the emission Maintenance test. See engine. If the light is still flashing,
controls might not work as well, Accessories and Modifications follow the previous steps and see
the vehicle's fuel economy might on page 9‑3. your dealer/retailer for service as
not be as good, and the engine soon as possible.
might not run as smoothly. This This light comes on during a
could lead to costly repairs that malfunction in one of two ways: Light On Steady: An emission
might not be covered by the Light Flashing: A misfire condition control system malfunction has
vehicle warranty. has been detected. A misfire been detected on the vehicle.
increases vehicle emissions and Diagnosis and service might be
could damage the emission control required.
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
An emission system malfunction

. Make sure to fuel the vehicle Emissions Inspection and
might be corrected. with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality Maintenance Programs
causes the engine not to run as
. Make sure the fuel cap is fully efficiently as designed and may Some state/provincial and local
installed. See Filling the Tank on cause: stalling after start-up, governments have or might begin
page 8‑56. The diagnostic stalling when the vehicle is programs to inspect the emission
system can determine if the changed into gear, misfiring, control equipment on the vehicle.
fuel cap has been left off or hesitation on acceleration, Failure to pass this inspection could
improperly installed. A loose or or stumbling on acceleration. prevent getting a vehicle
missing fuel cap allows fuel to These conditions might go away registration.
evaporate into the atmosphere. once the engine is warmed up.
A few driving trips with the cap Here are some things to know to
properly installed should turn the If one or more of these help the vehicle pass an inspection:
light off. conditions occurs, change the . The vehicle will not pass this
fuel brand used. It will require at inspection if the check engine
. If the vehicle has been driven least one full tank of the proper
through a deep puddle of water, light is on with the engine
fuel to turn the light off. running, or if the key is in
the vehicle's electrical system
might be wet. The condition is See Recommended Fuel on ON/RUN and the light is not on.
usually corrected when the page 8‑54.
electrical system dries out. A few If none of the above have made the
driving trips should turn the light turn off, your dealer/retailer
light off. can check the vehicle. The
dealer/retailer has the proper test
equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that might have
developed.
. The vehicle will not pass this
Brake System Warning
inspection if the OBD II
Light
{ WARNING
(on-board diagnostic) system
determines that critical emission The brake system might not be
control systems have not been working properly if the brake
completely diagnosed by the system warning light is on.
system. The vehicle would be Driving with the brake system
considered not ready for warning light on can lead to a
inspection. This can happen if crash. If the light is still on after
the battery has recently been United States Canada the vehicle has been pulled off
replaced or if the battery has run the road and carefully stopped,
down. The diagnostic system is The brake indicator light should
have the vehicle towed for
designed to evaluate critical come on briefly as the engine is
service.
emission control systems during started. If it does not come on have
normal driving. This can take the vehicle serviced by your dealer/
If the light comes on while driving, a
several days of routine driving. retailer.
chime sounds. Pull off the road and
If this has been done and the When the ignition is on, the brake stop. The pedal might be harder to
vehicle still does not pass the system warning light comes on push or go closer to the floor.
inspection for lack of OBD II when the parking brake is set. The It might also take longer to stop.
system readiness, your dealer/ light stays on if the parking brake If the light is still on, have the
retailer can prepare the vehicle does not fully release. If it stays on vehicle towed for service. See
for inspection. after the parking brake is fully Driving Characteristics and Towing
released, there is a brake problem. Tips on page 8‑58.
Have the brake system inspected
immediately.
Antilock Brake System If the ABS light stays on, turn the Traction Off Light
ignition off. If the light comes on
(ABS) Warning Light while driving, stop as soon as it is
safely possible and turn the ignition
off. A chime may also sound when
the light comes on steady. Then
start the engine again to reset the
system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the This light comes on if the Traction
vehicle needs service. If the regular Control System (TCS) either has a
For vehicles with the Antilock Brake brake system warning light is not
System (ABS), this light comes on problem or is turned off. DIC
on, the vehicle still has brakes, but messages appear in the DIC display
briefly when the engine is started. not antilock brakes. If the regular to help explain. See Ride Control
If the light does not come on, have it brake system warning light is also System Messages on page 4‑36
fixed so it will be ready to warn if on, the vehicle does not have for more information.
there is a problem. antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes. See Traction Control System (TCS)
See Brake System Warning Light on page 8‑41 and StabiliTrak
on page 4‑21. System on page 8‑43 for more
information.
For vehicles with a Driver
Information Center (DIC), see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 4‑27 for all brake related DIC
messages.
StabiliTrak® OFF Light Traction Control System If the TCS warning light comes on
and stays on while driving, the
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light vehicle needs service.
Check the Driver Information Center
(DIC) for applicable messages. See
Ride Control System Messages on
See Traction Control System (TCS)
This light comes on when the
on page 8‑41 and StabiliTrak
StabiliTrak system is turned off. ®
The StabiliTrak system or the System on page 8‑43 for more
If the Traction Control System (TCS) Traction Control System (TCS) information.
is off, wheel spin is not limited. If the indicator/warning light comes on
StabiliTrak system is off, the system briefly while starting the engine.
does not assist in controlling the
vehicle. Turn on the TCS and the If it does not, have the vehicle
StabiliTrak system and the warning serviced by your dealer/retailer.
light turns off. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
Check the DIC for applicable
messages. See Ride Control The indicator/warning light flashes
System Messages on page 4‑36 while the StabiliTrak or TCS system
for more information. is working to control the vehicle on
a low traction surface.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 8‑41 and StabiliTrak
System on page 8‑43 for more
information.
Tire Pressure Light A tire pressure message in the Engine Oil Pressure Light
Driver Information Center (DIC), can
accompany the light. See Tire
Messages on page 4‑37 for more { WARNING
information. Stop as soon as Do not keep driving if the oil
possible, and inflate the tires to the
pressure is low. The engine can
pressure value shown on the tire
become so hot that it catches fire.
loading information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑50 for more Someone could be burned. Check
For vehicles with a tire pressure the oil as soon as possible and
monitoring system, this light comes information.
have the vehicle serviced.
on briefly when the engine is When the Light Flashes First and
started. It provides information Then is On Steady Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
about tire pressures and the Tire maintenance can damage the
Pressure Monitoring System. This indicates that there may be a
problem with the Tire Pressure engine. The repairs would not be
When the Light is On Steady Monitor System. The light flashes covered by the vehicle warranty.
for about a minute and stays on Always follow the maintenance
This indicates that one or more of schedule in this manual for
the tires are significantly steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence changing engine oil.
underinflated.
repeats with every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 9‑53 for more
information.
Fuel Economy Light Low Fuel Warning Light
The oil pressure light should come

on briefly as the engine is started.
If it does not come on have United States Shown, Canada
For vehicles with the fuel economy Similar
the vehicle serviced by your mode light, it comes on when the
dealer/retailer. eco (economy) switch, located on This light comes on for a
If the light comes on and stays on, it the center console near the shifter, few seconds when the ignition is
means that oil is not flowing through is pressed. For vehicles with a turned on as a check to indicate it is
the engine properly. The vehicle Driver Information Center (DIC) an working. If it does not come on,
could be low on oil and might have ECO Mode On message displays. have it fixed.
some other system problem. See See Fuel System Messages on The low fuel warning light is a circle
your dealer/retailer. page 4‑35 for more information. located on the fuel gage. This light
Press the switch again to turn off comes on and a chime sounds
the light and exit the fuel periodically when the vehicle is low
saver mode. on fuel. The light goes off when fuel
is added to the fuel tank.
For vehicles with a Driver
Information Center (DIC), see Fuel
System Messages on page 4‑35
for more information.
Security Light High-Beam on Light Fog Lamp Light
This light comes on if there is a The high-beam on light comes on The fog lamp light comes on when
problem with the security system, when the high-beam headlamps are the fog lamps are in use.
or if the vehicle has been in use. The light goes out when the fog
tampered with. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam lamps are turned off. See Fog
For more information, see Vehicle Changer on page 5‑2 for more Lamps on page 5‑3 for more
Security on page 1‑12. information. information.
Lamps on Reminder Cruise Control Light Information Displays

Driver Information
Center (DIC)
The vehicle may have a Driver
Information Center (DIC). It displays
information about the vehicle and
For vehicles with the lamps on The cruise control light is white warning messages if there is a
reminder light, it comes on when the whenever the cruise control is set system problem detected. DIC
lights are in use. and turns green when the cruise messages display in the center of
control is active. the instrument panel cluster. See
The light turns off when the cruise Vehicle Messages on page 4‑31 for
control is switched off. See Cruise more information.
Control on page 8‑44 for more The vehicle may also have features
information. that can be customized through the
controls on the radio. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑39 for
more information.
DIC Operation and Displays DIC Buttons Trip/Fuel Menu Items

Use the DIC buttons located in Press the MENU button until
the center of the instrument panel Trip/Fuel Information Menu is
to access different displays. The displayed. Then press x to scroll
DIC displays trip, fuel, vehicle through the following menu items:
system information, and warning
. Trip 1
messages. It also shows the shift
lever position, the odometer, . Trip 2
and the direction the vehicle is
driving.
. Fuel Range
. Average Fuel Economy
. Instantaneous Fuel Economy
. Average Vehicle Speed
MENU: Press this button to get to
the Trip/Fuel Menu and the Vehicle
. Timer
Information Menu. . Digital Speedometer
wx: Use these buttons to scroll . Navigation Turn-by-Turn
through the items in each menu.
A small marker will move along the
. Blank
page as you scroll through the
items. This shows where each page
is in the menu.
V (Set/Clear): Use this button to
set or clear the menu item when it is
displayed.
Trip 1 and Trip 2 Average Fuel Economy Average Vehicle Speed

This display shows the current This display shows the approximate This display shows the average
distance traveled, in either average liters per 100 kilometers speed of the vehicle in kilometers
kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since (L/100 km) or miles per per hour (km/h) or miles per
the last reset for the trip odometer. gallon (mpg). This number is hour (mph). This average is
The trip odometer can be reset to calculated based on the number of calculated based on the various
zero by pressing the trip reset stem L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the vehicle speeds recorded since the
or V while the trip odometer display last time this menu item was reset. last reset of this value. The average
is showing. The fuel economy can be reset by speed can be reset by pressing V
pressing V while the Average Fuel while the Average Vehicle Speed
Fuel Range Economy display is showing. display is showing.
This display shows the approximate
distance the vehicle can be driven Instantaneous Fuel Economy Timer
without refueling. The fuel range This display shows the current fuel This display can be used as a timer.
estimate is based on an average of economy in either liters per To start the timer, press V while
the vehicle's fuel economy over 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles Timer is displayed. The display will
recent driving history and the per gallon (mpg). This number show the amount of time that has
amount of fuel remaining in the fuel reflects only the fuel economy that passed since the timer was last
tank. Fuel range cannot be reset. the vehicle has right now and reset, not including time the ignition
changes frequently as driving is off. Time will continue to be
conditions change. Unlike average counted as long as the ignition is
economy, this display cannot be on, even if another display is being
reset. shown on the DIC. The timer will
record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes
and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after
which the display will return to zero.
To stop the timer, press V briefly Vehicle Information Menu Tire Pressure
while Timer is displayed. To reset Items The display will show a vehicle with
the timer to zero, press and hold V . Press the MENU button until Vehicle the approximate pressures of all
Information Menu is displayed. Then four tires. Tire pressure is displayed
Digital Speedometer in either pounds per square
press x to scroll through the
The speedometer shows how fast inch (psi) or in kilopascal (kPa).
following menu items:
the vehicle is moving in either Any time the tire pressures are
kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles
. Unit
adjusted the system needs to
per hour (mph). The speedometer . Tire Pressure relearn the new pressures. To
cannot be reset. . Remaining Oil Life relearn the tire pressures press V
Turn-by-Turn while the Tire Pressure display is
. Blank
This display is used for the OnStar active. The display will ask for
or Navigation System Turn-by-Turn Unit confirmation of a relearn. Press w
guidance. See OnStar® System on Press V to enter the unit menu. or x to select Yes or No. Then
page 4‑44 or the Navigation press V to confirm the selection.
manual, if the vehicle has Then press w or x to switch
between US or Metric when the Unit See Tire Pressure Monitor System
navigation, for more information.
display is active. Press V to confirm on page 9‑51 and Tire Pressure
Blank Display Monitor Operation on page 9‑53 for
the setting. This will change the
more information.
This display shows no information. displays on the cluster and DIC to
either metric or English (US)
measurements.
Remaining Oil Life Remember, the Oil Life display must Vehicle Messages
This display shows an estimate of be reset after each oil change. It will
not reset itself. Also, be careful not Messages are displayed on the DIC
the oil's remaining useful life.
to reset the Oil Life display to notify the driver that the status of
If “Remaining Oil Life 99%” is
accidentally at any time other than the vehicle has changed and that
displayed, that means 99% of the
when the oil has just been changed. some action may be needed by the
current oil life remains.
It cannot be reset accurately until driver to correct the condition.
When the remaining oil life is low, the next oil change. To reset the Multiple messages may appear one
the “Change Engine Oil Soon” engine oil life system, press V while after another.
message will appear on the display. the Oil Life display is active. The Some messages may not require
See Engine Oil Messages on display will ask for confirmation of a immediate action, but you can
page 4‑34. The oil should be
changed as soon as possible. See reset. Press w or x to select Yes press V to acknowledge that you
Engine Oil on page 9‑10. In or No. Then press V to confirm the received the messages and to clear
addition to the engine oil life system selection. See Engine Oil Life them from the display. Some
monitoring the oil life, additional System on page 9‑12. messages cannot be cleared from
maintenance is recommended in the the DIC display because they are
Maintenance Schedule in this Blank Display more urgent. These messages
manual. See Scheduled This display shows no information. require action before they can be
Maintenance on page 10‑2 for cleared. You should take any
more information. Compass messages that appear on the
The vehicle may have a compass in display seriously and remember that
the Driver Information Center (DIC). clearing the messages will only
See Compass on page 4‑9. make the messages disappear, not
correct the problem. You will find the
possible messages that can be
displayed and some information
about them grouped by subject in
the following information.
Battery Voltage and Service Battery Charging Compass Messages

Charging Messages System
CAL
This message is displayed when
Battery Saver Active there is a fault in the battery This message is displayed when the
This message displays when the charging system. Take the vehicle to compass needs to be calibrated.
vehicle has detected that the battery your dealer/retailer for service. See Compass on page 4‑9.
voltage is dropping beyond a –––
reasonable point. The battery saver Brake System Messages
system starts reducing certain Three dashes will be displayed if the
features of the vehicle that you may Brake Fluid Low compass needs service. See your
be able to notice. At the point that This message is displayed when the dealer/retailer for service.
features are disabled, this message brake fluid level is low, see Brake
is displayed. It means that the Fluid on page 9‑24. Cruise Control Messages
vehicle is trying to save the charge
in the battery. Turn off unnecessary Release Parking Brake Apply Brakes Before Cruise
accessories to allow the battery to This message is displayed as a If this message displays when
recharge. reminder that the parking brake is attempting to activate cruise control,
on. Release it before you attempt to apply the brake and then try again.
Low Battery
drive. Cruise Set to XXX
This message is displayed when the
battery voltage is low. See Battery This message will display when the
on page 9‑25 for more information. cruise control is set and it will show
the speed it was set to. See Cruise
Control on page 8‑44 for more
information.
Door Ajar Messages Rear Access Open Coolant Level Low Add
This message will display along with Coolant
Door Open
a symbol when the liftgate is open. This message will display if the
A door open symbol will be Close the liftgate completely. coolant is low, see Engine Coolant
displayed on the DIC showing which on page 9‑16.
door is open. If the vehicle has been Engine Cooling System
shifted out of P (Park), a “Door Engine Overheated — Idle
Open” message will also be Messages Engine
displayed. Close the door A/C Off Due to High This message displays when the
completely. Engine Temp engine coolant temperature is too
Hood Open This message displays when the hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
engine coolant becomes hotter than idle until it cools down.
This message will display along with
a hood open symbol when the hood the normal operating temperature. Engine Overheated — Stop
is open. Close the hood completely. To avoid added strain on a hot Engine
engine, the air conditioning
Manually Close the Power compressor automatically turns off. This message displays and a
Liftgate When the coolant temperature continuous chime sounds if the
returns to normal, the air engine cooling system reaches
This message will display if the unsafe temperatures for operation.
power liftgate encounters multiple conditioning compressor turns back
on. You can continue to drive the Stop and turn off the vehicle as
obstacles on the same power cycle. soon as it is safe to do so to avoid
After removing the obstructions, the vehicle.
severe damage. This message
liftgate will resume normal power If this message continues to appear, clears when the engine has cooled
operation. have the system repaired by your to a safe operating temperature.
dealer/retailer as soon as possible
to avoid damage to the engine.
High Coolant Temperature Engine Oil Hot, Idle Engine Engine Power Messages
This message displays if the coolant This message displays when the Engine Power Is Reduced
temperature is hot, see Engine engine oil temperature is too hot.
Overheating on page 9‑19. Stop and allow the vehicle to idle This message displays when the
until it cools down. vehicle's engine power is reduced.
Engine Oil Messages Reduced engine power can affect
Engine Oil Low – Add Oil the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
Change Engine Oil Soon This message displays when the If this message is on, but there is no
This message displays when the engine oil level is too low. Check the reduction in performance, proceed
engine oil needs to be changed. oil level. See Engine Oil on to your destination. The
When you change the engine oil, be page 9‑10. performance may be reduced the
sure to reset the Oil Life System. next time the vehicle is driven. The
Oil Pressure Low – Stop vehicle may be driven at a reduced
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 9‑12 and Driver Information
Engine speed while this message is on, but
Center (DIC) on page 4‑27 for This message displays if low oil maximum acceleration and speed
information on how to reset the pressure levels occur. Stop the may be reduced. Anytime this
system. See Engine Oil on vehicle as soon as safely possible message stays on, the vehicle
page 9‑10 and Scheduled and do not operate it until the cause should be taken to your
Maintenance on page 10‑2 for of the low oil pressure has been dealer/retailer for service as soon
more information. corrected. Check the oil as soon as as possible.
possible and have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
Fuel System Messages Key and Lock Messages Object Detection System
ECO Mode On Replace Battery In Remote Key Messages
On some models, this message This message displays when the Park Assist Off
displays when the fuel economy battery in the Remote Keyless Entry This message is displayed when the
mode has been turned on by (RKE) transmitter needs to be park assist system has been turned
pressing the eco button near the replaced. off. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist
shift lever. See Fuel Economy Mode on page 8‑46.
on page 8‑37 for more information. Transport Mode On
This message displays when the Service Park Assist
Fuel Level Low ignition is held in START for This message is displayed if there is
This message displays when the 15 seconds. The battery light may a problem with the park assist
vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as also be flashing when this message system. Take the vehicle to your
soon as possible. is displayed. To turn this message dealer/retailer for service.
off, start the vehicle and hold the
Tighten Gas Cap key in the START position for
This message displays when the 15 seconds.
fuel cap is not on tight. Tighten the
fuel cap.
Ride Control System Service All Wheel Drive Service Stabilitrak

Messages If your vehicle has the All-Wheel This message displays if there is a
Drive (AWD) system, this message problem with the StabiliTrak®
All Wheel Drive Off displays if a problem occurs with system. If this message appears, try
If your vehicle has the All-Wheel this system. If this message to reset the system. Stop; turn off
Drive (AWD) system, this message appears, stop as soon as possible the engine for at least 15 seconds;
displays when the rear drive system and turn off the vehicle. Restart the then start the engine again. If this
is overheating. This message turns vehicle and check for the message message still comes on, it means
off when the rear drive system cools on the DIC display. If the message there is a problem. See your
down. If the warning message stays is still displayed or appears again dealer/retailer for service. The
on for a while, you need to reset the when you begin driving, the AWD vehicle is safe to drive, however,
warning message. To reset the system needs service. See your you do not have the benefit of
warning message, turn the ignition dealer/retailer. StabiliTrak, so reduce your speed
off and then back on again. If the and drive accordingly.
Service Traction Control
message stays on, see your dealer/ Stabilitrak Off
retailer right away. See All-Wheel This message displays when there
Drive on page 8‑38 for more is a problem with the Traction This message displays when the
information. Control System (TCS). When this StabiliTrak system is turned off. See
message is displayed, the system StabiliTrak System on page 8‑43
will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your for more information.
driving accordingly. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
Traction Control Off Anti-Theft Alarm System Tire Messages

This message displays when the Messages Service Tire Monitor System
Traction Control System (TCS) is
turned off. Adjust your driving Theft Attempted This message displays if there is a
accordingly. This message displays if the vehicle problem with the Tire Pressure
detects a tamper condition. Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire
Traction Control On Pressure Monitor Operation on
This message displays when the page 9‑53 for more information.
Service Vehicle Messages
Traction Control System (TCS) is Tire Learning Active
first turned on. See Traction Control Service AC System
System (TCS) on page 8‑41 for This message displays when the
This message is displayed if there is
more information. system is learning new tires. See
a problem with the air conditioning
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
system. Take the vehicle to your
Airbag System Messages page 9‑53 for more information.
dealer/retailer for service.
Service Airbag Tire Low Add Air To Tire
Service Power Steering
This message is displayed if there is On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the airbag system. Monitor System (TPMS), this
a problem with the power steering
Take the vehicle to your message displays when the
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service. pressure in one or more of the
dealer/retailer for service.
vehicle's tires is low.
Safety Belt Messages Service Vehicle Soon This message also displays “Left
This message is displayed if there is Front”, “Right Front”, “Left Rear”,
Buckle Seatbelt a problem with the vehicle. Take the or “Right Rear” to indicate the
This message displays as a vehicle to your dealer/retailer for location of the low tire.
reminder when the safety belt is not service.
buckled.
The low tire pressure warning light Transmission Messages Vehicle Reminder
will also come on. See Tire
Pressure Light on page 4‑24. Service Transmission Messages
If a tire pressure message appears This message displays if there is a Ice Possible Drive With Care
on the DIC, stop as soon as you problem with the transmission. See This message is displayed when ice
can. Inflate the tires by adding air your dealer/retailer. conditions are possible.
until the tire pressure is equal to the
values shown on the Tire Loading Shift To Park Turn Wiper Control to
Information label. See Tires on This message displays when the Intermittent First
page 9‑43, Vehicle Load Limits on transmission needs to be shifted to This message is displayed when
page 8‑24, and Tire Pressure on P (Park). This may appear when attempting to adjust the intermittent
page 9‑50. attempting to remove the key from wiper speed without intermittent
You can receive more than one tire the ignition if the vehicle is not in selected on the wiper control. See
pressure message at a time. To P (Park). Windshield Wiper/Washer on
read the other messages that may Transmission Hot – Idle page 4‑7.
have been sent at the same time, Engine
press the set/reset button. The DIC
also shows the tire pressure values. This message displays and a chime
See Driver Information Center (DIC) sounds if the transmission fluid in
on page 4‑27. the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
transmission fluid temperature high
can cause damage to the vehicle.
Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
allow the transmission to cool. This
message clears when the fluid
temperature reaches a safe level.
Vehicle 2. Turn the MENU / SELECT knob

to highlight Vehicle Settings.
Climate and Air Quality
Personalization Select the Climate and Air Quality
3. Press the center of the menu and the following will be
The audio system controls are used MENU / SELECT knob to select displayed:
to access the personalization the Vehicle Settings menu. . Auto Fan Speed
menus for customizing vehicle The following list of menu items will
features. . Air Conditioning Mode
be available:
. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats
CONFIG (Configuration): Press to . Climate and Air Quality
access the Configuration
. Comfort and Convenience Auto Fan Speed
Settings Menu.
. Collision/Detection Systems This selection is available on
MENU / SELECT Knob: Press the
vehicles with the Automatic Climate
center of this knob to enter the . Languages Control System. Choose from the
menus and select menu items. Turn . Lighting following blower speed settings:
the knob to scroll through the
menus. . Power Door Locks High: Increased speed.
0 BACK: Press to exit or move . Remote Lock/Unlock/Start Low: Reduced speed.
backwards in a menu. Normal: Moderate speed.
. Return to Factory Settings
Entering the Personalization Turn the MENU / SELECT knob to Press the MENU / SELECT knob
Menus highlight the menu. Press the knob when “Auto Fan Speed” is
1. Turn the infotainment system on to select it. Each of the menus is highlighted. Turn the knob to
and press the CONFIG button to detailed in the following information. highlight “High”, “Normal”, or “Low”.
access the Configuration All of the menus may not be Press the knob to confirm the
Settings menu. available. Only those tied to the selection and go back to the
features on your vehicle will be last menu.
shown.
Air Conditioning Mode Remote Start Auto Heat Seats Easy Exit Driver Seat
This will allow you to select whether When on, this feature will turn the This allows you to turn the easy exit
or not the air conditioning comes on heated seats on when using remote seat feature on or off.
automatically the next time the start on cold days. Press the MENU / SELECT knob
vehicle is started. “On” means that Press the MENU / SELECT knob when “Easy Exit Driver Seat” is
the air conditioning will be on at when “Remote Start Auto highlighted. Turn the knob to select
start up, regardless of whether it Heat Seats” is highlighted to “On” or “Off”. Press the knob to
was on or off the last time the toggle between “On” or “Off”. confirm and go back to the
vehicle was turned off. “Off” means last menu.
the air conditioning will be off at the Press 0 BACK to confirm the
next start up, regardless of whether selection and go back to the Chime Volume
it was on or off the last time the last menu.
This allows the selection of the
vehicle was turned off. “Last Comfort and Convenience chime volume level.
Setting” means that the when the
vehicle is started the air conditioning Select the Comfort and Press the MENU / SELECT knob
will resume whichever setting it was Convenience menu and the when “Chime Volume” is
at the last time the vehicle was following will be displayed: highlighted. Turn the knob to select
turned off. . Easy Exit Driver Seat “Normal” or “High”. Press the knob
to confirm and go back to the
Press the MENU / SELECT knob . Chime Volume last menu.
when “Air Conditioning Mode” is
highlighted. Turn the knob to
. Reverse Tilt Mirror
highlight “On”, “Off”, or “Last
Setting”. Press the knob to confirm
your selection and go back to the
last menu.
Reverse Tilt Mirror Languages Vehicle Locator Lights

This allows you to turn the park tilt Select the Language menu and the This allows the vehicle locator lights
mirrors feature on or off. following will be displayed: to be turned on or off.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob . English Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when “Reverse Tilt Mirror” is when “Vehicle Locator Lights” is
. French
highlighted. Turn the knob to select highlighted to toggle between “On”
“On” or “Off”. Press the knob to . Spanish or “Off”. Press 0 BACK to confirm
confirm and go back to the Turn the MENU / SELECT knob to the selection and go back to the
last menu. select the language. Press the knob last menu.
Collision/Detection Systems to confirm and go back to the
Exit Lighting
last menu.
Select the Collision/Detection This allows the selection of how
Systems menu and the following will Lighting long the exterior lamps stay on
be displayed: Select the Lighting menu and the when leaving the vehicle when it is
. Park Assist following will be displayed: dark outside.
Park Assist . Vehicle Locator Lights Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when “Exit Lighting” is highlighted.
This allows the Ultrasonic Parking . Exit Lighting Turn the knob to select “Off”,
Assist feature to be turned on or off. “30 Seconds”, “1 Minute”,
Press the MENU / SELECT knob or “2 Minutes”. Press the knob to
when “Park Assist” is highlighted. confirm and go back to the
Turn the knob to select “On”, “Off”, last menu.
or “Tow Bar”. Press the knob to
confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Power Door Locks Auto Door Unlock Remote Lock/Unlock/Start

Select Power Door Locks and the This allows selection of which of the Select Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
following will be displayed: doors will automatically unlock when and the following will be displayed:
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out . Remote Unlock Light Feedback
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
. Auto Door Unlock . Remote Lock Feedback
when “Auto Door Unlock” is
. Delayed Door Lock highlighted. Turn the knob to select . Remote Door Unlock
“All Doors”, “Driver Door”, or “Off”. . Memory Remote Recall
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
Press the knob to confirm and go
When on, this feature will keep the back to the last menu. . Remote Vehicle Start
driver's door from locking when the Remote Unlock Light Feedback
door is open. If off is selected, the Delayed Door Lock
Delayed Door Lock menu will be When on, this feature will delay the When on, the exterior lamps will
available. locking of the doors. If you want to flash when unlocking the vehicle
override the delay you can press the with the RKE transmitter.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when “Unlocked Door Anti power door lock on the instrument Press the MENU / SELECT knob
Lock Out” is highlighted to panel. when “Remote Unlock Light
toggle between “On” or “Off”. Press the MENU / SELECT knob Feedback” is highlighted. Turn the
Press 0 BACK to confirm the when “Delayed Door Lock” is knob to select “Flash Lights” or
selection and go back to the highlighted. Turn the knob to select “Off”. Press the knob to confirm and
last menu. “On” or “Off”. Press the knob to go back to the last menu.
confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Remote Lock Feedback Memory Remote Recall Return to Factory Settings

This allows selection of what type of This allows the “Memory Remote Select “Return to Factory Settings”
feedback is given when unlocking Recall” feature to be turned on or to return all of the vehicle
the vehicle with the RKE transmitter. off. “Memory Remote Recall” is personalization to the default
Press the MENU / SELECT knob when the memorized settings will be settings. Turn the knob to select
when “Remote Lock Feedback” is recalled as you unlock the vehicle. “Yes” or “No”. Press the knob to
highlighted. Turn the knob to select Press the MENU / SELECT knob confirm and go back to the
“Lights and Horn”, “Lights Only”, when “Memory Remote Recall” is last menu.
“Horn Only”, or “Off”. Press the knob highlighted to toggle between “On”
to confirm and go back to the or “Off”. Press 0 BACK to confirm
last menu. the selection and go back to the
Remote Door Unlock last menu.
This allows selection of which doors Remote Vehicle Start
will unlock when pressing the unlock This allows the “Remote Vehicle
button on the RKE transmitter. Start” to be turned on or off, if the
Press the MENU / SELECT knob vehicle has this feature.
when “Remote Door Unlock” is Press the MENU / SELECT knob
highlighted. Turn the knob to select when “Remote Vehicle Start” is
“All Doors” or “Driver Door”. Press highlighted to toggle between “On”
the knob to confirm and go back to
or “Off”. Press 0 BACK to confirm
the last menu.
the selection and go back to the
last menu.
OnStar® System How OnStar Service Works TTY 1‐877‐248‐2080, or press Q to

Q: This blue button connects you speak with an OnStar advisor
to a specially trained OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
to verify your account information For a full description of OnStar
and to answer questions. services and system limitations, see
] : Push this red emergency the OnStar Owner's Guide in the
button to get priority help from glove box.
specially trained OnStar emergency OnStar service is subject to the
OnStar® uses several innovative advisors. OnStar terms and conditions
technologies and live advisors to included in the OnStar Subscriber
provide a wide range of safety,
X : Push this button for hands‐free,
voice‐activated calling and to give Information.
security, navigation, diagnostics,
voice commands for turn‐by‐turn OnStar service cannot work unless
and calling services.
navigation. the vehicle is in a place where
Automatic Crash Response Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle OnStar has an agreement with a
In a crash, built in sensors can Assistance, Vehicle Diagnostics, wireless service provider for service
automatically alert an OnStar Remote Door Unlock, Roadside in that area. OnStar service also
advisor who is immediately Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation cannot work unless the vehicle is in
connected to the vehicle to see if and Hands‐Free Calling are a place where the wireless service
you need help. available on most vehicles. Not all provider OnStar has hired for that
OnStar services are available on all area has coverage, network
vehicles. For more information see capacity and reception when the
the OnStar Owner's Guide or visit service is needed, and technology
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or that is compatible with the OnStar
www.onstar.ca (Canada), contact service. Not all services are
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR available everywhere, particularly in
(1‐888‐466‐7827) or remote or enclosed areas, or at all
times.
The OnStar system can record and The vehicle must have a working Your Responsibility
transmit vehicle information. This electrical system, including
Increase the volume of the radio if
information is automatically sent to adequate battery power, for the
the OnStar advisor cannot be heard.
an OnStar call center when Q is OnStar equipment to operate. There
are other problems OnStar cannot If the light next to the OnStar
pressed, ] is pressed, or if the buttons is red, the system may not
control that may prevent OnStar
airbags or ACR system deploy. This
information usually includes the
from providing OnStar service at be functioning properly. Press Q
any particular time or place. Some and request a vehicle diagnostic.
vehicle's GPS location and, in the examples are damage to important
event of a crash, additional If the light appears clear (no light is
parts of the vehicle in a crash, hills, appearing), your OnStar
information regarding the crash that tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the subscription has expired and all
wireless phone network congestion. services have been deactivated.
direction from which the vehicle was
hit). When the virtual advisor feature OnStar Steering Wheel Press Q to confirm that the OnStar
of OnStar hands-free calling is Controls equipment is active.
used, the vehicle also sends OnStar
the vehicle's GPS location so they This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute
can provide services where it is button that can be used to interact
located. with OnStar hands-free calling. See
Steering Wheel Controls on
Location information about the page 4‑6 for more information.
vehicle is only available if the GPS
satellite signals are unobstructed On some vehicles, the mute button
and available. can be used to dial numbers into
voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's
Guide for more information.
2 NOTES
Lighting 5-1
Lighting Exterior Lighting AUTO (Automatic Headlamps):

Turns the exterior lamps on and off
automatically depending on the
Exterior Lamp Controls exterior light.
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 5-1 ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the
Headlamp High/Low-Beam parking lamps together with the
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 following:
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 . Sidemarker Lamps
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 . Taillamps
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 5-2 . License Plate Lamps
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
. Instrument Panel Lights
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5 (Headlamps): Turns on the
headlamps, together with the
Interior Lighting previously listed lamps and lights.
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 The exterior lamp control is located
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 on the turn signal/lane change lever.
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn
Lighting Features to operate the exterior lamps.
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 O (Off): Turns the exterior
lamps off.
5-2 Lighting
Headlamp High/ Daytime Running When the exterior lamp band is

turned to the headlamp position, the
Low-Beam Changer Lamps (DRL) low-beam headlamps come on. The
2 3 Headlamp High/Low Beam Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) other lamps that come on with the
Changer: Push the turn/lane system makes the low-beam headlamps will also come on.
change lever away from you to turn headlamps come on at a reduced To idle your vehicle with the DRL
the high beams on. brightness in daylight when the off, move the shift lever to P (Park).
Pull the lever towards you to return following conditions are met: The DRL will stay off until the shift
to low beams. . The ignition is on. lever is moved out of the P (Park)
position.
. The exterior lamp band is in the
automatic position. The regular headlamp system
should be turned on when needed.
. The transmission is not in
P (Park).
Hazard Warning Flashers
. The light sensor determines it is
daytime. | (Hazard Warning Flasher):
This indicator light turns on in the Press this button, located on the
instrument panel cluster when the
. The parking brake is released. center of the instrument panel, to
high beam headlamps are on. Fully functional Daytime Running make the front and rear turn signal
Lamps (DRL) are required on all lamps flash on and off. This warns
Flash-to-Pass vehicles first sold in Canada. others that you are having trouble.
The flash‐to‐pass feature works with When the DRL are on the taillamps, Press | again to turn the
the low‐beams or Daytime Running sidemarker, instrument panel lights flashers off.
Lamps (DRL) on or off. and other lamps will not be on. The
instrument panel cluster will be lit.
To flash the high beams, pull the
turn signal/lane change lever all the
way towards you. Then release it.
Lighting 5-3
Turn and Lane-Change The lever returns to its starting # (Fog Lamps): Turn the fog lamp
position when it is released. band on the lever to # and release
Signals
If after signaling a turn or a lane it, to turn the fog lamps on or off.
change the arrows flash rapidly or The band will return to its original
do not come on, a signal bulb may position.
be burned out. The parking lamps or low‐beam
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb headlamps must be on to use the
is not burned out, check the fuse, fog lamps.
see Fuses on page 9‑37 for more The fog lamps will go off whenever
An arrow on the instrument panel information. the high-beam headlamps are
cluster will flash in the direction of turned on. When the high‐beam
the turn or lane change. Fog Lamps headlamps are turned off, the fog
Move the lever all the way up or For vehicles with fog lamps, the lamps will come on again.
down to signal a turn. control is located on the turn signal/ Some localities have laws that
Raise or lower the lever until the lane change lever. require the headlamps to be on
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane Use the fog lamps for better vision along with the fog lamps.
change. Hold it there until the lane in foggy or misty conditions.
change is complete.
5-4 Lighting
Interior Lighting 1 (Door): The lamp comes on Lighting Features

automatically when a door is
Instrument Panel opened. Entry Lighting
Illumination Control + (On): Turns the dome lamp on.
The dome lamp, cargo lamp and
This control is located on the foot lamp inside the vehicle come
Reading Lamps on when any door is opened, if the
instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column. The reading lamps are located on dome lamp is in the door position. In
the overhead console. These lamps addition, these lamps come on
D (Instrument Panel come on automatically when any when the Remote Keyless Entry
Brightness): Turn clockwise or door is opened. (RKE) unlock button is pressed.
counterclockwise to brighten or dim They stay on for 20 seconds or until
the lights. For manual operation, press the a door is opened. After the door is
button next to each lamp to turn it opened and then closed, the light
Dome Lamps on or off. remains on for 20 seconds, or until
The dome lamp controls are located the ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
in the overhead console. To change
the settings, press the following:
* (Dome Lamp Override): Turns
the lamp off, even when a door
is open.
Infotainment System 6-1
Infotainment Audio Players

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Introduction
System CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mass Storage
6-21 Read the following pages to
become familiar with the audio
Media (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 system's features.
Introduction Auxiliary Devices
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 (Radio with CD) . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Devices (Radio with
6-28 { WARNING
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 6-2
Overview (Radio with CD) . . . . . 6-3 CD/DVD/MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 Taking your eyes off the road
Overview (Radio with for extended periods could cause
Rear Seat Infotainment a crash resulting in injury or
CD/DVD/MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Rear Seat Entertainment
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 death to you or others. Do not
(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
give extended attention to
Radio Phone entertainment tasks while driving.
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 6-42
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Bluetooth (Infotainment This system provides access to
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43 many audio and non audio listings.
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Bluetooth (Voice To minimize taking your eyes off the
Recognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46 road while driving, do the following
Bluetooth (Navigation) . . . . . . . 6-58 while the vehicle is parked:
. Become familiar with the
operation and controls of the
audio system.
. Set up the tone, speaker
adjustments, and preset radio
stations.
6-2 Infotainment System
For more information, see Defensive Notice: Contact your Navigation/Radio System
Driving on page 8‑3. dealer/retailer before adding
For vehicles with a navigation radio
This vehicle's infotainment system any equipment.
system, see the separate Navigation
may be equipped with a noise Adding audio or communication System manual.
reduction system which can work equipment could interfere with
improperly if the audio amplifier, the operation of the vehicle's Theft-Deterrent Feature
engine calibrations, exhaust system, engine, radio, or other systems,
microphones, radio, or speakers are and could damage them. Follow The theft-deterrent feature works
modified or replaced. This could federal rules covering mobile by learning a portion of the Vehicle
result in more noticeable engine radio and telephone equipment. Identification Number (VIN) to
noise at certain speeds. the infotainment system. The
The vehicle has Retained infotainment system does not
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, operate if it is stolen or moved to
the audio system can be played a different vehicle.
even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 8‑29 for more
information.
Overview (Radio with CD) A. VOL/ O

. Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
B. g SEEK
. Radio: Seeks the previous
station.
. CD: Selects the previous
track or rewinds within a
track.
C. RADIO/BAND
. Changes the band while
listening to the radio.
. Selects the radio when
listening to a different audio
source.
D. AUX
. Selects a connected
external audio source.
E. Buttons 1 to 6
. Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations.
F. FAV K. k O. INFO
. Radio: Opens the . CD: Pauses the CD.
. Radio: Shows available
favorites list. information about the
L. CD current station.
G. TONE
. Selects the CD player when .
. Opens the tone menu. CD: Shows available
listening to a different audio information about the
H. CONFIG source. current track.
. Opens the settings menu. M. Z CD Eject P. 5/0
I. MENU/SEL . Removes a disc from the . Opens the phone
. Press: Opens the menus CD slot. main menu.
and selects menu items. N. l SEEK . Mutes the audio system.
. Turn: Highlights menu items
or sets values while in a
. Radio: Seeks the next Q. H
station.
menu. Manually selects . Opens the clock menu.
. CD: Selects the next track
radio stations while
listening to the radio. or fast forwards within a R. 0 BACK
track. . Menu: Moves one
J. CD Slot
level back.
. Insert a CD.
. Character Input: Deletes
the last character.
Overview (Radio with CD/DVD/MEM) A. VOL/ O

. Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
B. g SEEK
. Radio: Seeks the previous
station.
. CD/DVD: Selects the
previous track or rewinds
within a track.
. MEM: Selects the previous
track or rewinds within a
track.
C. RADIO/BAND
. Changes the band while
. Selects the radio when
listening to a different audio
source.
D. MEM/DVD/AUX
. Selects MEM, CD/DVD,
USB, or a connected front
or rear auxillary audio
source.
E. Buttons 1 to 6 J. CD/DVD Slot N. l SEEK

. Radio: Saves and selects . Insert a disc. . Radio: Seeks the next
favorite stations. station.
K. k (Play/Pause)
. MEM: Saves and selects . CD/DVD: Selects the next
. Radio: Pauses time shifted
favorite tracks and playlists. track or fast forwards within
content.
F. FAV a track.
. CD/DVD: Pauses
. Radio: Opens the CD/DVD‐A and DVD‐V
. MEM: Selects the next
favorites list. playback. Stops DVD‐V track or fast forwards within
playback. a track.
. MEM: Opens the
favorites list. . MEM: Pauses MEM O. INFO
G. TONE playback. . Radio: Shows available
information about the
. Opens the tone menu. L. O REC current station.
H. CONFIG . CD/DVD: Records content . CD/DVD: Shows available
. Opens the settings menu. from audio CDs and information about the
MP3/WMA CDs. current track.
I. MENU/SEL
.
. AUX: Records content from . MEM: Shows available
Press: Opens menus and USB mass storage devices.
selects menu items. information about the
M. Z CD Eject current track.
. Turn: Highlights menu
items or sets values . Removes a disc from the P. 5 / 0 (Phone/Mute)
while in a menu. Manually CD/DVD slot. . Opens the phone
selects radio stations while main menu.
. Mutes the audio system.
Q. DEL Automatic Switch‐Off Menu System

. MEM: Deletes the current If the infotainment system has Controls
track from MEM. been turned on after the ignition is
turned off, the system will turn off The MENU/SEL knob and the
R. 0 BACK automatically after ten minutes. 0 BACK button are used to
navigate the menu system.
. Menu: Moves one
Volume Control MENU/SEL (Menu/Select):
level back.
VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Turn to Press to:
. Character Input: Deletes
the last character. adjust the volume. . Enter the menu system.
5 / 0 (Mute): For vehicles with . Select or activate the highlighted
Operation OnStar®, press and hold 5 / 0 to menu option.
Controls mute the infotainment system. . Confirm a set value.
Press and hold 5 / 0 again, or turn . Turn a system setting on or off.
The infotainment system is
operated by using the pushbuttons, the VOL/ O knob to cancel mute.
Turn to:
multifunction knobs, menus that are For vehicles without OnStar®,
shown on the display, and steering
. Highlight a menu option.
press 5 / 0 to mute the
wheel controls, if equipped. . Select a value.
infotainment system. Press 5 / 0
Turning the System On or Off again, or turn the VOL/ O knob to
0 BACK: Press to:
VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Press to cancel mute. . Exit a menu.
turn the system on and off. . Return from a submenu screen
to the previous menu screen.
. Delete the last character in a
sequence.
Selecting a Menu Option Activating a Setting Turning a Function On or Off
1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
move the highlighted bar. highlight the setting. highlight the function.
2. Press the MENU/SEL button to 2. Press the MENU/SEL button to 2. Press the MENU/SEL button to
select the highlighted option. activate the setting. turn the function on or off.
Submenus Setting a Value Entering a Character Sequence
An arrow on the right‐hand edge of 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
the menu indicates that it has a change the current value of the highlight the character.
submenu with other options. setting. 2. Press the MENU/SEL button to
2. Press the MENU/SEL button to select the character.
confirm the setting.
Press the 0 BACK button to delete Adjusting the Treble, Midrange, Adjusting the Fader and Balance
the last character in the sequence and Bass
or press and hold to delete the
entire character sequence.
Audio Settings
The audio settings can be set for
each radio band and each audio
player source. 1. Press the TONE button.
1. Press the TONE button. 2. Select Fader or Balance.
To quickly reset an audio setting
value to 0: 2. Select Treble, Midrange, 3. Select the value.
or Bass.
1. Press the TONE button. Press the 0 BACK button to go
3. Select the value.
2. Select the audio setting. back to the Tone Settings menu.
Press the 0 BACK button to go
3. Press and hold the MENU/SEL
back to the Tone Settings menu.
button until the value
changes to 0.
Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer) System Settings Auto Volume

For vehicles that have an equalizer: Configuring the Number of The auto volume feature
Favorite Pages automatically adjusts the radio
volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle speeds up
or slows down, so that the volume
level is consistent.
The level of volume compensation
can be selected, or the auto volume
1. Press the TONE button. feature can be turned off.
2. Select EQ. To configure the number of available
favorite pages:
3. Select the setting.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
3. Select Radio Favorites.
4. Select the number of available
1. Press the CONFIG button.
favorite pages.
2. Select Radio Settings.
5. Press the 0 BACK button
to go back to the System 3. Select Auto Volume.
Configuration menu. 4. Select the setting.
5. Press the 0 BACK button
to go back to the System
Configuration menu.
Maximum Startup Volume Radio k : Press to pause and resume

The maximum volume played when time shifted data. See “Time Shifting
the Radio with CD is first turned on AM-FM Radio (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM)”
can be set. later in this section.
Control Buttons 1 to 6: Press to select preset
The buttons used to control the stations.
radio are:
RDS (Radio Data System)
RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the
The radio may have RDS. The RDS
radio on and choose between AM,
feature is available for use only on
FM, and XM™, if equipped.
FM stations that broadcast RDS
1. Press the CONFIG button. MENU/SEL: Turn to manually information. This feature only works
2. Select Radio Settings. search for stations. when the information from the radio
FAV: Press to open the station is available. In rare cases,
3. Select Maximum Startup a radio station could broadcast
Volume. favorites list.
incorrect information that causes the
4. Select the setting. l SEEK or g SEEK: Press to radio features to work improperly.
search for stations. Press and hold If this happens, contact the radio
5. Press the 0 BACK button to fast forward and rewind time station.
to go back to the System shifted data. See “Time Shifting
Configuration menu. (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM)” While the radio is tuned to an
later in this section. FM-RDS station, the station name
or call letters display.
Radio Menus If the radio station is known: Station Lists

Radio menus are available for AM Press and hold g SEEK or 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
and FM. l SEEK until the station on the 2. Select AM or FM Station List. All
Press the MENU/SEL knob to open display is reached, then release the receivable stations in the current
the main radio menu for that band. button. reception area are displayed. If a
Seek Tuning (Radio with CD/DVD station list has not been created,
Selecting a Band an automatic station search
and MEM)
Press the RADIO/BAND button is done.
to choose AM, FM, or XM™, Briefly press l SEEK or g SEEK, 3. Select the station.
if equipped. The last station that to automatically search for the next
was playing starts playing again. available station. If a station is not Category Lists
found, the radio switches to a more Most stations that broadcast an
Selecting a Station sensitive search level. If a station RDS program type code specify the
Seek Tuning (Radio with CD) still is not found, the frequency that type of programming transmitted.
was last active begins to play. Some stations change the program
If the radio station is not known:
Manual Tuning type code depending on the
Briefly press g SEEK or l SEEK, content. The system stores the RDS
to automatically search for the next Turn the MENU/SEL knob to select stations sorted by program type in
available station. If a station is not the frequency on the display. the FM category list.
found, the radio switches to a more Favorites List To search for a programming type
sensitive search level. If a station determined by station:
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
still is not found, the frequency that
was last active begins to play. 2. Select Favorites List. 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
3. Select the station. 2. Select FM category list. A list of
all programming types available
displays.
3. Select the programming type. Storing a Station as a Favorite Time Shifting (Radio with
A list of stations that transmit CD/DVD and MEM)
Stations from all bands can be
programming of the selected
stored in any order in the favorite The radio with MEM time shift
type displays.
pages. feature can rewind 20 minutes of
4. Select the station. FM/AM content. While listening to
Up to six stations can be stored in
The category lists are updated each favorite page and the number the radio, the content from the
when the station lists are of available favorite pages can current station is always being
updated. be set. buffered.
Updating Station & Category Lists Storing a Station as a Favorite Press the k button to pause the
radio. The radio displays the time
If stations stored in the station list To store the station to a position in shift status bar. The status bar
can no longer be received. the list, press the corresponding shows the amount of content that
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. button 1 to 6 until a beep is heard. is stored in the buffer and the
2. Select Update AM or FM Station Retrieving stations current pause point.
List, if the stations stored in Press the FAV button to open a To resume playback from the
the station list are no longer favorite page or to switch to another current pause point, press the
received. A station search will be favorite page. Briefly press one of k button again. The radio is no
completed and the first station in the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve the longer live, but played from the time
the updated list will play. station. shift buffer. A status bar displays
To cancel the station search, press below the station number.
the MENU/SEL knob. Press and hold the g SEEK or
l SEEK buttons to fast forward or
rewind through the time shift buffer.
Hold l SEEK until the end of the
recorded buffer resumes live
playback.
Press and release the g SEEK or Satellite Radio Control Buttons

l SEEK buttons to jump forward or Vehicles with an XM™ Satellite The buttons used to control the XM
back 30 seconds in the time shift Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite radio are:
buffer. Radio subscription can receive XM RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the
When the radio station is changed, programming. radio on and choose between AM,
the buffer is cleared and FM, and XM™, if equipped.
automatically restarted for the XM Satellite Radio Service
current station. Content from a XM is a satellite radio service that g SEEK / l SEEK: Press to go
previously tuned station is no longer to the previous or next station.
is based in the 48 contiguous
available. United States and 10 Canadian FAV: Press to open the
The time shift feature is not provinces. XM Satellite Radio has favorites list.
available while recording or with a wide variety of programming k : Press to pause and resume
other sources of playback. and commercial-free music, time shifted data. See “Time Shifting
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM)”
Pausing AM/FM with the Vehicle sound. A service fee is required to later in this section.
Turned Off receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at 1 to 6: Press to select preset
If AM/FM is paused when the
www.xmradio.com or call stations.
vehicle is turned off, the radio
continues to buffer the current radio 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and MENU/SEL: Turn to select stations.
station for up to 20 minutes. If the www.xmradio.ca or call Press to open the XM Satellite
vehicle is turned back on within 1-877-438-9677 in Canada. Radio menu.
20 minutes, the radio resumes
playback from the paused point.
Selecting the XM Band Selecting an XM Channel Selecting a Channel Using the

MENU/SEL Knob
Press the RADIO/BAND button to XM channels can be selected by
choose between the AM, FM and using g SEEK, l SEEK, the To select an XM channel using the
XM bands. The last channel played MENU/SEL knob, or the menu MENU/SEL knob:
in that band begins to play when system. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
that band is selected. highlight an XM channel, the
Selecting a Channel Using
XM Categories channel is selected after a short
g SEEK or l SEEK delay.
XM channels are organized in (Radio with CD)
categories. To select a channel using the menu:
. Press and release g SEEK or 1. Turn the menu knob and select
Removing or Adding Categories l SEEK to go to the previous Channel List.
Channels in a category that have or next channel.
2. Select the desired channel.
been removed can still be accessed . Press and hold g SEEK or
by using the g SEEK or l SEEK l SEEK to scroll through the Selecting a Channel Using the
buttons, or the MENU/SEL knob. Menu System
previous or next channel until
To add or remove categories: the channel is reached. 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob.
1. Press the CONFIG button. Selecting a Channel Using 2. Select XM Category List.
2. Select Radio Settings. g SEEK or l SEEK (Radio with 3. Select the category.
CD/DVD and MEM) 4. Select the channel.
3. Select XM Categories.
4. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to Press and release g SEEK or
highlight the category. l SEEK to go to the previous or
next channel.
remove or add the category.
Storing an XM Channel as a Time Shifting (Radio with Press and release the g SEEK or
Favorite CD/DVD and MEM) l SEEK buttons to go to the next
Channels from all bands can be The radio with MEM time shift or previous song in the time shift
stored in any order in the favorite feature can rewind 20 minutes of buffer.
pages. XM content. While listening to the When the channel is changed, the
Up to six channels can be stored in radio, the content from the current buffer is cleared and automatically
each favorite page and the number channel is always being buffered. restarted for the current channel.
Content from a previously tuned
of available favorite pages can Press the k button to pause the station is no longer available.
be set. radio. The radio displays the time
shift status bar. The status bar The time shift feature is not
Storing a Channel as a Favorite
shows the amount of content that is available while recording or with
To store the channel to a position stored in the buffer and the current other sources of playback.
in the list, press and hold the pause point.
corresponding 1 to 6 button until Pausing XM with the Vehicle
the channel can be heard again. To resume playback from the Turned Off
current pause point, press the If XM is paused when the vehicle is
Retrieving Channels k button again. The radio is no turned off, the radio continues to
Press the FAV button to open a longer live, but played from the time buffer the current radio station for
favorite page or to change to shift buffer. A status bar displays up to 20 minutes. If the vehicle is
another favorite page. Briefly press below the channel number. turned back on within 20 minutes,
one of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve Press and hold the g SEEK or the radio resumes playback from the
the channel. paused point.
l SEEK buttons to fast forward or
rewind through the time shift buffer.
Hold l SEEK until the end of the
recorded buffer resumes live
playback.
XM Messages No Artist Info: The system CAT Not Found: The system is
is working properly. No artist working properly. There are no
XL (Explicit Language
information is available at this time channels available for the selected
Channels): These channels, or any
on this channel. category.
others, can be blocked by request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). No Title Info: The system is XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
working properly. No song title this message alternates with the
XM Updating: The encryption code
information is available at this time XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This
in the receiver is being updated, no
on this channel. label is needed to activate the
action is required. This process
No CAT Info: The system is service.
should take no longer than
30 seconds. working properly. No category Unknown: If this message is
information is available at this time received when tuned to channel 0,
Loading XM: The audio system is
on this channel. there could be a receiver fault.
acquiring and processing audio and
No Information: The system Consult with your dealer/retailer.
text data, no action is needed. This
message should disappear shortly. is working properly. No text or Check Antenna: If this message
informational messages are does not clear within a short period
Channel Off Air: This channel is
available at this time on this of time, the receiver could have a
not currently in service. Tune in to
channel. fault. Consult with your dealer/
another channel.
No XM Signal: The system is retailer.
Channel Unauth: This channel is
working properly. The vehicle may XM Not Available: If this message
blocked or cannot be received with
be in a location where the XM signal does not clear within a short period
your XM Subscription package.
is being blocked. When the vehicle of time, the receiver could have a
Channel Unavailable: This is moved into an open area, the fault. Consult with your dealer/
previously assigned channel is no signal should return. retailer.
longer assigned. Tune to another
station.
Radio Reception AM Cellular Phone Usage

Frequency interference and static The range for most AM stations is Cellular phone usage can cause
can occur during normal radio greater than for FM, especially at interference with the vehicle's radio.
reception if items such as cell phone night. The longer range can cause
chargers, vehicle convenience station frequencies to interfere with Multi-Band Antenna
accessories, and external electronic each other. Static can occur when
things like storms and power lines The multi-band antenna is located
devices are plugged into the on the roof of the vehicle. The
accessory power outlet. If there is interfere with radio reception. When
this happens, try reducing the treble antenna is used for the AM/FM
interference or static, unplug the radio, OnStar, the XM Satellite
item from the accessory power on the radio.
Radio Service System, and GPS
outlet. XM™ Satellite Radio Service (Global Positioning System); if the
FM vehicle has these features. Keep
XM Satellite Radio Service gives
the antenna clear of obstructions for
FM signals only reach about 16 to digital radio reception from
coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous clear reception. If the vehicle has
65 km (10 to 40 miles). Although the a sunroof and it is open, the
radio has a built-in electronic circuit United States, and in Canada. Just
performance of the AM/FM radio,
that automatically works to reduce as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals, OnStar, XM system, and GPS can
interference, some static can occur, be affected.
especially around tall buildings or causing the sound to fade in and
hills, causing the sound to fade in out. In addition, traveling or standing
and out. under heavy foliage, bridges,
garages, or tunnels may cause loss
of the XM signal for a period of time.
Audio Players If the bottom surface of a disc is

dirty, take a soft lint free cloth,
While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition
or dampen a clean soft cloth in a without any label, load one CD
CD Player mild neutral detergent solution at a time, and keep the CD player
The CD player can play audio CDs mixed with water, and clean it. and the loading slot free of
and MP3 CDs. Wipe the disc from the center to foreign materials, liquids, and
the outer edge. debris.
The CD player will not play
8 cm (3 in.) CDs. Care of the CD Player Control Buttons
Care of CDs Do not add a label to a disc, as it The buttons used to control the CD
could get caught in the CD player. player are:
Sound quality can be reduced due If a label is needed, label the top
to disc quality, recording method, CD: Press to choose between the
of the recorded disc with a
quality of the music recorded, and CD and AUX player.
marking pen.
how the disc has been handled. l SEEK or g SEEK : Press to
Handle discs carefully and store Do not use disc lens cleaners
select tracks or to fast forward or
them in their original cases or other because they could contaminate the
rewind within a track.
protective cases away from direct lens of the disc optics and damage
sunlight and dust. If the bottom the CD player. INFO: Press to display additional
surface of a disc is damaged, the information about the CD that may
Notice: If a label is added to a
disc may not play properly or at all. be available.
CD, or more than one CD is
Do not touch the bottom surface of inserted into the slot at a time, MENU/SEL: Turn to select tracks.
a disc while handling it; this could or an attempt is made to play
damage the surface. Pick up discs Z (Eject): Press to remove
scratched or damaged CDs, the the CD.
by grasping the outer edges or the CD player could be damaged.
edge of the hole and the outer edge. k : Press to pause a CD or MP3
track, press again to resume
playback.
Inserting a CD Selecting a CD Track Fast Forward and Rewind

With the printed side facing up, Using the control buttons: Press and hold l SEEK or
insert a disc into the CD slot until it . Press the g SEEK or l SEEK g SEEK to fast forward or rewind
is drawn in. within the current track.
button to select the previous or
Removing a CD next track. Selecting an MP3 Track
. Turn the MENU/SEL knob.
Press the Z button. Using the control buttons:
The disc is pushed out of the Using the CD Menu: . Press the g SEEK or l SEEK
CD slot. 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. button to select the previous or
If the disc is not removed after it is 2. Select Tracks list. next track.
ejected, it is pulled back in after a . Turn the MENU/SEL knob.
3. Select the track.
few seconds.
Using the CD Menu:
Playing Tracks in Random Order
Playing a CD or MP3 CD 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
Press the MENU/SEL knob and
Press the CD button, if there is a then set Shuffle Songs to On. 2. Select Playlists / Folders.
disc in the player it begins playing.
3. Select the playlist or folder.
Information about the disc and
current track is shown on the 4. Select the track.
display depending on the data
stored.
Searching for MP3 Tracks CD/DVD Player mixed with water, and clean it. Wipe
The search feature may take some the disc from the center to the
The CD/DVD player can play outer edge.
time to display the information after CDs, DVD‐As, MP3/WMA CDs,
reading the disc due to the amount MP3/WMA DVDs, and DVD‐Vs. Care of the CD/DVD Player
of information stored on the disc.
FM automatically plays while the The CD/DVD player will not play Do not add a label to a disc, as it
disc is being read. 8 cm (3 in.) discs. could get caught in the CD/DVD
player. If a label is needed, label
Tracks can be searched by: Care of CDs and DVDs the top of the recorded disc with a
. Playlists Sound quality can be reduced due marking pen.
to disc quality, recording method, Do not use disc lens cleaners
. Artists quality of the music recorded, and because they could contaminate the
. Albums how the disc has been handled. lens of the disc optics and damage
. Song Titles Handle discs carefully and store the CD/DVD player.
them in their original cases or other
. Genres protective cases away from direct Notice: If a label is added to a
sunlight and dust. If the bottom CD, or more than one CD is
. Folder View inserted into the slot at a time,
surface of a disc is damaged, the
To search for tracks: disc may not play properly or at all. or an attempt is made to play
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. Do not touch the bottom surface of scratched or damaged CDs, the
a disc while handling it; this could CD player could be damaged.
2. Select Search. damage the surface. Pick up discs While using the CD player, use
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, by grasping the outer edges or the only CDs in good condition
Song Titles, Genres, edge of the hole and the outer edge. without any label, load one CD at
or Folder View. a time, and keep the CD player
If the bottom surface of a disc is and the loading slot free of
4. Select the track. dirty, take a soft lint free cloth, foreign materials, liquids, and
or dampen a clean soft cloth in a debris.
mild neutral detergent solution
Control Buttons Removing a CD or DVD Using the menu:

The buttons used to control the Press the Z button. 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
CD/DVD player are: 2. Select Tracks List.
The disc is pushed out of the
MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to choose CD/DVD slot. 3. Select the track.
between the MEM, CD/DVD,
and AUX. If the disc is not removed after it is Pausing a CD or DVD‐A Track
ejected, it is pulled back in after a
l SEEK or g SEEK : Press to few seconds. Press the k button to pause a CD
select tracks or to fast forward or or DVD‐A track. Press the k button
rewind within a track. Playing a CD or DVD‐A Disc
again to continue playing the track.
INFO: Press to display additional Press the MEM/DVD/AUX button
information about the disc that may if there is a disc in the player, it Playing CD or DVD‐A Tracks in
be available. begins playing. Random Order
MENU/SEL: Turn to select tracks. Information about the disc and Press the MENU/SEL knob and
current track is shown on the then set Shuffle Songs to On.
Z (Eject): Press to remove
display depending on the data
a disc. Fast Forward and Rewind
stored.
k : Press to pause a CD, DVD‐A, Press and hold the l SEEK or
or DVD‐V, press again to resume Selecting CD or DVD‐A Tracks g SEEK button to fast forward or
playback. Press and hold to stop a Using the control buttons: rewind within the current track.
DVD‐V disc.
. Press the g SEEK or l SEEK
Inserting a CD or DVD button to select the previous or
With the printed side facing up, next track.
insert a disc into the slot until it is . Turn the MENU/SEL knob.
drawn in.
Playing an MP3 CD or DVD Searching for MP3s on a CD To search for tracks:

or DVD 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
Files that are not stored in folders
are displayed in the root It is normal for the search feature 2. Select Search.
directory (disc). to take some time to display the
information after reading the disc 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
The search rate increases if the Song Titles, or Genres.
due to the amount of information
MENU/SEL knob is continuously
stored on the disc. The infotainment 4. Select the track. The search
turned while searching in a list.
system automatically switches to rate increases if the menu
Selecting an MP3 Track FM while the disc is being read. MENU/SEL knob is continuously
Using the control buttons: Files that do not have any meta turned while searching in a list.
data stored in the ID3 tag display Playing MP3 Tracks in Random
. Press the g SEEK or l SEEK as Unknown.
button to select the previous or Order
next track. Tracks can be searched for by: Press the MENU/SEL knob and
. Playlists then set Shuffle Songs to On.
Using the CD or DVD Menu:

. Artists Recording an Audio or MP3
. Albums CD to MEM
. Song Titles See Mass Storage Media (MEM) on
2. Select Folder List.
3. Select the folder.
. Genres
4. Select the track. The number of objects in each

category is shown in parentheses
after the category.
Playing a DVD‐V Changing the Audio Stream

. Cursor RIGHT
See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
. Cursor LEFT
System on page 6‑33 for 2. Select Audio Stream.
. Up Menu
information about how to control a
3. Select Change Audio Stream. Use the following actions to
Video DVD using the wireless
navigate the menu on a DVD‐V
remote control. 4. Press MENU/SEL to change the Disc while playing chapters.
Selecting a Chapter selection.
. Pause (Play)
Using the control buttons: Select Cancel to exit the menu.
. Chapter List
Pausing a DVD
. Press the g SEEK or l SEEK . Title List
button to select the previous or 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. . DVD/DVD
next track. 2. Select Pause, to pause the
disc. Select Unpause to start
. DVD/AUX
playback. . AUX/DVD
Using DVD Menu:
Navigating the DVD‐V Disc Menu . AUX/AUX
Use the following actions to To navigate the menu:
2. Select Chapter List.
navigate the title menu on a 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
3. Select the chapter. DVD‐V Disc.
2. Select the action.
Selecting a Title . Select / Enter
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. . Cursor UP
2. Select Title List. . Cursor DOWN
3. Select the title.
Mass Storage INFO: Press to display additional Recording to MEM

information about the MEM track
Media (MEM) that may be available. Press O REC, then select Record
Infotainment systems with MEM Current Song or Record All Songs
k : Press to pause the track on Disc. If the track has started
storage are able to record up to currently playing, press again to
1.1 GB (gigabyte) of music from playing, the system will restart the
resume playback. track and begin recording from the
Audio CDs, MP3/WMA/AAC discs,
and USB storage devices. The MEM O REC: Press to record music beginning of the track. When the
player can also time shift audio from from a CD, DVD-A, or USB drive. song recording is completed, the
AM, FM, and XM™ radio. message Song Recorded to MEM
FAV (Favorites): Press to display displays, and there may be a slight
Music or content that is stored MEM favorites. pause.
in MEM that you did not create, 1‐6: Press to select a track or a
or have the right to distribute, must Songs recorded to MEM are stored
stored playlist. as the current date, disc and track
be deleted before the sale or end of
the lease of the vehicle. MENU/SEL: Turn to select tracks. number.
Control Buttons Recording From Audio CDs Re-recording a Previously

Recorded Disc
The buttons used to control the The infotainment system can record
MEM player are: the current song playing or all songs If the disc or track has already been
from an audio CD to MEM. A status recorded to MEM, the message
MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to select bar appears on the top of the The Song(s) is Already Recorded
the MEM player. display when the recording process displays.
l SEEK or g SEEK : Press to starts and disappears when the
select tracks or to fast forward or process has ended. Copy protected
rewind within a track. CDs cannot be recorded to MEM.
Stopping the Recording Recording From MP3/WMA Re-recording a Previously

Discs or USB Storage Devices Recorded Disc
Press the O REC button while
recording from an audio CD to USB Host Support If the disc or track has already been
display the stop recording option. recorded to MEM, the message
The USB connector uses the USB The Song(s) is Already Recorded
Select Stop Recording Song
standards, 1.1 and 2.0. displays.
to MEM.
USB Supported Devices Stopping the Recording
Renaming Recorded Discs
. USB Flash Drives Press the O REC button while
Discs that have been recorded to
MEM can be renamed. . Portable USB Hard Drives recording from an MP3/WMA CD or
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. USB storage device to display the
Recording to MEM
stop recording option. Select Stop
2. Select Rename Recorded Discs. Press O REC, then select Record Recording Song to MEM.
3. Select the disc. Current Song or Record Current
Deleting Tracks From MEM
Folder.
4. Select Album or Artist to rename Individual tracks and all tracks can
either one. The information stored by MEM is
be deleted from MEM.
titled according to the ID3 tag
5. Use the menu knob to enter To delete individual tracks, press
associated with it.
the character sequence. See and release the DEL button while
Operation on page 6‑7 for the track is playing.
more information.
To delete all tracks from MEM,
press and hold the DEL button while
a track is playing.
Playing From MEM To search for tracks: To remove MEM favorites

1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. categories:
Playing Back a Previously
Recorded CD 2. Select Search. 1. Press the CONFIG button.
Turn the MENU/SEL knob to select 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, 2. Select Radio Settings.
a track if MEM is already playing Song Titles, or Genres. 3. Select MEM Favorites.
from the previously recorded disc.
4. Select the track. The search rate 4. Remove the check mark from
1. Select Recorded Disc List. increases if the menu knob is the box to remove that MEM
2. Select the disc. continuously turned while favorites category.
searching in a list. Replace the check mark to re-add
Shuffle Songs the removed category.
Searching For a Track
Select the Shuffle Songs option Saving MEM Tracks as
Tracks can be searched for by: from the MEM menu to randomly Favorites
. Playlists play back tracks stored in MEM.
Favorites can be saved by
. Artists Configuring MEM Favorites pressing and holding one of the
. Albums 1 to 6 buttons. Favorites can be
During MEM playback, press the
stored according to the following list:
. Song Titles FAV button to change between
favorite categories. The favorite Playlist: Adds currently playing
. Genres categories are: track to the playlist selected.
The number of objects in each . Playlists Artist: Saves the artist associated
category is shown in parentheses with the currently playing track in
after the category.
. Artists
the indicated favorites position.
. Albums
. Genres
Album: Saves the album Auxiliary Devices 3.5 mm Auxiliary Input Jack
associated with the currently playing
track in the indicated favorites
(Radio with CD) Playback of an audio device that is
connected to the 3.5 mm auxiliary
position. The auxiliary input allows portable
input jack can only be controlled
Genre: Saves the genre associated devices to be connected using the
using the controls on the device.
with the currently playing track in 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack or the
the indicated favorites position. optional USB port. Adjusting the Volume
Portable devices are controlled by Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust the
Creating Playlists
using the menu system described in volume of the infotainment system
To create a playlist using tracks Operation on page 6‑7. after the volume level has been set
stored in MEM: on the portable audio device.
1. Select Playlist from the MEM
favorites. USB Port
2. Select the track to be stored in For vehicles with a USB port, the
the playlist. following devices may be connected
and controlled by the infotainment
3. Press and hold one of the system.
1 to 6 buttons until the track
can be heard again to store the
. iPod's
track. . PlaysForSure Devices (PFD)
4. Repeat steps 1 though 3 to store . USB Drives
additional tracks in the playlist. . Zune's
The auxiliary input is located in the Not all iPod's, PFD's, USB Drives,
center console. and Zune's are compatible with the
infotainment system.
Connecting and Controlling To search for tracks: On: Repeats the current track.
an iPod™ 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. Off: Playback starts from the
Not all iPod's can be controlled by 2. Select Search. beginning of the current track after
the Infotainment System. the last track finishes.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Connecting an iPod Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres, Connecting and Controlling a
Connect the iPod to the USB port. Audiobooks, or Composers. PlaysForSure Device (PFD)
4. Select the track. or Zune™
Shuffle Connecting a PFD or Zune
Tracks can be searched for by:
Press the MENU/SEL knob and set Connect the PFD or Zune to the
. Playlists USB port.
Shuffle Songs (Random) to On or
. Artists
Off, then press the 0 BACK button Searching For a Track
. Albums to return the main screen. Tracks can be searched for by:
. Song Titles On: Plays tracks in the current . Playlists
. Podcasts folder in random order.
. Artists
. Genres Off: Plays tracks in the current
folder in sequential order.
. Albums
. Audiobooks . Song Titles
Repeat
. Composers . Podcasts
Press the MENU/SEL knob and set
Repeat to On or Off, then press the . Genres
0 BACK button to return the main
screen.
To search for tracks: Connecting and Controlling a Tracks can be searched for by:
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. USB Drive . Playlists*
2. Select Search. The infotainment system can only . Artists
play back .mp3 and .wma files from
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, a USB drive.
. Albums
Song Titles, Podcasts, . Song Titles
or Genres. Only the first 2,500 songs are
recognized on the device. . Genres
When a device is not supported, . Folder View
Shuffle Functionality the message “No supported data
*This only displays if a playlist is
Press the MENU/SEL knob and set found. You can safely disconnect
found on the device.
Shuffle Songs (Random) to On the device” appears.
or Off. To search for tracks:
Connecting a USB Drive
On: Plays current tracks in random 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
Connect the USB drive to the
order. USB port. 2. Select Search.
Off: Plays current tracks in 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
sequential order. Song Titles, Genres,
It is normal for the search feature to or Folder View.
Repeat Functionality take some time to display the
Press the MENU/SEL knob and set information after reading the disc 4. Select the track.
Repeat to On or Off. due to the amount of information
stored on the disc.
Repeat On: Repeats the current
track. Files that do not have any meta
data stored in the ID3 tag display as
Repeat Off: Playback starts from
Unknown.
the beginning of the current track
after the last track finishes.
Shuffle Functionality Auxiliary Devices (Radio 3.5 mm Auxiliary Input Jack

Press the MENU/SEL knob and set with CD/DVD/MEM) Playback of an audio device that is
Shuffle Songs (Random) to On connected to the 3.5 mm auxiliary
or Off. The auxiliary input allows portable
input jack can only be controlled
devices to be connected using the
On: Plays current tracks in random using the controls on the device.
3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack or the
order. optional USB port. Adjusting the Volume
Off: Plays current tracks in Portable devices are controlled by Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust the
sequential order. using the menu system described in volume of the infotainment system
Repeat Functionality Operation on page 6‑7. after the volume level has been set
Press the MENU/SEL knob and set on the portable audio device.
Repeat to On or Off. USB Port
Repeat On: Repeats the current The following devices may be
track. connected to the USB port and
Repeat Off: Playback starts from controlled by the infotainment
the beginning of the current track system.
after the last track finishes. . iPod's
. USB Mass Storage Devices
Not all iPod's or USB Mass Storage
Devices are compatible with the
infotainment system.
The auxiliary input is located in the
center console.
Connecting and Controlling Searching For a Track Connecting and Controlling a

an iPod™ Tracks can be searched for by: USB Drive
Not all iPod's can be controlled by . Playlists Files that are not stored in folders
the Infotainment System. are displayed in the root
. Artists directory (USB).
Connecting an iPod . Albums
Connect the iPod to the USB port. Connecting a USB Drive
. Song Titles
Connect the USB drive to the
Selecting a Track . Genres USB port.
Using the control buttons: . Composers Disconnecting a USB Drive
. Press g SEEK or l SEEK to . Audiobooks A USB drive should be ejected from
select the previous or next track. the USB port before disconnecting
The number of objects in each
. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to category is shown in parentheses it. To eject a USB drive:
select the track in the current after the category. 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
sub menu. The track will start
To search for tracks: 2. Select USB Eject.
to play.
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. Playing Tracks in Random Order
Playing Tracks in Random Order
2. Select Search. Press the MENU/SEL knob and
Press the MENU/SEL knob and set
Shuffle Songs to On or Off. 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, then set Shuffle Songs to On.
Albums, Song Titles, Genres,
Shuffle On: Plays current tracks in Composers, or Audiobooks.
random order.
4. Select the track. The search rate
Shuffle Off: Plays current tracks in increases if the MENU/SEL knob
sequential order. is continuously turned while
searching in a list.
Selecting a Track Tracks can be searched by: Rear Seat

Using the control buttons: . Playlists
Infotainment
Press g SEEK or l SEEK to Artists
. .
select the previous or next track. . Albums Rear Seat Entertainment

. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to . Song Titles (RSE) System
select a track in the current sub The vehicle may have a DVD Rear
menu. The track will start to play.
. Genres
Seat Entertainment (RSE) system.
Selecting a track in a different The number of objects in each The RSE system works with the
folder: category is shown in parentheses vehicle's infotainment system. The
after the category.
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. DVD player is part of the front radio.
To search for tracks: The RSE system includes a radio
2. Select Folder List. with a DVD player, two rear seat
3. Select the folder. video display screens, audio/video
2. Select Search. jacks, two wireless headphones,
4. Select the track. and a remote control. See CD/DVD
3. Select: Playlists, Artists,
Searching for Tracks Albums, Song Titles, Genres, Player on page 6‑21 or the
Composers, or Audiobooks. separate navigation system manual
It is normal for the search feature to for more information on the vehicle's
take some time to display the 4. Select the track. The search rate DVD system.
information after reading the device increases if the MENU/SEL knob
due to the amount of information is continuously turned while
stored. searching in a list.
Files that do not have any meta Recording Tracks to MEM
data stored in the ID3 tag display as
Unknown. See Mass Storage Media (MEM) on
Before Driving On some infotainment systems, the Headphones

Global Off feature can be turned off
The RSE is for rear seat RSE includes two 2-channel
by performing one of the following:
passengers only. The driver wireless headphones. Channel 1
cannot safely view the video . Press and hold the radio power is dedicated to the DVD player,
screen while driving. button for more than and Channel 2 is dedicated to any
three seconds. external auxiliary device connected
In severe or extreme weather
conditions, the RSE system may not . Insert or eject any disc. to the A/V jacks. The headphones
work until the temperature is within are used to listen to various
. Insert a DVD video disc. multi‐media. The wireless
the operating range. The operating
range is above −20°C (−4°F)
. Press the Remote Control power headphones have an On/Off button,
and below 60°C (140°F). If the button. channel 1/2 switch, and a volume
temperature is outside of this range, control. Turn the headphones off
. Press the MEM/DVD/AUX button when not in use.
heat or cool the vehicle until it is or the k button when a DVD
within the operating range. Push the On/Off button to turn on
video disc is in the player.
the headphones. A light on the
Global Off . Press the SRC button on the headphones comes on. If the light
Depending on the infotainment steering wheel when a DVD does not come on, check the
system, the RSE system may video disc is in the player. batteries. Intermittent sound or static
have a Global Off feature. The . Cycle the ignition. can also indicate weak batteries.
Global Off feature disables all RSE See “Battery Replacement” later in
system features. Press and hold this section for more information.
the radio power button for more
than three seconds for Global Off
to disable the RSE features.
Infrared transmitters are on the Notice: Do not store the Remove the batteries if the
top of the left seatback video headphones in heat or direct headphones are not going to be
screen. The headphones shut off sunlight. This could damage the used for a long period of time.
automatically to save the battery headphones and repairs will not
power if the RSE system is shut be covered by the warranty. Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
off or if the headphones are out of Storage in extreme cold can If available, the A/V jacks are
range of the transmitters for more weaken the batteries. Keep the located on the rear of the floor
than three minutes. Moving too headphones stored in a cool, dry console. They allow audio or video
far forward or stepping out of the place. cables to be connected from an
vehicle, can cause the headphones If the foam ear pads become worn auxiliary device such as a
to lose the signal or have static. or damaged, they can be replaced camcorder or a video game system.
The headphones may automatically separately from the headphones. The A/V jacks are color coded:
turn off after four hours of See your dealer/retailer for more . Yellow for video input.
continuous use. information.
. White for left audio input.
To adjust the volume on the Battery Replacement
headphones, use the volume . Red for right audio input.
control. To change the batteries:
Power for auxiliary devices is not
For best audio performance, the 1. Loosen the screw to the battery supplied by the radio system.
headphones must be worn correctly, door located on the left side of
the headphones. To use the auxiliary inputs of the
with the headband over the top of RSE system:
the head. L (Left) and R (Right) 2. Slide the battery door open.
are above the ear pads and 1. Connect the auxiliary device
3. Replace the two AAA batteries. cables to the A/V jacks.
are indicators as to how the
headphones should be placed on 4. Replace the battery door and 2. Power on both the auxiliary
the head. tighten the screw. device and the RSE video
screen.
Changing the Source on the Video 4. Press the AUX button a fourth Audio Output
Display Screens time to change the source of
Audio from the DVD player or
The image from the auxiliary device both video screens to the DVD
auxiliary inputs can be heard
can be switched between the video player.
through the following:
display screens. How to Change the RSE Video . Wireless Headphones
To change the display: Screen Settings
. Vehicle Speakers
1. Press the AUX button on the The screen display mode,
brightness, and language can be The RSE system transmits the
remote control to change the
changed from the setup menu using audio signal to the wireless
source of both video screens
the remote control. To change a headphones if an audio signal is
from the DVD player to the
setting: available. See “Headphones” earlier
auxiliary device.
in this section for more information.
2. Press the AUX button a second 1. Press z.
The front seat passengers are able
time to change the left video
screen source to the DVD player 2. Use n , q , p , o and r to to listen to playback from the A/V
select the settings. jacks through the vehicle speakers
and the right video screen to the
by selecting Rear A/V as the source
auxiliary device. 3. Press z again to exit the on the radio.
3. Press the AUX button a third setup menu.
time to change the left video
screen source to the auxiliary
device and the right video
screen to the DVD player.
Video Screens Push the video screen down into its Video Screen Input Jack
locked position when it is not in use,
The video screens are located in the Each video screen is equipped
the screen turns off automatically.
back of the driver and front with a video input jack to allow
passenger seats. Only the left RSE seatback console video cables to be connected from
contains the infrared transmitters for an auxiliary device such as a
the wireless headphones, they may camcorder or a video game system.
be visible as eight illuminated LEDs. This signal will override any video
These LEDs are not on the right provided by the RSE system; either
video screen. Both seatback the DVD or Auxiliary A/V jack
consoles contain an infrared source. The RSE system must be
receiver for the remote control. on for this input to operate.
They are located at the top of each
console. Remote Control
Notice: Avoid directly touching To use the remote control, aim it at
the video screen, as damage may the transmitter window at either
occur. See “Cleaning the Video seatback console and press the
Screen” later in this section for button. Direct sunlight or very bright
To use the video screen: more information. light could affect the ability of the
RSE transmitter to receive signals
1. Push the release button located from the remote control. Check
on the seatback console. the batteries if the remote control
2. Move the screen to the desired does not seem to be working. See
viewing position. “Battery Replacement” later in this
section. Objects blocking the line of
sight could also affect the function
of the remote control.
If a CD, DVD, or MP3 disc is in the v (Title): Press to return to the c (Stop): Press to stop playing,
Radio DVD slot, the remote control main menu of the DVD. This rewinding, or fast forwarding a
O button can be used to turn on function could vary for each disc. DVD. Press twice to return to the
the video screen display and start beginning of the DVD.
the disc. The infotainment system y (Main Menu): Press to access
can also turn on the video screen the DVD menu. The DVD menu is s (Play/Pause): Press to start
display. See CD/DVD Player on different on every DVD. Use the playing a DVD. Press to pause a
page 6‑21 or the separate navigation arrows to move the DVD while it is playing. Press again
navigation system manual for cursor. After making a selection to continue playing.
more information. press the enter button. This button Depending on the infotainment
only operates when using a DVD. system in the vehicle, DVD
Notice: Storing the remote
control in a hot area or in direct n , q, p, o (Menu Navigation playback may be slowed down by
sunlight can damage it, and the Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to pressing s then [. Reverse
navigate through a menu.
repairs will not be covered by the slow play by pressing s then r.
warranty. Storage in extreme cold r (Enter): Press to select the Press s again to cancel slow play.
can weaken the batteries. Keep highlighted choice in any menu.
the remote control stored in a
z (Display Menu): Press to
t (Previous Track/Chapter):
cool, dry place. Press to go to the start of the
adjust the brightness, screen
current track or chapter. Press
Remote Control Buttons display mode, and display the
again to go to the previous track or
language menu.
O (Power): Press to turn the chapter. This button may not work
video screens on and off. q (Return): Press to exit the when the DVD is playing the
current active menu and return to copyright information or the
P (Illumination): Press to turn
the previous menu. This button previews.
the remote control backlight on.
operates only when the display
The backlight times out after several
menu or a DVD menu is active.
seconds if no other button is
pressed.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press e (Audio): Press to change audio } 10 (Double Digit Entries)
to go to the beginning of the next tracks on DVDs that have this (If Available): Press this button to
chapter or track. This button might feature when the DVD is playing. select chapter or track numbers
not work when the DVD is playing { (Subtitles): Press to turn greater than 9. Press this button
the copyright information or the ON/OFF subtitles and to move before inputting the number.
previews. through subtitle options when a 1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):
r (Fast Reverse): Press to DVD is playing. The numbered keypad provides the
quickly reverse the DVD or CD. AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switch capability of direct chapter or track
To stop fast reversing a DVD video, the video display between the DVD number selection.
press s. To stop fast reversing a player and an auxiliary source. Replacing the Remote Control
DVD audio or CD, release r. d (Camera): Press to change If the remote control becomes lost
This button might not work when the camera angle on DVDs that or damaged, a new universal
the DVD is playing the copyright have this feature when the DVD is remote control can be purchased.
information or the previews. playing. Use a Toshiba® code set for
[ (Fast Forward): Press to fast \ (Clear) (If Available): Press replacement universal remote
forward the DVD or CD. To stop this button within three seconds controls.
fast forwarding a DVD video, after inputting a numeric selection,
press s To stop fast forwarding to clear all numeric inputs.
a DVD audio or CD, release [.
This button might not work when
the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
Battery Replacement Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

To change the remote control Problem Recommended Action
batteries:
No power. The ignition might not be turned to
1. Slide back the rear cover on the ON/RUN or in ACC/ACCESSORY.
remote control.
The picture does not fill the screen. Check the display mode settings in
2. Replace the two batteries in the There are black borders on the top the setup menu by pressing the
compartment. and bottom or on both sides or it display menu button on the remote
3. Replace the battery cover. looks stretched out. control.
Remove the batteries from the In auxiliary mode, the picture moves Check the auxiliary input
remote control if unused for an or scrolls. connections at both devices.
extended period of time.
The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no
obstruction between the remote
control and the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to make sure
they are not dead or installed
incorrectly.
After stopping the player, I push If the stop button was pressed
Play but sometimes the DVD starts one time, the DVD player resumes
where I left off and sometimes at the playing where the DVD was
beginning. stopped. If the stop button was
pressed two times the DVD player
begins to play from the beginning of
the DVD.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd) DVD Display Error Messages

Problem Recommended Action The DVD display error message
depends on which radio the vehicle
The auxiliary source is running but Check that the RSE video screen has. The video screen may display
there is no picture or sound. is in the auxiliary source mode by one of the following:
pressing the AUX button on the
remote control. Disc Load/Eject Error or
Check the auxiliary input Mechanical Error: There are
connections at both devices. disc load or eject problems.
Sometimes the wireless headphone Check for obstructions, low Disc Format Error or Unknown
audio cuts out or buzzes. batteries, reception range, and Format: The disc is inserted with
interference from cellular telephone the disc label wrong side up, or if
towers or by using a cellular the disc is damaged.
telephone in the vehicle. Disc Region Error or Disc Error:
Check that the headphones are The disc is not from a correct
on correctly using the L (left) and region.
R (right) on the headphones.
Check that the headphones are No Disc Inserted: No disc is
positioned properly with the present when the Z EJECT or
headband across the top of MEM/DVD/AUX button is pressed
the head. on the radio.
I lost the remote and/or the See your dealer/retailer for
headphones. assistance.
The DVD is playing, but there is no Check that the RSE video screen is
picture or sound. sourced to the DVD player by
pressing the AUX button on the
remote control.
DVD Distortion Phone Steering Wheel Controls

Video distortion can occur when b / g (Push To Talk): Press to
operating cellular phones, scanners, Bluetooth (Overview) answer incoming calls, to confirm
CB radios, Global Position Systems system information, and to start
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, Vehicles with a Bluetooth system voice recognition.
or walkie talkies. can use a Bluetooth capable cell
phone with a Hands‐Free Profile to $ / c (Mute/End Call): Press to
It might be necessary to turn off the make and receive phone calls. end a call, reject a call, or to cancel
DVD player when operating one of The infotainment system and voice an operation.
these devices in or near the vehicle. recognition are used to control the Infotainment System Controls
*Excludes the OnStar® System. system. The system can be used
while the ignition is in ON/RUN or For information about how to
Cleaning the RSE Seatback ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of navigate the menu system using
Console the Bluetooth system can be up to the infotainment controls, see
9.1 m (30 ft.). Not all phones support Operation on page 6‑7.
Use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water to clean the RSE all functions and not all phones 5 (Phone): Press to enter the
seatback console surface. work with the Bluetooth system. Phone main menu.
See www.gm.com/bluetooth for
Cleaning the Video Screen more information about compatible Voice Recognition
phones. The voice recognition system uses
Use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water. Use care when Bluetooth Controls commands to control the system
touching or cleaning the screen as and dial phone numbers.
damage could result. Use the buttons located on the
Noise: The system may not
infotainment system and the
recognize voice commands if there
steering wheel to operate the
is too much background noise.
Bluetooth system.
When to Speak: A tone sounds to Bluetooth (Infotainment Pairing Information:

indicate that the system is ready for
a voice command. Wait for the tone
Controls) . Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system.
and then speak. For information about how to
navigate the menu system using the . The pairing process is disabled
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a when the vehicle is moving.
calm and natural voice. infotainment controls, see Operation
on page 6‑7. . The Bluetooth system links with
Audio System the first available paired cell
Pairing
When using the Bluetooth system, phone in the order the phone
sound comes through the vehicle's A Bluetooth enabled cell phone was paired.
front audio system speakers and must be paired to the Bluetooth
system first and then connected to
. Only one paired cell phone can
overrides the audio system. Use be connected to the Bluetooth
the vehicle before it can be used.
the VOL/ O knob during a call to See the cell phone manufacturer system at a time.
change the volume level. The user guide for Bluetooth functions . Pairing should only need to be
adjusted volume level remains in before pairing the cell phone. If a completed once, unless changes
memory for later calls. The system Bluetooth phone is not connected, to the pairing information have
maintains a minimum volume level. calls will be made using OnStar® been made or the phone is
Other Information Hands‐Free Calling, if available. deleted.
Refer to the OnStar Owner's Guide To link to a different paired phone,
The Bluetooth® word mark and for more information.
logos are owned by the Bluetooth® see “Linking to a Different Phone”
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks The pairing process can be started later in this section.
by General Motors is under license. by using the voice recognition
Other trademarks and trade names system or the controls on the
are those of their respective owners. infotainment system.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 12‑16 for FCC information.
Pairing a Phone 7. The system responds with Linking to a Different Phone

1. Press the CONFIG button. “<Phone name> has been To link to a different phone, the new
successfully paired” after the phone must be in the vehicle and
2. Select Phone Settings. pairing process is complete. available to be connected to the
3. Select Bluetooth. 8. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to pair bluetooth system before the process
4. Select Pair Device (Phone). additional phones. is started.
A four digit PIN number appears Listing All Paired and Connected 1. Press the CONFIG button.
on the display. Phones 2. Select Phone Settings.
5. Start the pairing process on the 1. Press the CONFIG button.
cell phone that will be paired to 3. Select Bluetooth.
the vehicle. Reference the cell 2. Select Phone Settings. 4. Select Device List.
phone manufacturers user guide 3. Select Bluetooth. 5. Select the new phone to link to
for information on this process. and follow the on screen
4. Select Device List.
Locate the device named prompts.
“General Motors” in the list on Deleting a Paired Phone
If delete is selected, the
the cell phone and follow the 1. Press the CONFIG button. highlighted phone will be
instructions on the cell phone to deleted.
2. Select Phone Settings.
enter the four digit PIN number
provided by the system. 3. Select Bluetooth.
6. The system prompts for a name 4. Select Device List.
for the phone and confirms the 5. Select the phone to delete and
name provided. This name is follow the on screen prompts.
used to indicate which phone is
connected.
Making a Call Accepting or Declining a Call Declining a Call

Radio with CD When a call is received, the Turn the MENU/SEL knob
infotainment system mutes and a to Decline and press the
1. Press the 5 / 0 button. ring tone is heard in the vehicle. MENU/SEL knob.
2. Enter the character sequence. Accepting a Call Switching Between Calls
See “Entering a Character (Call Waiting Calls Only)
Sequence” in Operation on Turn the MENU/SEL knob
page 6‑7 for more information. to Answer and press the To switch between calls:
MENU/SEL knob. 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
3. Select Call to start dialing the
number. Declining a Call 2. Select Switch Call from
Turn the MENU/SEL knob the menu.
Radio with CD/DVD and MEM
to Decline and press the Conference Calling
1. Press the 5 / 0 button. MENU/SEL knob.
Conference calling and three way
2. Select Enter number. Call Waiting calling must be supported on the
3. Enter the character sequence. Call waiting must be supported on bluetooth phone and enabled by the
See “Entering a Character the bluetooth phone and enabled by wireless service carrier to work.
Sequence” in Operation on the wireless service carrier to work. To start a conference while in a
page 6‑7 for more information. current call:
Accepting a Call
4. Select Call to start dialing the 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
number. Turn the MENU/SEL knob
to Answer and press the 2. Select Enter Number.
MENU/SEL knob.
3. Enter the character sequence Muting a Call Bluetooth

then select Call. See “Entering
a Character Sequence” in To Mute a Call (Voice Recognition)
Operation on page 6‑7 for Press the MENU/SEL knob and Pairing
more information. select Mute Call.
A Bluetooth cell phone must be
4. After the call has been placed, To Cancel Mute paired to the Bluetooth system and
press the MENU/SEL knob and then connected to the vehicle before
choose Merge Calls. Press the MENU/SEL knob and
select Mute Call. it can be used. See the cell phone
5. To add more callers to the manufacturers user guide for
conference call, repeat Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Bluetooth functions before pairing
Steps 1 through 4. The amount (DTMF) Tones the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
of callers that can be added are is not connected, calls will be made
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can
limited by your wireless service using OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling,
send numbers during a call. This is
carrier. if available. Refer to the OnStar
used when calling a menu driven
owner's guide for more information.
Ending a Call phone system.
The pairing process can be started
Press the MENU/SEL knob and 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob and
by using the voice recognition
select Hang Up. select Enter Number.
system or the controls on the
2. Enter the character sequence, infotainment system.
see “Entering a Character
Sequence” in Operation on
Pairing Information: Pairing a Phone 4. Start the pairing process on the

cell phone that will be paired to
. Up to five cell phones can be 1. Press b / g. the vehicle. Reference the cell
. For vehicles without a phone manufacturers user guide
. The pairing process is disabled navigation system, the for information on this process.
when the vehicle is moving. system responds “Ready”, Locate the device named
. The Bluetooth system links with followed by a tone. “General Motors” in the list on
the first available paired cell . For vehicles with a the cell phone and follow the
phone in the order the phone navigation system, the instructions on the cell phone to
was paired. system responds with a enter the four‐digit PIN number
. Only one paired cell phone can tone. After the tone say that was provided in Step 3.
be connected to the Bluetooth “Hands Free”. The system 5. The system prompts for a name
system at a time. responds “Ready”, followed for the phone. This name will be
by a tone. used to indicate which phone is
. Pairing only needs to be
completed once, unless the 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system connected. The system confirms
pairing information changes or responds “Bluetooth ready”, the name.
the phone is deleted. followed by a tone. 6. The system responds with
To link to a different paired phone, 3. Say “Pair”. The system responds “<Phone name> has been
see Linking to a Different Phone with instructions and a four‐digit successfully paired” after the
later in this section. PIN number. The PIN number pairing process is complete.
will be used in Step 4. 7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for
additional phones to be paired.
Listing All Paired and Connected Deleting a Paired Phone 4. Say the name of the phone to
Phones be deleted. If the phone name
1. Press b / g. is unknown, use the “List”
1. Press b / g. . For vehicles without a command for a list of all paired
. For vehicles without a navigation system, the phones. The system responds
navigation system, the system responds “Ready”, “Would you like to delete
system responds “Ready”, followed by a tone. <phone name>? Yes or No”,
followed by a tone. followed by a tone.
. For vehicles with a
. For vehicles with a navigation system, the 5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone.
navigation system, the system responds with a The system responds “OK,
system responds with a tone. After the tone say deleting <phone name>”.
tone. After the tone say “Hands Free”. The system Linking to a Different Phone
“Hands Free”. The system responds “Ready”, followed
responds “Ready”, followed by a tone. 1. Press b / g.
by a tone. 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system . For vehicles without a
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds “Bluetooth ready”, navigation system, the
responds “Bluetooth ready”, followed by a tone. system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone. 3. Say “Delete”. The system asks followed by a tone.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all which phone to delete followed . For vehicles with a
the paired Bluetooth devices. by a tone. navigation system, the
The system will respond “is system responds with a
connected” if a phone is tone. After the tone say
connected to the vehicle. “Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system Using the Store Command 3. Say the complete phone number
responds “Bluetooth ready”, The store command allows a phone to be stored at once with no
followed by a tone. number to be stored without pauses.
3. Say “Change phone”. The entering the digits individually. . If the system recognizes
system responds “Please wait the number, the response is
while I search for other phones”. 1. Press b / g. “OK, Storing”.
. For vehicles without a
. If another phone is found, . If the system does not
the response will be navigation system, the recognize the phone
“<Phone name> is now system responds “Ready”, number, the response is
connected”. followed by a tone. “Store <Phone number>”.
. If another phone is not
. For vehicles with a “Please say yes or no”.
found, the original phone navigation system, the If the number is correct, say
remains connected. system responds with a “Yes”. If the number is not
tone. After the tone say correct, say “No”. The
Storing Name Tags “Hands Free”. The system system will ask for the
responds “Ready”, followed number again.
The system can store up to
thirty phone numbers as name by a tone. 4. After the system stores the
tags that are shared between the 2. Say “Store”. The system phone number, it responds
Bluetooth and OnStar systems. responds “Store, number “Please say the name tag”,
please”, followed by a tone. followed by a tone.
The system uses the following
commands to store and retrieve
phone numbers:
. Store
. Digit Store
. Directory
5. Say a name tag for the phone

. For vehicles with a 4. After the complete number has
number. The name tag is navigation system, the been entered, say “Store”. The
recorded and the system system responds with a system responds “Please say
responds “About to store tone. After the tone say the name tag”, followed by
<name tag>. Does that “Hands Free”. The system a tone.
sound OK?”. responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone. 5. Say a name tag for the phone
. If the name tag does not number. The name tag is
sound correct, say “No” 2. Say “Digit Store”. The system recorded and the system
and repeat Step 5. responds with “Please say the responds “About to store
first digit to store”, followed by <name tag>. Does that
. If the name tag sounds a tone.
correct, say “Yes” and the sound OK?”.
name tag is stored. After 3. Say the first digit to be stored. . If the name tag does not
the number is stored the The system will repeat back the sound correct, say “No” and
system returns to the digit it heard followed by a tone. repeat Step 5.
main menu. Continue entering digits until the
number to be stored is complete.
. If the name tag sounds
Using the Digit Store Command correct, say “Yes” and the
. If an unwanted number is name tag is stored. After
The digit store command allows a recognized by the system, the number is stored the
phone number to be stored by say “Clear” at any time to system returns to the
entering the digits individually. clear the last number. main menu.
1. Press b / g. . To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system,
say “Verify” at any time.
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone.
Using the Directory Command Deleting Name Tags 2. Say “Delete”. The system
The directory command lists all of responds “Delete, please say
The system uses the following
the name tags stored by the system. the name tag”, followed by
commands to delete name tags:
To use the directory command: a tone.
. Delete
3. Say the name tag to be deleted.
1. Press b / g. . Delete all name tags The system responds “Would
. For vehicles without a you like to delete, <name tag>?
Using the Delete Command
navigation system, the Please say yes or no”.
system responds “Ready”, The delete command is used to . If the name tag is correct,
followed by a tone. delete specific name tags.
say “Yes” to delete the
. For vehicles with a To delete name tags: name tag. The system
navigation system, the responds with “OK, deleting
system responds with a
1. Press b / g. <name tag>, returning to
tone. After the tone say . For vehicles without a the main menu.”
“Hands Free”. The system navigation system, the . If the name tag is incorrect,
responds “Ready”, followed system responds “Ready”, say “No”. The system
by a tone. followed by a tone. responds with “No. OK, let's
2. Say “Directory”. The system . For vehicles with a try again, please say the
responds “Directory” and lists all navigation system, the name tag.”
stored name tags. The system system responds with a
returns to the main menu when tone. After the tone say
the list is complete. “Hands Free”. The system
by a tone.
Using the Delete All Name Tags 2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The Using the Dial Command
Command system responds “You are about
to delete all name tags stored in 1. Press b / g.
The Delete All Name Tags
command deletes all stored phone your phone directory and your . For vehicles without a
book name tags and route name route destination directory. Are navigation system, the
tags for OnStar, if stored. you sure you want to do this? system responds “Ready”,
Please say yes or no.” followed by a tone.
To delete all name tags: . Say “Yes” to delete all . For vehicles with a
1. Press b/g. name tags. navigation system, the
. For vehicles without a . Say “No” to cancel the system responds with a
navigation system, the function and return to the tone. After the tone say
system responds “Ready”, main menu. “Hands Free”. The system
followed by a tone. responds “Ready”, followed
Making a Call by a tone.
Calls can be made using the 2. Say “Dial”. The system responds
following commands: “Dial using <phone name>.
tone. After the tone say . Dial “Number please”, followed by
“Hands Free”. The system a tone.
. Digit Dial
. Call
by a tone.
. Re‐dial
3. Say the entire number without Using the Digit Dial Command 3. Say the digits to be dialed one at
pausing. a time. The system repeats back
1. Press b / g. the digit it heard followed by
. If the system recognizes
the number, it responds
. For vehicles without a a tone.
with “OK, Dialing” and dials navigation system, the 4. Continue entering digits until the
the number. system responds “Ready”, number to be dialed is complete.
followed by a tone. After the whole number has
. If the system does not
recognize the number, it
. For vehicles with a been entered, say “Dial”. The
confirms the numbers navigation system, the system responds “OK, Dialing”
followed by a tone. If the system responds with a and dials the number.
number is correct, say tone. After the tone say . If an unwanted number is
“Yes”. The system responds “Hands Free”. The system recognized by the system,
“OK, Dialing” and dials the responds “Ready”, followed say “Clear” at any time to
number. If the number is by a tone. clear the last number.
not correct, say “No”. The 2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system . To hear all of the numbers
system will ask for the responds “Digit dial using recognized by the system,
number again. <phone name>, please say the say “Verify” at any time.
first digit to dial”, followed by
a tone.
Using the Call Command 3. Say the name tag of the person Using the Re‐dial Command
to call.
1. Press b / g. 1. Press b / g.
. If the system recognizes
. For vehicles without a the name tag it responds
navigation system, the “OK, calling, <name tag>” navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”, and dials the number. system responds “Ready”,
followed by a tone. followed by a tone.
. If the system does not
. For vehicles with a recognize the name tag, it
navigation system, the confirms the name tag navigation system, the
system responds with a followed by a tone. If the system responds with a
tone. After the tone say name tag is correct, say tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system “Yes”. The system responds “Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready”, followed with “OK, calling, <name responds with “Ready”,
by a tone. tag>” and dials the number. followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds If the name tag is not 2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial”. The
“Call using <phone name>. correct, say “No”. The system responds “Re‐dial using
Please say the name tag”, system will ask for the <phone name>” and dials the
followed by a tone. name tag again. last number called from the
Once connected, the person called connected Bluetooth phone.
will be heard through the audio Once connected, the person called
speakers. will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Receiving a Call Three‐Way Calling Muting a Call

When an incoming call is received, Three‐way calling must be During a call, all sounds from inside
the audio system mutes and a ring supported on the Bluetooth phone the vehicle can be muted so that the
tone is heard in the vehicle. and enabled by the wireless service person on the other end of the call
carrier. cannot hear them.
. Press b g to answer the call.
1. While on a call, press b g. The To Mute a call
. Press c / $ to ignore a call. system responds with “Ready”,
1. Press b g. The system
Call Waiting followed by a tone.
responds “Ready”, followed by
Call waiting must be supported on 2. Say “Three‐way call”. a tone.
the Bluetooth phone and enabled by The system responds with
“Three‐way call, please say dial 2. Say “Mute Call”. The system
the wireless service carrier. responds “Call muted”.
or call”.
. Press b g to answer an 3. Use the dial or call command to To Cancel Mute
incoming call when another call dial the number of the third party
is active. The original call is 1. Press b g. The system
to be called. responds “Ready”, followed by
placed on hold.
4. Once the call is connected, a tone.
. Press b g again to return to the press b g to link all the callers 2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”.
original call. together. The system responds
. To ignore the incoming call, no “Resuming call”.
action is required.
Ending a Call
. Press c / $ to disconnect the Press c / $ to end a call.
current call and switch to the call
on hold.
Transferring a Call For vehicles without a navigation To access contacts stored in the cell
system, press b g during a call phone:
Audio can be transferred between
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system and with the audio on the cell phone, the 1. Press b / g.
the cell phone. audio transfers to the vehicle.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell For vehicles with a navigation navigation system, the
Phone system, press b g during a call system responds “Ready”,
with the audio on the cell phone. followed by a tone.
During a call with the audio in the
If the audio does not transfer to the
vehicle: . For vehicles with a
vehicle, use the audio transfer
1. Press b g . The system feature on the cell phone. See the
responds “Ready”, followed by cell phone manufacturers user guide
for more information. tone. After the tone say
a tone. “Hands Free”. The system
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system Voice Pass-Thru responds “Ready”, followed
responds “Transferring call” and by a tone.
Voice pass‐thru allows access to the
the audio transfers to the cell 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
voice recognition commands on the
phone. responds “Bluetooth ready”,
cell phone. See the cell phone
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle manufacturers user guide to see if followed by a tone.
Bluetooth System the cell phone supports this feature. 3. Say “Voice”. The system
The cell phone must be paired responds “OK, accessing
and connected with the Bluetooth <phone name>”.
system before a call can be . The cell phone's normal
transferred. The connection process prompt messages will go
can take up to two minutes after the through its cycle according
ignition is turned to ON/RUN or to the phone's operating
ACC/ACCESSORY. instructions.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency

. If the system does not . If the system does not
(DTMF) Tones recognize the number, it recognize the name tag, it
responds “Dial Number, responds “Dial <name tag>,
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can please say yes or no?”, please say yes or no?”,
send numbers and the numbers followed by a tone. If the followed by a tone. If the
stored as name tags during a call. number is correct, say name tag is correct, say
Use this feature when calling a “Yes”. The system responds “Yes”. The system responds
menu driven phone system. Account “OK, Sending Number” and with “OK, Sending <name
numbers can also be stored for use. the dial tones are sent and tag>” and the dial tones are
Sending a Number During a Call the call continues. sent and the call continues.
Sending a Stored Name Tag Clearing the System
1. Press b g. The system
During a Call
responds “Ready”, followed by Unless information is deleted out of
a tone. 1. Press b g. The system the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it
responds “Ready”, followed by will be retained indefinitely. This
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds
a tone. includes all saved name tags in the
“Say a number to send tones”,
phone book and phone pairing
followed by a tone. 2. Say “Send name tag.” The information. For information on how
3. Say the number to send. system responds “Say a name to delete this information, see the
tag to send tones”, followed by previous sections on Deleting a
. If the system recognizes a tone.
the number, it responds Paired Phone and Deleting
“OK, Sending Number” and 3. Say the name tag to send. Name Tags.
the dial tones are sent and . If the system recognizes
the call continues. the number, it responds
“OK, Sending <name tag>”
and the dial tones are sent
and the call continues.
Bluetooth (Navigation) The pairing process can be started Pairing a Phone

by using the voice recognition 1. Press the CONFIG hard key
For information about how to system or the controls on the
navigate the menu system using repeatedly until the Phone menu
infotainment system. is shown or touch the Phone tab
the infotainment controls, see
“Overview” under Introduction, Pairing Information: on the screen.
in the Navigation supplement. . Up to five cell phones can be
Bluetooth Pairing
. The pairing process is disabled
To make calls with a Bluetooth cell when the vehicle is moving.
phone through your vehicle, it must
be paired to the vehicle's Bluetooth . The Bluetooth system
system first and then connected automatically links with the
to the vehicle before it can be paired cell phone in the order
used. Refer to the cell phone the phones are listed in the
manufacturer's user guide for device list.
Bluetooth pairing instructions. . Only one paired cell phone can
If a Bluetooth phone is off or not be connected to the vehicle's
connected, calls will automatically Bluetooth system at a time.
be made using the OnStar® 2. Select the Bluetooth submenu.
Hands‐Free Calling feature,
. Pairing should only need to be
if available. Refer to the OnStar completed once.
owner's guide for more information
about OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
5. The system responds with

“phone name has been
successfully paired” after the
pairing process is complete.
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
1. Press the CONFIG hard key
repeatedly until the Phone menu
is shown or touch the Phone tab
displayed on the screen.
3. Select “Add New Phone”, the On the cell phone, locate the
pairing process will begin device named “General Motors”.
searching for Bluetooth devices Follow the instructions given on
on your cellular phone. See the the cell phone or follow the voice
cell phone manufacturer's user prompts, to enter the four digit
guide for information on this PIN number that has been
process. provided.
4. The system voice prompt
requests that you say the name
you want used for the phone that
is being paired. Use a name that
best describes the phone. The
system voice prompt then 2. Select the Bluetooth submenu.
repeats the name you provided
for confirmation, say “Yes”.
Deleting a Paired Phone

on the screen.
3. Select the Device List submenu. A list of all previously paired phones
will be displayed. If there is a
currently paired phone, a check
mark will appear on the right side of
the Phone name.
2. Select the Bluetooth submenu.

3. Select the Device List submenu. 4. Select the phone to be deleted 5. Once a phone has been deleted,
and then follow the on screen the only way to connect back to
prompts to delete the device that phone is to pair the phone
from the system. again. See “Bluetooth Pairing”
earlier before the process is
started.
Connecting to a Phone in the

Device List
In order to connect to another
phone in the Device List, make sure
the phone you would like to connect
to is in the vehicle and available to
be connected to the Bluetooth
system before the process is
started.
3. Select the Device List submenu. 4. Select the phone to be paired
on the screen.
and then follow the on screen
prompts.
2. Select the Bluetooth submenu.

Making a Call
Press the 5 on the infotainment
system to access the Phone menu.
5. The Phone menu will be 2. Enter the desired phone number

displayed with the name of the by touching the appropriate
phone paired. buttons on the screen or using
the rotary knob.
Enter Number 3. Press the Call button to make
the call.
Use this option to enter a phone
number and make a call. To do this: Accepting or Declining an
1. Press the Enter Number Incoming Call
selection. A dial pad displays on When an incoming call is received,
the navigation screen. the infotainment system mutes any
audio being played and sounds a
ring tone.
Accepting a Call Call Waiting Conference Calling

Press b g on the steering wheel Call waiting must be supported on Conference and three-way calling
control to answer the incoming call the Bluetooth phone and enabled by must be supported on the Bluetooth
or touch the Answer option to the wireless service carrier to work. phone and enabled by the wireless
answer the call. service carrier to work.
Switching Calls (Only Available
with Call Waiting) To start a conference while in a
current call:
This features allows you to switch
between calls making one call 1. Press the 5 hard key on the
active and placing the other on hold. faceplate until the Phone main
screen is shown with the current
active call.
Declining a Call
Press c / $ on the steering wheel
controls or select the Decline option
to decline the call.
2. Select the “Enter Number”

option.
Ending a Call Mute or UnMute a Call

1. Press the 5 hard key.
2. Select the Mute call option to
mute the call.
3. Select the Mute call option again
to unmute the call.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) Tones
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can
3. Make another call. The first call send numbers during a call for
will be placed on hold while the “Dial 1 or 2”, for phone number
extensions, or voice mailboxes.
second call is dialing and 1. Press the 5 hard key.
connected. 1. Press the PHONE hard key.
2. Select Hang Up.
4. To make a conference call, 2. Select “Enter Number” option
select the “Merge” option which and enter the number sequence.
will merge both calls into one
conference call.
5. To add more callers to the
conference call, repeat
Steps 2 and 4. The amount of
callers that can be added are
limited by your wireless service
carrier.
2 NOTES
Climate Controls 7-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

The vehicle's heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation can be controlled
Climate Control Systems with this system.
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 7-1
Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
A. Fan Control 9 (Fan Control): Turn to increase

B. Air Delivery Mode Control or decrease the fan speed. Turn the
knob completely to T to turn the
C. Temperature Control fan off.
D. Outside Air Temperature Control: Turn to
E. Defrost increase or decrease the
F. Rear Window Defogger temperature.
G. Recirculation
H. Air Conditioning
7-2 Climate Controls
Air Delivery Mode Control: Air Conditioning Rear Window Defogger

To change the current mode, select
one of the following:
# (Air Conditioning): Press to < (Rear Defogger): Press to
turn the air conditioning on or off. turn the rear window defogger on or
F (Vent): Air is directed to the If the fan is turned off or the outside off. The rear window defogger turns
instrument panel outlets. temperature falls below freezing, the off after about 10 minutes. It can
* (Bi-Level): Air is directed to the air conditioning will not work. also be turned off by turning the
instrument panel outlets and the h (Recirculation): Press to turn ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY or
floor outlets. on the recirculation. An indicator LOCK/OFF. If turned on again, it
light comes on. Air is recirculated runs for about five minutes before
7 (Floor): Air is directed to the turning off.
floor outlets. inside the vehicle. It helps to quickly
cool the air inside the vehicle or Do not drive the vehicle until all the
W (Defog): Clears the windows of prevent outside air and odors from windows are clear.
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the entering.
windshield and floor outlets. Notice: Do not use a razor blade
% (Outside Air): Press to turn or sharp object to clear the inside
0 (Defrost): Clears the on the outside air. An indicator light rear window. Do not adhere
windshield of fog or frost more comes on. Outside air is circulated anything to the defogger grid
quickly. Air is directed to the throughout the vehicle. lines in the rear glass. These
windshield and side window outlets. actions may damage the rear
For best results, clear all snow and defogger. Repairs would not be
ice from the windshield before covered by your warranty.
defrosting.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
Automatic Climate Control System

The vehicle's heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation can be controlled
with this system.
Without Heated Seats
A. Fan Control F. Temperature Control

B. AUTO G. Power
C. Air Delivery Mode Control H. Air Conditioning
D. Defrost I. Rear Window Defogger
E. Recirculation J. Outside Air
Automatic Operation
The system automatically controls
the fan speed, air delivery, air
conditioning and recirculation to
heat or cool the vehicle to the
selected temperature.
When the AUTO indicator light is
on, the system is in full automatic
operation.
To place the system in
automatic mode:
With Heated Seats
1. Press AUTO.
A. Fan Control F. Temperature Control 2. Set the temperature. Allow the
B. AUTO G. Power system time to stabilize. Then
adjust the temperature as
C. Air Delivery Mode Control H. Driver and Passenger needed.
D. Defrost Heated Seats
E. Recirculation I. Rear Window Defogger

J. Air Conditioning
Manual Operation Select from the following: Air Conditioning

O (Power): Press to turn the F (Vent): Air is directed to the # (Air Conditioning): Press to
climate control system on or off. instrument panel outlets. turn the air conditioning on or off.
9 (Fan Control): Turn to increase * (Bi-Level): Air is directed to the If the fan is turned off or the outside
or decrease the fan speed. instrument panel outlets and the temperature falls below freezing, the
Adjusting the fan speed while in floor outlets. air conditioning will not work. When
automatic mode places the fan in AUTO, the air conditioning will
7 (Floor): Air is directed to the come on automatically as needed.
under manual control. The AUTO floor outlets.
indicator light turns off. The air h (Recirculation): Press to
delivery mode remains in automatic W (Defog): Clears the windows of turn on the recirculation. Press to
control. fog or moisture. Air is directed to the alternate between recirculation and
windshield and floor outlets. outside air, if the vehicle does not
Temperature Control: Turn
to increase or decrease the 0 (Defrost): Clears the have a separate outside air button.
temperature inside the vehicle. windshield of fog or frost more The indicator light turns on when
quickly. Air is directed to the recirculation is selected. Air is
H / G (Air Delivery Mode windshield and side window outlets.
Control): Press mode up or mode recirculated inside the vehicle.
Selecting defrost disables the It helps quickly cool the air inside
down to cycle through the different automatic mode.
air delivery modes. The current the vehicle or prevent outside air
mode is shown on the display. For best results, clear all snow and and odors from entering.
ice from the windshield before % (Outside Air, If Equipped):
defrosting. Press to turn on the outside air. An
Do not drive the vehicle until all the indicator light comes on. Outside air
windows are clear. is circulated throughout the vehicle.
Rear Window Defogger L / M (Driver and Passenger Air Vents

< (Rear Defogger): Press to Heated Seats): For vehicles with
heated seats, see Heated Front Use the air outlets, located in the
turn the rear window defogger on or center and on the side of the
off. The rear window defogger turns Seats on page 2‑8.
instrument panel, to direct the
off after about 10 minutes. It can Sensors airflow. Use the thumbwheels
also be turned off by turning the located near the center air outlets,
ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY or The solar sensor, located on top of
the instrument panel near the to open or close off the airflow.
LOCK/OFF. If turned on again, it
runs for about five minutes before windshield, monitors the solar heat. Operation Tips
turning off. The climate control system uses . Clear away any ice, snow,
Do not drive the vehicle until all the the information to adjust the or leaves from air inlets at the
windows are clear. temperature, fan speed, base of the windshield that could
recirculation, and air delivery mode. block the flow of air into the
Notice: Do not use a razor blade
Do not cover the solar sensor or the vehicle.
or sharp object to clear the inside
rear window. Do not adhere system will not work properly. . Keep the path under the front
anything to the defogger grid seats clear of objects to help
lines in the rear glass. These circulate the air inside of the
actions may damage the rear vehicle more effectively.
defogger. Repairs would not be . Use of non‐GM approved hood
covered by your warranty. deflectors can adversely affect
the performance of the system.
Check with your dealer/retailer
before adding equipment to the
outside of the vehicle.
Driving and Operating 8-1
Driving and Starting and Operating

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 8-28
Brakes
Antilock Brake
Operating Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retained Accessory
8-28 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-38
8-40
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Driving Information Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 8-30 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 8-41
Driving for Better Fuel Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . 8-31
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 Ride Control Systems
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Traction Control
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Parking Over Things System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Engine Exhaust Cruise Control
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Running the Vehicle While Object Detection Systems
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 8-46
Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . 8-19 Automatic Transmission Rear Vision
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 8-35 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 8-20 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37 Fuel
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . 8-37 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 8-23
Drive Systems Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 8-54
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38 Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 8-54
8-2 Driving and Operating
California Fuel
. Always follow posted speed
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
Driving Information limits or drive more slowly when
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 8-54 conditions require.
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55 Driving for Better Fuel . Keep vehicle tires properly
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56 Economy inflated.
Filling a Portable Fuel
Driving habits can affect fuel . Combine several trips into a
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
mileage. Here are some driving tips single trip.
Towing to get the best fuel economy
possible.
. Replace the vehicle's tires with
General Towing the same TPC Spec number
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57 . Avoid fast starts and accelerate molded into the tire's sidewall
Driving Characteristics and smoothly. near the size.
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61
. Brake gradually and avoid . Follow recommended scheduled
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63 abrupt stops. maintenance.
Trailer Sway . Avoid idling the engine for long
Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64 periods of time.
Conversions and Add-Ons . When road and weather
Add-On Electrical conditions are appropriate, use
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64 cruise control, if equipped.
Defensive Driving Drunk Driving Police records show that

almost 40 percent of all motor
Defensive driving means “always vehicle-related deaths involve
expect the unexpected.” The first { WARNING alcohol. In most cases, these
step in driving defensively is to wear deaths are the result of someone
your safety belt, see Safety Belts on Drinking and then driving is very
who was drinking and driving.
page 2‑10. dangerous. Your reflexes,
In recent years, more than
perceptions, attentiveness, and
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related
{ WARNING judgment can be affected by even
a small amount of alcohol. You
deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about
Assume that other road users can have a serious — or even 250,000 people injured.
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and other fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking. Do not drink and drive or For persons under 21, it is against
drivers) are going to be careless
ride with a driver who has been the law in every U.S. state to drink
and make mistakes. Anticipate alcohol. There are good medical,
what they might do and be ready. drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
psychological, and developmental
In addition: you are with a group, designate a
reasons for these laws.
.
driver who will not drink.
Allow enough following The obvious way to eliminate the
distance between you and Death and injury associated with leading highway safety problem is
the driver in front of you. drinking and driving is a global for people never to drink alcohol
. Focus on the task of driving. tragedy. and then drive.
Driver distraction can cause Alcohol affects four things that
collisions resulting in injury or anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
possible death. These simple judgment, muscular coordination,
defensive driving techniques vision, and attentiveness.
could save your life.
Medical research shows that Braking And, of course, actual stopping

alcohol in a person's system can distances vary greatly with the
make crash injuries worse, See Brake System Warning Light surface of the road, whether it is
especially injuries to the brain, on page 4‑21. pavement or gravel; the condition of
spinal cord, or heart. This means Braking action involves perception the road, whether it is wet, dry,
that when anyone who has been time and reaction time. Deciding to or icy; tire tread; the condition of the
drinking — driver or passenger — is push the brake pedal is perception brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
in a crash, that person's chance of time. Actually doing it is and the amount of brake force
being killed or permanently disabled reaction time. applied.
is higher than if the person had not Avoid needless heavy
been drinking. Average reaction time is about
three‐fourths of a second. But that is braking. Some people drive in
only an average. It might be less spurts — heavy acceleration
Control of a Vehicle with one driver and as long as two followed by heavy braking — rather
The following three systems or three seconds or more with than keeping pace with traffic. This
help to control the vehicle while another. Age, physical condition, is a mistake. The brakes might not
driving — brakes, steering, and alertness, coordination, and have time to cool between hard
accelerator. At times, as when eyesight all play a part. So do stops. The brakes will wear out
driving on snow or ice, it is easy to alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But much faster with a lot of heavy
ask more of those control systems even in three‐fourths of a second, braking. Keeping pace with the
than the tires and road can provide. a vehicle moving at 100 km/h traffic and allowing realistic following
Meaning, you can lose control of the (60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). That distances eliminates a lot of
vehicle. See StabiliTrak System on could be a lot of distance in an unnecessary braking. That means
page 8‑43. emergency, so keeping enough better braking and longer brake life.
space between the vehicle and
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer
others is important.
accessories can affect vehicle
performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 9‑3.
If the engine ever stops while the steering assist is lost because the Hydraulic Power Steering
vehicle is being driven, brake electric power steering system is not (3.0L V6 Engine)
normally but do not pump the functioning, the vehicle can be
brakes. If the brakes are pumped, steered but it will take more effort. If power steering assist is lost
the pedal could get harder to push because the engine stops or the
If you turn the steering wheel in power steering system is not
down. If the engine stops, there will either direction several times until it
still be some power brake assist but functioning, the vehicle can be
stops, or hold the steering wheel in steered but it will take more effort.
it will be used when the brake is the stopped position for an
applied. Once the power assist is extended amount of time, you may Steering Tips
used up, it can take longer to stop notice a reduced amount of power
and the brake pedal will be harder It is important to take curves at a
steering assist. The normal amount reasonable speed.
to push. of power steering assist should
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer return shortly after a few normal Traction in a curve depends on the
accessories can affect vehicle steering movements. condition of the tires and the road
performance. See Accessories and surface, the angle at which the
The electric power steering system curve is banked, and vehicle speed.
Modifications on page 9‑3. does not require regular While in a curve, speed is the one
maintenance. If you suspect factor that can be controlled.
Steering steering system problems, such
as abnormally high steering effort If there is a need to reduce speed,
Electric Power Steering do it before entering the curve, while
for a prolonged period of time,
(2.4L L4 Engine) contact your dealer/retailer for the front wheels are straight.
If the engine stalls while driving, the service repairs. Try to adjust the speed so you can
power steering assist system will drive through the curve. Maintain a
continue to operate until you are reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
able to stop the vehicle. If power accelerate until out of the curve, and
then accelerate gently into the
straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies Off-Road Recovery

There are times when steering can The vehicle's right wheels can drop
be more effective than braking. For off the edge of a road onto the
example, you come over a hill and shoulder while driving.
find a truck stopped in your lane,
or a car suddenly pulls out from
nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right
in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking — if you can
stop in time. But sometimes you
cannot stop in time because there is
no room. That is the time for An emergency like this requires
evasive action — steering around close attention and a quick decision.
the problem. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock
The vehicle can perform very well in positions, it can be turned a full
emergencies like these. First apply 180 degrees very quickly without
the brakes. See Braking on removing either hand. But you have If the level of the shoulder is only
page 8‑4. It is better to remove as to act fast, steer quickly, and just as slightly below the pavement,
much speed as possible from a quickly straighten the wheel once recovery should be fairly easy. Ease
collision. Then steer around the you have avoided the object. off the accelerator and then, if there
problem, to the left or right is nothing in the way, steer so that
depending on the space available. The fact that such emergency the vehicle straddles the edge of the
situations are always possible is a
good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety
belts properly.
pavement. Turn the steering wheel Skidding Of course, traction is reduced when
8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches), about water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
In a skid, a driver can lose control of
one-eighth turn, until the right front material is on the road. For safety,
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
tire contacts the pavement edge. slow down and adjust your driving to
most skids by taking reasonable
Then turn the steering wheel to go these conditions. It is important to
care suited to existing conditions,
straight down the roadway. slow down on slippery surfaces
and by not overdriving those
because stopping distance is longer
conditions. But skids are always
Loss of Control possible.
and vehicle control more limited.
Let us review what driving experts While driving on a surface with
The three types of skids correspond
say about what happens when the reduced traction, try your best to
to the vehicle's three control
three control systems — brakes, avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
systems. In the braking skid, the
steering, and acceleration — do not or braking, including reducing
wheels are not rolling. In the
have enough friction where the tires vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
steering or cornering skid, too much
meet the road to do what the driver gear. Any sudden changes could
speed or steering in a curve causes
has asked. cause the tires to slide. You might
tires to slip and lose cornering force.
not realize the surface is slippery
In any emergency, do not give up. And in the acceleration skid, too
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to
Keep trying to steer and constantly much throttle causes the driving
recognize warning clues — such as
seek an escape route or area of wheels to spin.
enough water, ice, or packed snow
less danger. If the vehicle starts to slide, ease on the road to make a mirrored
your foot off the accelerator pedal surface — and slow down when you
and quickly steer the way you want have any doubt.
the vehicle to go. If you start
Remember: Antilock brakes help
steering quickly enough, the vehicle
avoid only the braking skid.
may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Off-Road Driving the very time you need special Before You Go Off-Roading
alertness and driving skills, your
Vehicles with all‐wheel drive can be . Have all necessary maintenance
reflexes, perceptions, and judgment
used for off‐road driving. Vehicles and service work done.
can be affected by even a small
without all‐wheel drive should not be amount of alcohol. You could have a . Make sure there is enough fuel,
driven off-road except on a level, serious — or even fatal — accident that fluid levels are where they
solid surface. if you drink and drive or ride with a should be, and that the spare
Many of the vehicle design features driver who has been drinking. tire is fully inflated.
that help make the vehicle more Off-roading can be great fun but has . Be sure to read all the
responsive on paved roads during some definite hazards. The greatest information about all-wheel-drive
poor weather conditions also help of these is the terrain itself. When vehicles in this manual.
make it better suited for off‐road use off-road driving, traffic lanes are not
than conventional passenger
. Make sure all underbody
marked, curves are not banked, and shields, if the vehicle has them,
vehicles. The vehicle does not have there are no road signs. Surfaces
features usually thought to be are properly attached.
can be slippery, rough, uphill,
necessary for extended or severe or downhill. . Know the local laws that apply to
off‐road use such as special off-roading where you will be
underbody shielding and transfer Avoid sharp turns and abrupt driving or check with law
case low gear range. maneuvers. Failure to operate the enforcement people in the area.
vehicle correctly off‐road could
The airbag system is designed to result in loss of vehicle control or . Be sure to get the necessary
work properly under a wide range of vehicle rollover. permission if you will be on
conditions, including off‐road usage. private land.
Always wear your safety belt and Off-roading involves some new
observe safe driving speeds, skills. That is why it is very
especially on rough terrain. important that you read these
driving tips and suggestions to help
Drinking and driving can be very make off-road driving safer and
dangerous on any road and this is more enjoyable.
certainly true for off-road driving. At
Loading Your Vehicle for There are some important things to

Off-Road Driving WARNING (Continued) remember about how to load your
vehicle.
. Heavy loads on the roof raise
{ WARNING the vehicle's center of gravity,
. The heaviest things should be
on the floor, forward of the rear
. Cargo on the load floor piled making it more likely to roll axle. Put heavier items as far
higher than the seatbacks over. You can be seriously or forward as you can.
can be thrown forward during fatally injured if the vehicle
a sudden stop. You or your rolls over. Put heavy loads
. Be sure the load is properly
passengers could be injured. inside the cargo area, not on secured, so things are not
Keep cargo below the top of the roof. Keep cargo in the tossed around.
the seatbacks. cargo area as far forward and You will find other important
. Unsecured cargo on the load low as possible. information under Vehicle Load
floor can be tossed about Limits on page 8‑24 and Tires on
when driving over rough page 9‑43.
terrain. You or your
passengers can be struck by
flying objects. Secure the
cargo properly.
(Continued)
Environmental Concerns
. Always carry a litter bag and For vehicles with a winch, be sure to
make sure all refuse is removed read the winch instructions. In a
Off-road driving can provide from any campsite before remote area, a winch can be handy
wholesome and satisfying leaving. if you get stuck but you will want to
recreation. However, it also raises . Take extreme care with open know how to use it properly.
environmental concerns. We
recognize these concerns and urge fires (where permitted), camp Getting Familiar with Off-Road
every off-roader to follow these stoves, and lanterns.
Driving
basic rules for protecting the . Never park your vehicle over dry
environment: grass or other combustible It is a good idea to practice in an
materials that could catch fire area that is safe and close to home
. Always use established trails, before you go into the wilderness.
roads, and areas that have been from the heat of the vehicle's
exhaust system. Off-roading requires some new and
specially set aside for public different skills.
off-road recreational driving and Traveling to Remote Areas
obey all posted regulations. Tune your senses to different kinds
It makes sense to plan your trip, of signals. Your eyes need to
. Avoid any driving practice that especially when going to a remote constantly sweep the terrain for
could damage shrubs, flowers, area. Know the terrain and plan unexpected obstacles. Your ears
trees, or grasses or disturb your route. Get accurate maps of need to listen for unusual tire or
wildlife. This includes trails and terrain. Check to see if engine sounds. Use your arms,
wheel-spinning, breaking down there are any blocked or closed hands, feet, and body to respond to
trees, or unnecessary driving roads. vibrations and vehicle bounce.
through streams or over soft
ground. It is also a good idea to travel with
at least one other vehicle in case
something happens to one of them.
Controlling the vehicle is the key to Surface Conditions: Off-roading

successful off-road driving. One of { WARNING surfaces can be hard-packed dirt,
the best ways to control the vehicle gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud,
is to control the speed. At higher When you are driving off-road, snow, or ice. Each of these surfaces
speeds: bouncing and quick changes in affects the vehicle's steering,
direction can easily throw you acceleration, and braking in different
. You approach things faster and out of position. This could cause
have less time to react. ways. Depending on the surface,
you to lose control and crash. slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
. There is less time to scan the So, whether you are driving delayed acceleration, poor traction,
terrain for obstacles. on or off the road, you and your and longer braking distances can
. The vehicle has more bounce passengers should wear safety occur.
when driving over obstacles. belts. Surface Obstacles: Unseen or
. More braking distance is hidden obstacles can be hazardous.
Scanning the Terrain A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can
needed, especially on an
unpaved surface. Off-road driving can take you over startle you if you are not prepared
many different kinds of terrain. Be for them. Often these obstacles are
familiar with the terrain and its many hidden by grass, bushes, snow,
different features. or even the rise and fall of the
terrain itself.
Some things to consider: Off-roading requires a different kind

of alertness from driving on paved WARNING (Continued)
. Is the path ahead clear?
roads and highways. There are no
. Will the surface texture change road signs, posted speed limits, them, you will roll over. You could
abruptly up ahead? or signal lights. Use good judgment be seriously injured or killed.
. Does the travel take you uphill or about what is safe and what is not. If you have any doubt about the
downhill? steepness, do not drive the hill.
Driving on Hills
. Will you have to stop suddenly Off-road driving often takes you up, Approaching a Hill
or change direction quickly? down, or across a hill. Driving safely When you approach a hill, decide if
When driving over obstacles or on hills requires good judgment and it is too steep to climb, descend,
rough terrain, keep a firm grip on an understanding of what the or cross. Steepness can be hard to
the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, vehicle can and cannot do. There judge. On a very small hill, for
or other surface features can jerk are some hills that simply cannot be example, there may be a smooth,
the wheel out of your hands. driven, no matter how well built the constant incline with only a small
vehicle. change in elevation where you can
When driving over bumps, rocks,
or other obstacles, the wheels can easily see all the way to the top. On
leave the ground. If this happens, { WARNING a large hill, the incline may get
even with one or two wheels, you steeper as you near the top, but you
cannot control the vehicle as well or Many hills are simply too steep might not see this because the crest
at all. for any vehicle. If you drive up of the hill is hidden by bushes,
them, you will stall. If you drive grass, or shrubs.
Because you will be on an unpaved down them, you cannot control
surface, it is especially important to your speed. If you drive across
avoid sudden acceleration, sudden
turns, or sudden braking. (Continued)
Consider this as you approach a hill: Driving Uphill

. Ease up on the speed as you
approach the top of the hill.
. Is there a constant incline, Once you decide it is safe to drive . Attach a flag to the vehicle to be
or does the hill get sharply up the hill:
steeper in places? more visible to approaching
. Use a low gear and get a firm traffic on trails or hills.
. Is there good traction on the grip on the steering wheel.
hillside, or will the surface cause
. Sound the horn as you approach
. Get a smooth start up the hill the top of the hill to let opposing
tire slipping?
and try to maintain speed. Not traffic know you are there.
. Is there a straight path up or using more power than needed
down the hill so you will not can avoid spinning the wheels or
. Use headlamps even during the
have to make turning sliding. day to make the vehicle more
maneuvers? visible to oncoming traffic.
. Are there obstructions on the hill { WARNING { WARNING
that can block your path, such
as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts? Turning or driving across steep
hills can be dangerous. You could Driving to the top (crest) of a hill
. What is beyond the hill? Is there lose traction, slide sideways, and at full speed can cause an
a cliff, an embankment, a accident. There could be a
possibly roll over. You could be
drop-off, a fence? Get out and drop-off, embankment, cliff,
seriously injured or killed. When
walk the hill if you do not know. or even another vehicle. You
It is the smart way to find out. driving up hills, always try to go
straight up. could be seriously injured or
. Is the hill simply too rough? killed. As you near the top of a
Steep hills often have ruts, . Try to drive straight up the hill if hill, slow down and stay alert.
gullies, troughs, and exposed at all possible. If the path twists
rocks because they are more and turns, you might want to find
susceptible to the effects of another route.
erosion.
If the vehicle stalls, or is about to

. While backing down the hill, put . Never try to turn around if about
stall, and you cannot make it up your left hand on the steering to stall when going up a hill.
the hill: wheel at the 12 o'clock position If the hill is steep enough to stall
so you can tell if the wheels are the vehicle, it is steep enough to
. Push the brake pedal to stop the straight and can maneuver as cause it to roll over. If you
vehicle and keep it from rolling you back down. It is best to back cannot make it up the hill, back
backwards and apply the down the hill with the wheels straight down the hill.
parking brake. straight rather than in the left or If, after stalling, you try to back
. If the engine is still running, shift right direction. Turning the wheel down the hill and decide you just
the transmission to R (Reverse), too far to the left or right will cannot do it, set the parking brake,
release the parking brake, and increase the possibility of a put your transmission in P (Park),
slowly back down the hill in rollover. and turn off the engine. Leave the
R (Reverse). Things not to do if the vehicle stalls, vehicle and go get some help. Exit
. If the engine has stopped or is about to stall, when going up on the uphill side and stay clear of
running, you need to restart it. a hill: the path the vehicle would take if it
With the brake pedal pressed . Never attempt to prevent a stall rolled downhill.
and the parking brake still by shifting into N (Neutral) to
applied, shift the transmission to rev-up the engine and regain
P (Park) and restart the engine. forward momentum. This will not
Then, shift to R (Reverse), work. The vehicle can roll
release the parking brake, and backward very quickly and could
slowly back down the hill as go out of control.
straight as possible in
R (Reverse).
Driving Downhill Vehicles are much more likely to

When off-roading takes you
{ WARNING stall when going uphill, but if it
happens when going downhill:
downhill, consider: Heavy braking when going down
a hill can cause your brakes to 1. Stop the vehicle by applying the
. How steep is the downhill? Will I
overheat and fade. This could regular brakes and apply the
be able to maintain vehicle
cause loss of control and a parking brake.
control?
.
serious accident. Apply the 2. Shift to P (Park) and, while still
What is the surface like?
brakes lightly when descending a braking, restart the engine.
Smooth? Rough? Slippery?
hill and use a low gear to keep 3. Shift back to a low gear, release
Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
vehicle speed under control. the parking brake, and drive
. Are there hidden surface
straight down.
obstacles? Ruts? Logs? Things not to do when driving down
Boulders? a hill: 4. If the engine will not start, get
out and get help.
. What is at the bottom of the hill? . When driving downhill, avoid
Is there a hidden creek bank or turns that take you across the
even a river bottom with large incline of the hill. A hill that is not
rocks? too steep to drive down might be
If you decide you can go down a hill too steep to drive across. The
safely, try to keep the vehicle vehicle could roll over.
headed straight down. Use a low . Never go downhill with the
gear so engine drag can help the transmission in N (Neutral),
brakes so they do not have to do all called free-wheeling. The brakes
the work. Descend slowly, keeping will have to do all the work and
the vehicle under control at all could overheat and fade.
times.
Driving Across an Incline across an incline, the narrower For these reasons, carefully
track width — the distance consider whether to try to drive
An off-road trail will probably go
between the left and right across an incline. Just because the
across the incline of a hill. To decide
wheels — might not prevent the trail goes across the incline does
whether to try to drive across the
vehicle from tilting and rolling not mean you have to drive it. The
incline, consider the following:
over. Driving across an incline last vehicle to try it might have
puts more weight on the downhill rolled over.
{ WARNING wheels which could cause a If you feel the vehicle starting to
downhill slide or a rollover. slide sideways, turn downhill. This
Driving across an incline that is
too steep will make your vehicle
. Surface conditions can be a should help straighten out the
roll over. You could be seriously problem. Loose gravel, muddy vehicle and prevent the side
injured or killed. If you have any spots, or even wet grass can slipping. The best way to prevent
doubt about the steepness of the cause the tires to slip sideways, this is to “walk the course” first, so
incline, do not drive across it. downhill. If the vehicle slips you know what the surface is like
sideways, it can hit something before driving it.
Find another route instead.
that will trip it — a rock, a rut,
. A hill that can be driven straight etc. — and roll over.
up or down might be too steep . Hidden obstacles can make the
to drive across. When going steepness of the incline even
straight up or down a hill, the worse. If you drive across a rock
length of the wheel base — the with the uphill wheels, or if the
distance from the front wheels to downhill wheels drop into a rut
the rear wheels — reduces the or depression, the vehicle can tilt
likelihood the vehicle will tumble even more.
end over end. But when driving
Stalling on an Incline Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, Hard packed snow and ice offer
or Ice the worst tire traction. On these
{ WARNING When you drive in mud, snow,
surfaces, it is very easy to lose
control. On wet ice, for example, the
or sand, the wheels do not get good traction is so poor that you will have
Getting out on the downhill (low) traction. Acceleration is not as
side of a vehicle stopped across difficulty accelerating. And, if the
quick, turning is more difficult, and vehicle does get moving, poor
an incline is dangerous. If the braking distances are longer.
vehicle rolls over, you could be steering and difficult braking can
crushed or killed. Always get out It is best to use a low gear when in cause it to slide out of control.
on the uphill (high) side of the mud — the deeper the mud, the
vehicle and stay well clear of the lower the gear. In really deep mud,
keep the vehicle moving so it does
{ WARNING
rollover path.
not get stuck. Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,
If the vehicle stalls when crossing When driving on sand, wheel or rivers can be dangerous.
an incline, be sure you, and any traction changes. On loosely packed Underwater springs, currents
passengers, get out on the uphill sand, such as on beaches or sand under the ice, or sudden thaws
side, even if the door there is harder dunes, the tires will tend to sink into can weaken the ice. Your vehicle
to open. If you get out on the the sand. This affects steering, could fall through the ice and you
downhill side and the vehicle starts accelerating, and braking. Drive at a and your passengers could
to roll over, you will be right in reduced speed and avoid sharp drown. Drive your vehicle on safe
its path. turns or abrupt maneuvers. surfaces only.
If you have to walk down the slope,
stay out of the path the vehicle will
take if it does roll over.
Driving in Water Find out how deep the water is After Off-Road Driving
before driving through it. Do not
Remove any brush or debris that
{ WARNING try it if it is deep enough to cover
the wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust
has collected on the underbody,
chassis, or under the hood. These
Driving through rushing water can pipe — you probably will not get
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
be dangerous. Deep water can through. Deep water can damage
sweep your vehicle downstream the axle and other vehicle parts. After operation in mud or sand,
and you and your passengers have the brake linings cleaned and
If the water is not too deep, drive
could drown. If it is only shallow checked. These substances can
slowly through it. At faster speeds,
cause glazing and uneven braking.
water, it can still wash away the water splashes on the ignition
Check the body structure, steering,
ground from under your tires, and system and the vehicle can stall.
suspension, wheels, tires, axles,
you could lose traction and roll Stalling can also occur if you get the
and exhaust system for damage and
the vehicle over. Do not drive tailpipe under water. If the tailpipe is
check the fuel lines and cooling
through rushing water. under water, you will never be able
system for any leakage.
to start the engine. When going
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, through water, remember that when The vehicle requires more frequent
and flood waters demand extreme the brakes get wet, it might take service due to off-road use. Refer to
caution. longer to stop. See Driving on Wet the Maintenance Schedule for
Roads on page 8‑19. additional information.
Driving on Wet Roads WARNING (Continued)

Hydroplaning
Rain and wet roads can reduce Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
vehicle traction and affect your After driving through a large can build up under your vehicle's
ability to stop and accelerate. puddle of water or a car/vehicle tires so they actually ride on the
Always drive slower in these types water. This can happen if the road is
wash, lightly apply the brake
of driving conditions and avoid wet enough and you are going fast
pedal until the brakes work
driving through large puddles and enough. When your vehicle is
normally. hydroplaning, it has little or no
deep‐standing or flowing water.
Flowing or rushing water creates contact with the road.
{ WARNING strong forces. Driving through
flowing water could cause your
There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
Wet brakes can cause crashes. vehicle to be carried away. If this slow down when the road is wet.
They might not work as well in a happens, you and other vehicle
quick stop and could cause occupants could drown. Do not
pulling to one side. You could ignore police warnings and be
lose control of the vehicle. very cautious about trying to drive
(Continued) through flowing water.
Other Rainy Weather Tips Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads
Besides slowing down, other wet Always be alert and pay attention to Driving on steep hills or through
weather driving tips include: your surroundings while driving. mountains is different than driving
. Allow extra following distance. If you become tired or sleepy, find a on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
safe place to park your vehicle driving in these conditions include:
. Pass with caution. and rest. . Keep the vehicle serviced and in
. Keep windshield wiping Other driving tips include: good shape.
equipment in good shape.
. Keep the vehicle well ventilated. . Check all fluid levels and brakes,
. Keep the windshield washer fluid tires, cooling system, and
reservoir filled.
. Keep interior temperature cool.
transmission.
. Have good tires with proper
. Keep your eyes moving — scan .
the road ahead and to the sides. Going down steep or long hills,
tread depth. See Tires on shift to a lower gear.
page 9‑43. . Check the rearview mirror and
. Turn off cruise control. vehicle instruments often.
{ WARNING
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
Winter Driving The Antilock Brake System (ABS)

{ WARNING on page 8‑38 improves vehicle
Driving on Snow or Ice stability during hard stops on
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) slippery roads, but apply the brakes
or with the ignition off is Drive carefully when there is snow
or ice between the tires and the sooner than when on dry pavement.
dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down road, creating less traction or grip. Allow greater following distance on
and they could get so hot that Wet ice can occur at about 0°C any slippery road and watch for
(32°F) when freezing rain begins to slippery spots. Icy patches can
they would not work well. You
fall, resulting in even less traction. occur on otherwise clear roads in
would then have poor braking or
Avoid driving on wet ice or in shaded areas. The surface of a
even none going down a hill. You freezing rain until roads can be curve or an overpass can remain icy
could crash. Always have the treated with salt or sand. when the surrounding roads are
engine running and the vehicle in clear. Avoid sudden steering
gear when going downhill. Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so maneuvers and braking while
traction is not lost. Accelerating too on ice.
. Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the quickly causes the wheels to spin Turn off cruise control, if equipped,
center of the road. Drive at and makes the surface under the on slippery surfaces.
speeds that let you stay in your tires slick, so there is even less
own lane. traction.
. Top of hills: Be Try not to break the fragile traction.
alert — something could be in If you accelerate too fast, the drive
your lane (stalled car, accident). wheels will spin and polish the
surface under the tires even more.
. Pay attention to special road
signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
Blizzard Conditions
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be in a
serious situation. Stay with the If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about
vehicle unless there is help nearby. carbon monoxide, see Engine
. Clear away snow from around
If possible, use the Roadside Exhaust on page 8‑34.
the base of your vehicle,
Assistance Program on page 12‑6.
especially any that is blocking Snow can trap exhaust gases
To get help and keep everyone in
the exhaust pipe. under your vehicle. This can
the vehicle safe:
. Check again from time to cause deadly CO (carbon
. Turn on the hazard warning monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
time to be sure snow does
flashers. could overcome you and kill you.
not collect there.
. Tie a red cloth to an outside You cannot see it or smell it, so
. Open a window about 5 cm
mirror. you might not know it is in your
(two inches) on the side of
the vehicle that is away from vehicle. Clear away snow from
{ WARNING the wind to bring in fresh air. around the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking the
Snow can trap engine exhaust . Fully open the air outlets on exhaust.
under the vehicle. This may or under the instrument
cause exhaust gases to get panel. Run the engine for short periods
inside. Engine exhaust contains . Adjust the Climate Control only as needed to keep warm, but
carbon monoxide (CO) which system to a setting that be careful.
cannot be seen or smelled. It can circulates the air inside the
cause unconsciousness and even vehicle and set the fan speed
death. to the highest setting. See
(Continued) Climate Control System in the
Index.
(Continued)
To save fuel, run the engine for only If the Vehicle is Stuck Rocking the Vehicle to Get
short periods as needed to warm it Out
the vehicle and then shut the engine Slowly and cautiously spin the
off and close the window most of wheels to free the vehicle when Turn the steering wheel left and
the way to save heat. Repeat this stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. right to clear the area around the
until help arrives but only when you front wheels. Turn off any traction
If stuck too severely for the traction
feel really uncomfortable from the system. Shift back and forth
system to free the vehicle, turn the
cold. Moving about to keep warm between R (Reverse) and a forward
traction system off and use the
also helps. gear, spinning the wheels as little as
rocking method.
possible. To prevent transmission
If it takes some time for help to wear, wait until the wheels stop
arrive, now and then when you run { WARNING spinning before shifting gears.
the engine, push the accelerator Release the accelerator pedal while
pedal slightly so the engine runs If the vehicle's tires spin at high shifting, and press lightly on the
faster than the idle speed. This speed, they can explode, and you accelerator pedal when the
keeps the battery charged to restart or others could be injured. The transmission is in gear. Slowly
the vehicle and to signal for help vehicle can overheat, causing an spinning the wheels in the forward
with the headlamps. Do this as little engine compartment fire or other and reverse directions causes a
as possible to save fuel. damage. Spin the wheels as little rocking motion that could free the
as possible and avoid going vehicle. If that does not get the
above 55 km/h (35 mph) as vehicle out after a few tries, it might
shown on the speedometer. need to be towed out. If the vehicle
does need to be towed out, see
For information about using tire Towing the Vehicle on page 9‑78.
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
Chains on page 9‑64.
Vehicle Load Limits WARNING (Continued)

pillar (B-pillar). With the driver's
door open, you will find the label
It is very important to know how attached near the door lock
much weight the vehicle can the way the vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose post. The Tire and Loading
carry. This weight is called the Information label shows the
vehicle capacity weight and control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the number of occupant seating
includes the weight of all positions (A), and the maximum
occupants, cargo and all life of the vehicle.
vehicle capacity weight (B) in
nonfactory‐installed options. kilograms and pounds.
Two labels on the vehicle show Tire and Loading Information
how much weight it may Label The Tire and Loading
properly carry, the Tire and Information label also shows the
Loading Information label and tire size of the original
the Certification label. equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation
{ WARNING pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation
Do not load the vehicle any see Tires on page 9‑43 and Tire
heavier than the Gross Pressure on page 9‑50 .
Vehicle Weight Rating There is also important loading
(GVWR), or either the information on the Certification
maximum front or rear Gross label. It tells you the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Label Example Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
If you do, parts on the vehicle and the Gross Axle Weight
can break, and it can change A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
(Continued)
attached to the vehicle's center
Rating (GAWR) for the front and there will be five 150 lb
rear axle. See “Certification passengers in your vehicle,
Label” later in this section. the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity
Steps for Determining Correct
is 650 lbs (1400 − 750
Load Limit
(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
1. Locate the statement “The
5. Determine the combined
combined weight of
weight of luggage and cargo
occupants and cargo should
being loaded on the vehicle.
never exceed XXX kg or
That weight may not safely
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
exceed the available cargo
placard. Example 1
and luggage load capacity
2. Determine the combined calculated in Step 4. A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
weight of the driver and Example 1 = 453 kg
6. If your vehicle will be towing
passengers that will be riding (1,000 lbs).
a trailer, the load from your
in your vehicle.
trailer will be transferred to B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
3. Subtract the combined your vehicle. Consult this 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg
weight of the driver and manual to determine how this (300 lbs).
passengers from XXX kg or reduces the available cargo
XXX lbs. C. Available Occupant and
and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle. Cargo Weight = 317 kg
4. The resulting figure equals (700 lbs).
the available amount of cargo See Trailer Towing on page 8‑61
and luggage load capacity. for important information on
For example, if the “XXX” towing a trailer, towing safety
amount equals 1400 lbs and rules and trailering tips.
seating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 2 Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = 453 kg Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg Label Example
(750 lbs). (1,000 lbs). A vehicle specific Certification
C. Available Cargo Weight = C. Available Cargo Weight = label is attached to the lower
113 kg (250 lbs). 0 kg (0 lbs). center pillar on the driver side of
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and the vehicle or on the rear edge
Loading Information label for of the driver door. The label tells
specific information about the the gross weight capacity of the
vehicle's capacity weight and vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The
GVWR includes the weight of

the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
and cargo. Never exceed the These could cause you to lose . Never stack heavier
GVWR for the vehicle, or the control and crash. Also, things, like suitcases,
Gross Axle Weight Rating overloading can shorten the inside the vehicle so that
(GAWR) for either the front or life of the vehicle. some of them are above
rear axle. the tops of the seats.
If the vehicle is carrying a heavy . Do not leave an
load, it should be spread out. { WARNING unsecured child restraint
See “Steps for Determining in the vehicle.
Correct Load Limit” earlier in this Things you put inside the
section. vehicle can strike and injure . When you carry something
people in a sudden stop or inside the vehicle, secure
turn, or in a crash.
{ WARNING it whenever you can.
. Put things in the cargo . Do not leave a seat folded
Do not load the vehicle any area of the vehicle. In the down unless you need to.
heavier than the Gross cargo area, put them as
Vehicle Weight Rating far forward as you can.
(GVWR), or either the Try to spread the weight
maximum front or rear Gross evenly.
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). (Continued)
If you do, parts on the vehicle
can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles.
(Continued)
Starting and can be used. Vehicle speeds Ignition Positions

above 110 km/h (68 mph)
Operating should be limited to
five minutes per use.
New Vehicle Break-In . Avoid making hard stops for
Notice: The vehicle does not the first 322 km (200 miles) or
need an elaborate break-in. But it so. During this time the new
will perform better in the long run brake linings are not yet
if you follow these guidelines: broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
. Do not drive at any one premature wear and earlier
constant speed, fast or slow, replacement. Follow this
for the first 805 km breaking-in guideline every
(500 miles). Do not make time you get new brake
full-throttle starts. Avoid linings. The ignition switch has four different
downshifting to brake or
. Do not tow a trailer during positions.
slow the vehicle.
break-in. See Driving Notice: Using a tool to force the
. During the first 1 000 km Characteristics and Towing key to turn in the ignition could
(600 miles), avoid using more Tips on page 8‑58 for the cause damage to the switch or
than moderate acceleration trailer towing capabilities of break the key. Use the correct
in lower gears and avoid your vehicle and more key, make sure it is all the way in,
vehicle speeds above information. and turn it only with your hand.
110 km/h (68 mph).
Following break‐in, engine speed If the key cannot be turned by
. Between the first 1 000 km and load can be gradually hand, see your dealer/retailer.
(600 miles) and 5 000 km increased. To shift out of P (Park), turn the
(3,000 miles), heavy
ignition to ON/RUN and apply the
acceleration in lower gears
brake pedal.
A (LOCK/OFF): This is the only C (ON/RUN): The ignition switch Retained Accessory
position from which the key can be stays in this position when the
removed. This locks the steering engine is running. This position can
Power (RAP)
wheel, ignition and automatic be used to operate the electrical These vehicle accessories can be
transmission. accessories, including the used for up to 10 minutes after the
On vehicles with an automatic ventilation fan and 12 volt power engine is turned off:
transmission, the shift lever must be outlet, as well as to display some . Audio System
in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch warning and indicator lights.
. Power Windows
to the LOCK/OFF position. The battery could be drained if the
. Sunroof (if equipped)
The ignition switch can bind in the key is left in the ACC/ACCESSORY
LOCK/OFF position with the wheels or ON/RUN position with the engine Power to the audio system will
turned off center. If this happens, off. The vehicle might not start if the continue to operate for up to
move the steering wheel from right battery is allowed to drain for an 10 minutes or until the driver door is
to left while turning the key to ACC/ extended period of time. opened.
ACCESSORY. If this does not work, D (START): This position starts the Power to the power windows and
then the vehicle needs service. engine. When the engine starts, sunroof will continue to operate for
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This release the key. The ignition switch up to 10 minutes or until any door is
position provides power to some of will return to ON/RUN for normal opened.
the electrical accessories. It unlocks driving.
All these features will work when the
the steering wheel and ignition. The A warning tone sounds when the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/
transmission is also unlocked in this driver door is opened if the ignition ACCESSORY.
position on automatic transmission is still in ACC/ACCESSORY and the
vehicles. To move the key from key is in the ignition.
ACC/ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF,
push in the key and then turn it to
LOCK/OFF.
Starting the Engine The vehicle has a Notice: Cranking the engine for
Computer-Controlled Cranking long periods of time, by returning
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or System. This feature assists in the key to the START position
N (Neutral). The engine will not start starting the engine and protects immediately after cranking has
in any other position. To restart the components. If the ignition key is ended, can overheat and damage
vehicle when it is already moving, turned to the START position, the cranking motor, and drain the
use N (Neutral) only. and then released when the battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
Notice: Do not try to shift to engine begins cranking, the between each try, to let the
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. engine will continue cranking for cranking motor cool down.
If you do, you could damage the a few seconds or until the 2. If the engine does not start after
transmission. Shift to P (Park) vehicle starts. If the engine does 5 to 10 seconds, especially in
only when the vehicle is stopped. not start and the key is held in very cold weather (below −18°C
START for many seconds, or 0°F), it could be flooded with
Starting Procedure cranking will be stopped after too much gasoline. Push the
1. With your foot off the accelerator 15 seconds to prevent cranking accelerator pedal all the way to
pedal, turn the ignition key to motor damage. To prevent gear the floor and holding it there as
START. When the engine starts, damage, this system also you hold the key in START for a
let go of the key. The idle speed prevents cranking if the engine maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at
will go down as the engine is already running. Engine least 15 seconds between each
warms. Do not race the engine cranking can be stopped by try, to allow the cranking motor
immediately after starting it. turning the ignition switch to to cool. When the engine starts,
Operate the engine and ACC/ACCESSORY or let go of the key and accelerator.
transmission gently to allow the LOCK/OFF.
oil to warm up and lubricate all
moving parts.
If the vehicle starts briefly but Engine Coolant Heater

then stops again, repeat the { WARNING
procedure. This clears the extra The engine coolant heater,
gasoline from the engine. Do not if available, can help in cold weather Plugging the cord into an
race the engine immediately conditions at or below −18°C (0°F) ungrounded outlet could cause an
after starting it. Operate the for easier starting and better fuel electrical shock. Also, the wrong
engine and transmission gently economy during engine warm-up. kind of extension cord could
until the oil warms up and Plug in the coolant heater at least overheat and cause a fire. You
lubricates all moving parts. four hours before starting the could be seriously injured. Plug
vehicle. An internal thermostat in the cord into a properly grounded
Notice: The engine is designed to the plug-end of the cord will prevent three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
work with the electronics in the engine coolant heater operation at
vehicle. If you add electrical parts If the cord will not reach, use a
temperatures above −18°C (0°F). heavy-duty three-prong extension
or accessories, you could change
the way the engine operates. To Use The Engine Coolant cord rated for at least 15 amps.
Before adding electrical Heater
equipment, check with your 4. Before starting the engine, be
1. Turn off the engine. sure to unplug and store the
dealer/retailer. If you do not, the
engine might not perform 2. Open the hood and unwrap the cord as it was before to keep it
properly. Any resulting damage electrical cord. away from moving engine parts.
would not be covered by the If you do not it could be
The electrical cord is located on damaged.
vehicle warranty. the passenger side of the engine
compartment, in front of the air The length of time the heater should
cleaner. remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded in the area where you will be
110-volt AC outlet. parking the vehicle for the best
advice on this.
Shifting Into Park Use this procedure to shift into Leaving the Vehicle With the
P (Park): Engine Running
{ WARNING 1. Hold the brake pedal down and
set the parking brake. { WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out of
See Parking Brake on It can be dangerous to leave the
the vehicle if the shift lever is not page 8‑40 for more information.
fully in P (Park) with the parking vehicle with the engine running.
brake firmly set. The vehicle can 2. Hold the button on the shift lever The vehicle could move suddenly
roll. If you have left the engine and push the lever toward the if the shift lever is not fully in
running, the vehicle can move front of the vehicle into P (Park). P (Park) with the parking brake
suddenly. You or others could be 3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. firmly set. And, if you leave the
injured. To be sure the vehicle will vehicle with the engine running, it
4. Remove the key.
not move, even when you are on could overheat and even catch
fairly level ground, use the steps fire. You or others could be
that follow. If you are pulling a injured. Do not leave the vehicle
trailer, see Driving Characteristics with the engine running.
and Towing Tips on page 8‑58.
If you have to leave the vehicle with
the engine running, the vehicle must
be in P (Park) and the parking
brake set.
Release the button and check that
the shift lever cannot be moved out
of P (Park).
Torque Lock Shifting Out of Park Parking Over Things

Torque lock is when the weight of To shift out of P (Park): That Burn
the vehicle puts too much force on
1. Apply the brake pedal.
the parking pawl in the
transmission. This happens when 2. Press the shift lever button.
{ WARNING
parking on a hill and shifting the Things that can burn could touch
3. Move the shift lever.
transmission into P (Park) is not hot exhaust parts under the
done properly and then it is difficult If you still are unable to shift out of vehicle and ignite. Do not park
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent P (Park): over papers, leaves, dry grass,
torque lock, set the parking brake 1. Fully release the shift lever or other things that can burn.
and then shift into P (Park). To find button.
out how, see “Shifting Into Park”
listed previously. 2. Hold the brake pedal down and
press the shift lever button
If torque lock does occur, the again.
vehicle may need to be pushed
uphill by another vehicle to relieve 3. Move the shift lever.
the parking pawl pressure, so you If you still cannot move the shift
can shift out of P (Park). lever from P (Park), see your dealer/
Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued)

Running the Vehicle
While Parked
{ WARNING . The vehicle’s exhaust system It is better not to park with the
has been modified, damaged engine running. But if you ever have
Engine exhaust contains Carbon or improperly repaired. to, here are some things to know.
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
. There are holes or openings
can cause unconsciousness and in the vehicle body from { WARNING
even death. damage or after-market
modifications that are not Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: completely sealed. area with poor ventilation is
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
. The vehicle idles in areas If unusual fumes are detected or
with poor ventilation (parking enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
if it is suspected that exhaust is contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
garages, tunnels, deep snow coming into the vehicle:
that may block underbody which cannot be seen or smelled.
airflow or tail pipes).
. Drive it only with the windows It can cause unconsciousness
completely down. and even death. Never run the
. The exhaust smells or
. Have the vehicle repaired engine in an enclosed area that
sounds strange or different. has no fresh air ventilation. For
immediately.
. The exhaust system leaks more information, see Engine
due to corrosion or damage. Never park the vehicle with the Exhaust on page 8‑34.
engine running in an enclosed
(Continued)
area such as a garage or a
building that has no fresh air
ventilation.
{ WARNING Automatic { WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out of
Transmission It is dangerous to get out of the
the vehicle if the automatic vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
transmission shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do Do not leave the vehicle when the
not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you
engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the
have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the
could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground,
you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and
always set the parking brake and The automatic transmission shift move the shift lever to P (Park).
move the shift lever to P (Park). lever is located on the console See Shifting Into Park on
between the seats. page 8‑32. If you are pulling a
Follow the proper steps to be sure
the vehicle will not move. See P (Park): This position locks the trailer, see Driving Characteristics
Shifting Into Park on page 8‑32. front wheels. Use P (Park) when and Towing Tips on page 8‑58.
starting the engine because the
If parking on a hill and pulling a vehicle cannot move easily. The vehicle has an automatic
trailer, see Driving Characteristics transmission shift lock control
and Towing Tips on page 8‑58. system. You must fully apply the
regular brake first and then press
the shift lever button before shifting
from P (Park) when the ignition key
is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out N (Neutral): In this position the D (Drive): This position is for
of P (Park), ease pressure on the engine and transmission do not normal driving. It provides the best
shift lever, then push the shift lever connect. Use N (Neutral) to restart a fuel economy. If you need more
all the way into P (Park) as you vehicle that is already moving. power for passing, and you are:
maintain brake application. Then . Going less than 56 km/h
press the shift lever button and
move the shift lever into another
{ WARNING (35 mph), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
gear. See Shifting Out of Park on Shifting into a drive gear while the
page 8‑33. engine is running at high speed is
. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or
dangerous. Unless your foot is more, push the accelerator all
R (Reverse): Use this gear to the way down.
back up. firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly. Notice: If the vehicle seems to
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) accelerate slowly or not shift
You could lose control and hit
while the vehicle is moving gears when you go faster, and
people or objects. Do not shift
forward could damage the you continue to drive the vehicle
transmission. The repairs would into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed. that way, you could damage the
not be covered by the vehicle transmission. Have the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only serviced right away. You can
after the vehicle is stopped. Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or
N (Neutral) with the engine drive in L (Low) when you are
To rock the vehicle back and forth to running at high speed may driving less than 56 km/h (35 mph)
get out of snow, ice or sand without damage the transmission. The and D (Drive) for higher speeds
damaging the transmission, see If repairs would not be covered by until then.
the Vehicle is Stuck on page 8‑23. the vehicle warranty. Be sure the M (Manual Mode): Allows the
engine is not running at high driver to select the range of gear
speed when shifting the vehicle. positions. If the vehicle has this
feature, see Manual Mode on
page 8‑37.
Manual Mode When shifting to M (Manual Mode), Fuel Economy Mode

the transmission will shift to a preset
Electronic Range Select lower gear range. For this preset The vehicle may have a Fuel
(ERS) Mode range, the highest gear available is Economy Mode. When engaged,
displayed next to the M in the DIC. fuel economy mode can improve the
ERS or manual mode allows for the vehicle's fuel economy.
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
selection of the range of gear
on page 4‑27 for more information.
positions. Use this mode when
All gears below that number are
driving down hill or towing a trailer
available to use. For example,
to limit the top gear and vehicle
when 4 (Fourth) is shown next to
speed. The shift position indicator
the M, 1 (First) through 4 (Fourth)
within the Driver Information Center
gears are shifted automatically.
(DIC) will display a number next to
To shift to 5 (Fifth) gear, press
the M indicating the highest
the + (Plus) button or shift into
available gear under manual mode
D (Drive).
and the driving conditions when
manual mode was selected. M (Manual Mode) will prevent
shifting to a lower gear range if the
To use this feature:
engine speed is too high. If vehicle
1. Move the shift lever to speed is not reduced within the time
M (Manual Mode). allowed, the lower gear range shift Press the “eco” (economy) button by
will not be completed. Slow the the shift lever to turn this feature on
2. Press the plus/minus button on or off. The “eco” light in the
the shift lever, to increase or vehicle, then press the − (Minus)
button to the desired lower gear instrument cluster will come on
decrease the gear range when engaged. See Fuel Economy
available. range.
Light on page 4‑25. For vehicles
While using the ERS, cruise control
can be used.
with a Driver Information Center Drive Systems Brakes

(DIC) an “ECO Mode On” message
displays. See Fuel System
Messages on page 4‑35 for more All-Wheel Drive Antilock Brake
information. With this feature, engine power is System (ABS)
When Fuel Economy Mode is on: always sent to all four wheels. It is This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
fully automatic, and adjusts itself as System (ABS), an advanced
. The transmission will upshift needed for road conditions.
sooner and downshift later. electronic braking system that helps
When using a compact spare tire on prevent a braking skid.
. The torque converter clutch will an AWD vehicle, the system
apply sooner and stay on longer. When the engine is started and the
automatically detects the compact vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
. The gas pedal will be less spare and disables AWD. To restore checks itself. A momentary motor or
sensitive. AWD operation and prevent clicking noise might be heard while
excessive wear on system, replace this test is going on, and it might
. The vehicle's computer will more
the compact spare with a full-size even be noticed that the brake
aggressively shut off fuel to the tire as soon as possible. See
engine under deceleration. pedal moves a little. This is normal.
Compact Spare Tire on page 9‑73
. The engine idle speed will be for more information.
lower.
. Driving performance is more
conservative.
ABS can change the brake pressure Using ABS

to each wheel, as required, faster
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
than any driver could. This can help
the brake pedal down firmly and let
the driver steer around the obstacle
ABS work. The ABS pump or motor
while braking hard.
might be heard operating, and the
As the brakes are applied, the brake pedal might be felt to pulsate,
If there is a problem with ABS, this computer keeps receiving updates but this is normal.
warning light stays on. See Antilock on wheel speed and controls
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light braking pressure accordingly. Braking in Emergencies
on page 4‑22.
Remember: ABS does not change ABS allows the driver to steer and
If driving safely on a wet road and it the time needed to get a foot up to brake at the same time. In many
becomes necessary to slam on the the brake pedal or always decrease emergencies, steering can help
brakes and continue braking to stopping distance. If you get too more than even the very best
avoid a sudden obstacle, a close to the vehicle in front of you, braking.
computer senses that the wheels there will not be enough time to
are slowing down. If one of the apply the brakes if that vehicle
wheels is about to stop rolling, the suddenly slows or stops. Always
computer will separately work the leave enough room up ahead to
brakes at each wheel. stop, even with ABS.
Parking Brake Notice: Driving with the parking Brake Assist

brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature This vehicle has a brake assist
wear or damage to brake system feature designed to assist the driver
parts. Make sure that the parking in stopping or decreasing vehicle
brake is fully released and the speed in emergency driving
brake warning light is off before conditions. This feature uses the
driving. stability system hydraulic brake
control module to supplement the
To release the parking brake, hold power brake system under
the regular brake pedal down, then conditions where the driver has
push down momentarily on the quickly and forcefully applied the
parking brake pedal until you feel brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
the pedal release. Slowly pull your stop or slow down the vehicle. The
foot up off the park brake pedal. stability system hydraulic brake
To set the parking brake, hold the If the parking brake is not released control module increases brake
regular brake pedal down, then when you begin to drive, the brake pressure at each corner of the
push the parking brake pedal down. system warning light will be on and vehicle until the ABS activates.
a chime will sound warning you that Minor brake pedal pulsations or
If the ignition is on, the brake the parking brake is still on.
system warning light will come on. pedal movement during this time is
See Brake System Warning Light If you are towing a trailer and are normal and the driver should
on page 4‑21. parking on a hill, see Driving continue to apply the brake pedal
Characteristics and Towing Tips on as the driving situation dictates.
page 8‑58. The brake assist feature will
automatically disengage when the
brake pedal is released or brake
pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) Ride Control Systems The system may be heard or felt
while it is working, but this is
This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist normal.
(HSA) feature, which may be useful Traction Control
when the vehicle is stopped on a System (TCS)
grade. This feature is designed to
prevent the vehicle from rolling, The vehicle has a Traction Control
either forward or rearward, during System (TCS) that limits wheel spin.
vehicle drive off. After driver On a front-wheel-drive vehicle, the
completely stops and holds the system operates if it senses that
vehicle in a complete standstill on a one or both of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light
grade, HSA will be automatically will flash to indicate that the traction
activated. During the transition traction. On an All-Wheel-Drive
(AWD) vehicle, the system will control system is active.
period between when the driver
releases the brake pedal and starts operate if it senses that any of the This warning light comes on if there
to accelerate to drive off on a grade, wheels are spinning or beginning to is a problem with TCS, and the
HSA holds the braking pressure to lose traction. When this happens, system will not limit wheel spin.
ensure that there is no rolling back. the system brakes the spinning Adjust your driving accordingly.
The brakes will automatically wheel(s) and/or reduces engine
release when the accelerator pedal power to limit wheel spin.
is applied within the two second
window. It will not activate if the
vehicle is in a drive gear and facing
downhill or if the vehicle is facing
uphill and in R (Reverse).
TCS automatically comes on On AWD vehicles, when TCS is

whenever the vehicle is started. turned off, the system may still
To limit wheel spin, especially in make noise. This is normal and
slippery road conditions, the system necessary with AWD hardware.
should always be left on. But, TCS It may be necessary to turn the
can be turned off if needed. system off if the vehicle ever gets
Notice: Do not repeatedly brake stuck in sand, mud or snow and Traction control can be turned
or accelerate heavily when TCS is rocking the vehicle is required. See off by pressing and releasing the
off. The vehicle's driveline could If the Vehicle is Stuck on page 8‑23 TCS/StabiliTrak button, on the
be damaged. for more information. See also console, until the TCS/StabiliTrak
Winter Driving on page 8‑21 for light comes on the instrument panel
information on using TCS when and “Traction Control Off” appears
driving in snowy or icy conditions. in the DIC. Press the button again
to turn the system back on. For
information on turning StabiliTrak off
and on, see “StabiliTrak System”
following in this section.
The TCS off light comes on and Adding non‐GM accessories can
“Traction Control Off” is displayed affect the vehicle's performance.
on the Driver Information Center See Accessories and Modifications
(DIC) to indicate that the traction on page 9‑3 for more information.
control system has been turned off.
See Ride Control System Messages
on page 4‑36.
StabiliTrak System This also occurs when traction

control is activated. A noise may be
The vehicle has a vehicle stability heard or vibration may be felt in the
enhancement system called brake pedal. This is normal.
StabiliTrak. It is an advanced Continue to steer the vehicle in the
computer controlled system that intended direction.
assists with directional control of the StabiliTrak can be turned
vehicle in difficult driving conditions. If there is a problem detected with
StabiliTrak, a “Service StabiliTrak” off by pressing and holding the
StabiliTrak activates when the message will be displayed on the TCS/StabiliTrak button, on the
computer senses a difference Driver Information Center (DIC). console, until the TCS Off and
between the intended path and the When this message is displayed StabiliTrak Off lights come on the
direction the vehicle is actually and the StabiliTrak light comes on, instrument panel and “StabiliTrak
traveling. StabiliTrak selectively the system is not operational. Off” appears in the DIC. For
applies braking pressure at any one Driving should be adjusted information on turning TCS off and
of the vehicle's brakes to help steer accordingly. See Ride Control on, see “Traction Control System
the vehicle in the intended direction. System Messages on page 4‑36. (TCS)” earlier in this section.
StabiliTrak comes on automatically If cruise control is being used when

whenever the vehicle is started. To StabiliTrak activates, the cruise
assist with directional control of the control will automatically disengage.
vehicle, the system should always Press the cruise control button to
be left on. reengage when road conditions
allow. See Cruise Control on
When the stability control system
activates, the Traction Control
System (TCS)/StabiliTrak light will
flash on the instrument panel.
Cruise Control { WARNING

With cruise control, the vehicle can
maintain a speed of about 40 km/h Cruise control can be dangerous
(25 mph) or more without keeping where you cannot drive safely at
your foot on the accelerator. Cruise a steady speed. So, do not use
control does not work at speeds the cruise control on winding
below 40 km/h (25 mph). roads or in heavy traffic.
If the brakes are applied, the cruise Cruise control can be dangerous
control shuts off. on slippery roads. On such roads,
If the vehicle has the StabiliTrak® fast changes in tire traction can
or traction control system and cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use The cruise control buttons are
begins to limit wheel spin while
cruise control on slippery roads. located on the steering wheel.
using cruise control, the cruise
control automatically disengages. 5 (On/Off): Press to turn the
See StabiliTrak System on Setting Cruise Control cruise control system on and off.
page 8‑43 or Traction Control \ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise
System (TCS) on page 8‑41. When { WARNING control without erasing the set
road conditions allow you to safely speed from memory.
use it again, the cruise control can If you leave your cruise control on
be turned back on. when you are not using cruise, RES/+ (Resume/Accel): Move the
you might hit a button and go into thumbwheel up to resume a set
cruise when you do not want to. speed or to accelerate to a higher
You could be startled and even speed.
lose control. Keep the cruise SET/− (Set/Coast): Move the
control switch off until you want to thumbwheel down toward SET/− to
use cruise control. set a speed and activate cruise
control or to decrease the speed.
To set a speed: Increasing Speed While Using Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control Cruise Control
1. Press 5 to turn the cruise
control system on. If the cruise control system is If the cruise control system is
already engaged, already engaged,
2. Get to the speed desired. . Move the thumbwheel up toward . Move the thumbwheel down
3. Move the thumbwheel down RES/+ and hold it until the toward SET/− and hold until the
toward SET/− and release it. vehicle accelerates to the desired lower speed is reached,
The desired set speed briefly desired speed, and then then release it.
appears in the instrument panel release it.
cluster.
. To slow down in very small
. To increase the speed in small amounts, move the thumbwheel
4. Take your foot off the accelerator amounts, move the thumbwheel down toward SET/− briefly and
pedal. up toward RES/+ briefly and then release it. Each time this is
When the brakes are applied, the then release it. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about
cruise control shuts off. done, the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
Resuming a Set Speed
If the brakes are applied or the
cancel button is pressed while the
cruise control is at a set speed, the
cruise control disengages without
erasing the set speed from memory.
Once the vehicle reaches about
40 km/h (25 mph) or more, move
the thumbwheel up toward RES/+
briefly. The vehicle returns to the
speed selected previously and stays
there.
Passing Another Vehicle While Ending Cruise Control Object Detection

Using Cruise Control There are three ways to disengage
Use the accelerator pedal to the cruise control:
Systems
increase the vehicle's speed. When . Step lightly on the brake pedal
you take your foot off the pedal, the Ultrasonic Parking Assist
or clutch; when cruise control
vehicle slows down to the previously disengages, the indicator light For vehicles with the Ultrasonic
set cruise control speed. will go off. Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
Using Cruise Control on Hills it assists the driver with parking
. Press \. and avoiding objects while in
How well the cruise control works R (Reverse). URPA operates at
on hills depends upon the vehicle's . Press 5 to turn the cruise
speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph),
speed, load, and the steepness of control system off completely. and the sensors on the rear bumper
the hills. When going up steep hills, The cruise control cannot be detect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft)
you might have to step on the resumed. behind the vehicle, and at least
accelerator pedal to maintain the 20 cm (8 in) off the ground.
Erasing Speed Memory
vehicle's speed. When going
downhill, you might have to brake or The cruise control set speed
shift to a lower gear to maintain the memory is erased when the cruise
vehicle's speed. When the brakes control or the ignition is turned off.
are applied the cruise control
shuts off.
The display is located in the How the System Works

{ WARNING headliner.
URPA comes on automatically and
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking URPA uses three color-coded lights the display briefly illuminates to
Assist (URPA) system does not to provide distance and system indicate the system is working when
replace driver vision. It cannot information. the shift lever is moved into
detect: R (Reverse).
. Objects that are below the If the vehicle is traveling faster then
bumper, underneath the 8 km/h (5 mph) in reverse, the red
vehicle, or if they are too light on the rear display flashes.
close or far from the vehicle Objects must be at least 20 cm (8 in)
. Children, pedestrians, off the ground, below liftgate level,
bicyclists, or pets. and within 2.5 m (8 ft) from the rear
bumper to be detected. The
If you do not use proper care distance may be less during warmer
before and while backing; vehicle or humid weather.
damage, injury, or death could
occur. Even with URPA, always A single beep sounds the first time
an object is detected between 0.6 m
check behind the vehicle before
(23 in) and 2.5 m (8 ft) away.
backing up. While backing, be
Beeping occurs continuously when
sure to look for objects and check the vehicle is 0.6 m (23 in) or closer
the vehicle's mirrors. to an object.
The following describes how the URPA display lights appear as the vehicle When the System Does Not
gets closer to a detected object: Seem to Work Properly
Description Metric English If the URPA system does not
activate due to a temporary
amber light 2.5 m 8 ft
condition, the message Park Assist
amber/amber lights 1.0 m 40 in Off displays on the DIC and a red
amber/amber/red lights and light is shown on the rear URPA
continuous beeping for 0.6 m 23 in display when the shift lever is
five seconds moved into R (Reverse). This can
occur under the following
amber/amber/red lights flashing conditions:
and continuous beeping for 0.3 m 1 ft . The ultrasonic sensors are not
five seconds
clean. Keep the vehicle's rear
bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning
Park Assist Off displays on the The settings are: instructions, see Exterior Care
Driver Information Center (DIC) to . On: Turns URPA on on page 9‑81.
indicate that URPA is off, see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on . Off: Turns URPA off . A trailer was attached to the
page 4‑27 for more information. vehicle, or an object was
. Tow Bar: Use when a tow bar is hanging out of the liftgate during
System Settings attached to the vehicle the last drive cycle, a red light
Each time the vehicle is started Tow Bar may come on in the rear display.
URPA defaults to the On setting. Once the attached object is
When the tow bar setting is used,
removed, URPA will return to
Use the Vehicle Personalization on an area of 16 cm (6 in) around the
normal operation.
page 4‑39 menu to hitch is not detected by the system.
configure URPA.
. A tow bar is attached to the
vehicle and the tow bar setting is
Rear Vision WARNING (Continued)
not being used, or an odd Camera (RVC)
shaped tow bar is attached to The vehicle may have a Rear Vision Do not back the vehicle by only
the vehicle and the tow bar Camera (RVC) system. Read this looking at the RVC screen, or use
setting is being used. entire section before using it. the screen during longer, higher
. The vehicle's bumper is The RVC can assist the driver when speed backing maneuvers or
damaged. Take the vehicle to backing up by displaying a view of where there could be cross-traffic.
your dealer/retailer to repair the the area behind the vehicle. Your judged distances using the
system. screen will differ from actual
distances.
. Other conditions may affect { WARNING
system performance, such as So if you do not use proper care
vibrations from a jackhammer or The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) before backing up, you could hit a
the compression of air brakes on system does not replace driver vehicle, child, pedestrian,
a very large truck. vision. RVC does not: bicyclist, or pet, resulting in
If the system is still disabled, after . Detect objects that are vehicle damage, injury, or death.
driving forward at least 25 km/h outside the camera's field of Even though the vehicle has the
(15 mph), take the vehicle to your view, below the bumper, RVC system, always check
dealer/retailer. or underneath the vehicle. carefully before backing up by
. Detect children, pedestrians, checking behind and around the
bicyclists, or pets. vehicle.
(Continued)
Vehicles Without a Navigation Vehicles With a Navigation Turning the Rear Vision Camera
System System System On or Off
When the key is in the ON/RUN An image appears on the navigation To turn the rear vision camera
position and the driver shifts the screen with the message “Check system on or off:
vehicle into R (Reverse), the video Surroundings for Safety” when the 1. Shift into P (Park).
image automatically appears on the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
inside rear view mirror. Once the The navigation screen goes to the 2. Press the CONFIG button.
driver shifts out of R (Reverse), the previous screen after approximately 3. Select Display.
video image automatically 10 seconds once the vehicle is
disappears from the inside rear view shifted out of R (Reverse).
mirror. To cancel the delay, do one of the
Turning the Rear Vision Camera following:
System Off or On . Press a hard key on the
To turn off the RVC system, press navigation system.
and hold z , located on the inside . Shift into P (Park).
rearview mirror, until the left . Reach a vehicle speed of
indicator light turns off. The RVC 8 km/h (5 mph).
display is now disabled.
To turn the RVC system on again,
press and hold z until the left
4. Select Camera. When a check
indicator light illuminates. The RVC mark appears next to the
system display is now enabled and Camera option, then the RVC
the display will appear in the mirror system is on.
normally.
Symbols Guidelines Rear Vision Camera Location

The navigation system may have a The RVC system has a guideline
feature that lets the driver view overlay that can help the driver align
symbols on the navigation screen the vehicle when backing into a
while using the RVC. The Ultrasonic parking spot.
Rear Park Assist (URPA) system To turn the guidelines on or off:
must not be disabled to use the
caution symbols. The error message 1. Shift into P (Park).
“Rear Parking Assist Symbols 2. Press the CONFIG button.
Unavailable” may display if URPA
has been disabled and the symbols 3. Select Display.
have been turned on. See 4. Select Guidelines. When a
Ultrasonic Parking Assist on check mark appears next to the
page 8‑46. Guidelines option, guidelines will
The symbols appear and may cover appear. The camera is located above the
an object when viewing the license plate.
Rear Vision Camera Error
navigation screen when an object is Messages The area displayed by the camera is
detected by the URPA system. limited.
SERVICE REAR VISION CAMERA
To turn the symbols on or off: SYSTEM: This message can It does not display objects that are
1. Shift into P (Park). display on the navigation screen close to either corner or under the
when the system is not receiving bumper and can vary depending
2. Press the CONFIG button. information it requires from other on vehicle orientation or road
3. Select Display. vehicle systems. conditions. The distance of the
image that appears on the screen is
4. Select Symbols. When a check If any other problem occurs or if a different from the actual distance.
mark appears next to the problem persists, see your dealer/
Symbols option, symbols will retailer.
appear.
The following illustration shows the A. View displayed by the camera.

. The back of the vehicle is in an
field of view that the camera accident, the position and
B. Corner of the rear bumper. mounting angle of the camera
provides.
When the System Does Not can change or the camera can
Seem To Work Properly be affected. Be sure to have the
camera and its position and
The RVC system may not work mounting angle checked at your
properly or display a clear image if: dealer/retailer.
. The RVC is turned off. See The RVC system display in the
“Turning the Rear Camera rearview mirror may turn off or not
System On or Off” earlier in this appear as expected due to one of
section. the following conditions. If this
. It is dark. occurs the left indicator light on the
mirror will flash.
. The sun or the beam of
headlights is shining directly into
. A slow flash may indicate a loss
the camera lens. of video signal, or no video
signal present during the reverse
. Ice, snow, mud, or anything else cycle.
builds up on the camera lens.
Clean the lens, rinse it with
water, and wipe it with a soft
cloth.
. A fast flash may indicate that the
display has been on for the Fuel
maximum allowable time during Use of the recommended fuel is an
a reverse cycle, or the display important part of the proper
has reached an over maintenance of this vehicle. To help
temperature limit. keep the engine clean and maintain
The fast flash conditions are optimum vehicle performance, we
used to protect the video device recommend the use of gasoline
from high temperature advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
conditions. Once conditions Gasoline.
return to normal the device will Look for the TOP TIER label on the
reset and the green indicator will fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
stop flashing. enhanced detergency standards
During any of these fault conditions, developed by auto companies. A list
the display will be blank and the of marketers providing TOP TIER
indicator will continue to flash as Detergent Gasoline can be found at
long as the vehicle is in R (Reverse) www.toptiergas.com.
or until the conditions return to
normal.
Pressing and holding z when the
left indicator light is flashing will turn
off the video display along with the
left indicator light.
Recommended Fuel California Fuel Fuels in Foreign

Use regular unleaded gasoline with Requirements Countries
a posted octane rating of 87 or If the vehicle is certified to meet If you plan on driving in another
higher. If the octane rating is less California Emissions Standards, it is country outside the United States or
than 87, an audible knocking noise, designed to operate on fuels that Canada, the proper fuel might be
commonly referred to as spark meet California specifications. See hard to find. Never use leaded
knock, might be heard when driving. the underhood emission control gasoline or any other fuel not
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated label. If this fuel is not available in recommended in the previous text
at 87 octane or higher as soon as states adopting California emissions on fuel. Costly repairs caused by
possible. If heavy knocking is heard standards, the vehicle will operate use of improper fuel would not be
when using gasoline rated at satisfactorily on fuels meeting covered by the vehicle warranty.
87 octane or higher, the engine federal specifications, but emission
needs service. To check the fuel availability, ask an
control system performance might auto club, or contact a major oil
be affected. The malfunction company that does business in the
Gasoline Specifications indicator lamp could turn on and the country where you will be driving.
At a minimum, gasoline should meet vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
ASTM specification D 4814 in the See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
United States or CAN/CGSB‐3.5 page 4‑18. If this occurs, return to
or 3.511 in Canada. Some your authorized dealer/retailer for
gasolines contain an diagnosis. If it is determined that the
octane-enhancing additive condition is caused by the type of
called methylcyclopentadienyl fuel used, repairs might not be
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). covered by the vehicle warranty.
We recommend against the use of
gasolines containing MMT. See Fuel
Additives on page 8‑55 for
additional information.
Fuel Additives For customers who do not use TOP Notice: This vehicle was not
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, designed for fuel that contains
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines one bottle of GM Fuel System methanol. Do not use fuel
in the United States are now Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel containing methanol. It can
required to contain additives that tank at every engine oil change, can corrode metal parts in the fuel
help prevent engine and fuel system help clean deposits from fuel system and also damage plastic
deposits from forming, allowing the injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel and rubber parts. That damage
emission control system to work System Treatment PLUS is the only would not be covered under the
properly. In most cases, nothing gasoline additive recommended by vehicle warranty.
should have to be added to the fuel. General Motors. It is available at
However, some gasolines contain Some gasolines that are
your dealer/retailer. not reformulated for low
only the minimum amount of
additive required to meet U.S. Gasolines containing oxygenates, emissions can contain an
Environmental Protection Agency such as ethers and ethanol, and octane-enhancing additive called
regulations. To help keep fuel reformulated gasolines might be methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
injectors and intake valves clean, available in your area. We tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
or if the vehicle experiences recommend that you use these where you buy gasoline whether the
problems due to dirty injectors or gasolines, if they comply with the fuel contains MMT. We recommend
valves, look for gasoline that is specifications described earlier. against the use of such gasolines.
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent However, E85 (85% ethanol) and Fuels containing MMT can reduce
Gasoline. Look for the TOP TIER other fuels containing more than the life of spark plugs and the
label on the fuel pump to ensure 10% ethanol must not be used in performance of the emission control
gasoline meets enhanced vehicles that were not designed for system could be affected. The
detergency standards developed by those fuels. malfunction indicator lamp might
the auto companies. A list of turn on. If this occurs, return to your
marketers providing TOP TIER dealer/retailer for service.
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
Filling the Tank The fuel cap is behind the fuel door Do not top off or overfill the tank and
on the vehicle's passenger side. wait a few seconds before removing
Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
{ WARNING to remove. Do not release the cap surfaces as soon as possible. See
Fuel vapor burns violently and a too soon or it will spring back. Exterior Care on page 9‑81.
Reinstall the cap by turning it
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
To help avoid injuries to you and
clockwise until it clicks. { WARNING
others, read and follow all the If the cap is not properly installed,
the Malfunction Indicator Lamp If a fire starts while you are
instructions on the fuel pump
come on. See Malfunction Indicator refueling, do not remove the
island. Turn off the engine when
Lamp on page 4‑18 for more nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel
information. shutting off the pump or by
or when refueling the vehicle. Do
notifying the station attendant.
not use cellular phones. Keep
sparks, flames, and smoking { WARNING Leave the area immediately.
materials away from fuel. Do not Notice: If a new fuel cap is
leave the fuel pump unattended Fuel can spray out on you if you
open the fuel cap too quickly. needed, be sure to get the right
when refueling the vehicle. This is type of cap from your dealer/
against the law in some places. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be retailer. The wrong type fuel cap
Do not re-enter the vehicle while might not fit properly, might
pumping fuel. Keep children away badly burned. This spray can
cause the malfunction indicator
from the fuel pump; never let happen if the tank is nearly full,
lamp to light, and could damage
children pump fuel. and is more likely in hot weather.
the fuel tank and emissions
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait system. See Malfunction Indicator
for any hiss noise to stop. Then Lamp on page 4‑18.
unscrew the cap all the way.
Filling a Portable Fuel WARNING (Continued) Towing

Container
. Bring the fill nozzle in contact General Towing
{ WARNING with the inside of the fill Information
opening before operating the
Never fill a portable fuel container Only use towing equipment that has
nozzle. Contact should be been designed for the vehicle.
while it is in the vehicle. Static maintained until the filling is
electricity discharge from the Contact your dealer/retailer or
complete. trailering retailer for assistance with
container can ignite the fuel
vapor. You can be badly burned
. Do not smoke while preparing the vehicle for towing a
pumping fuel. trailer.
and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you . Do not use a cellular phone See the following trailer towing
and others: while pumping fuel. information in this section:
. Dispense fuel only into . For information on driving while
approved containers. towing a trailer, see “Driving
Characteristics and
. Do not fill a container while it Towing Tips”.
is inside a vehicle, in a
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, . For maximum vehicle and trailer
or on any surface other than weights, see “Trailer Towing”.
the ground. . For information on equipment to
(Continued) tow a trailer, see “Towing
Equipment”.
For information on towing a disabled The following information has

vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on WARNING (Continued) important trailering tips and rules for
page 9‑78. For information on your safety and that of your
towing the vehicle behind another the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer passengers. Read this section
vehicle — such as a motorhome, only if all the steps in this section carefully before pulling a trailer.
see Recreational Vehicle Towing on have been followed. Ask your
page 9‑78. dealer/retailer for advice and Pulling A Trailer
information about towing a trailer Here are some important points:
Driving Characteristics with the vehicle. . There are many laws, including
and Towing Tips speed limit restrictions that apply
The vehicle can tow a trailer when to trailering. Check for legal
equipped with the proper trailer
{ WARNING towing equipment. For trailering
requirements with state or
provincial police.
capacity, see “Trailer Towing”
The driver can lose control when . Do not tow a trailer at all during
following in this section. Trailering
pulling a trailer if the correct changes handling, acceleration, the first 1 600 km (1,000 miles)
equipment is not used or the braking, durability and fuel the new vehicle is driven. The
vehicle is not driven properly. For economy. With the added weight, engine, axle or other parts could
example, if the trailer is too the engine, transmission, wheel be damaged.
heavy, the brakes may not work assemblies and tires are forced to . During the first 800 km
well — or even at all. The driver work harder and under greater (500 miles) that a trailer is
and passengers could be loads. The trailer also adds wind towed, do not drive over 80 km/h
seriously injured. The vehicle may resistance, increasing the pulling (50 mph) and do not make starts
also be damaged; the resulting requirements. For safe trailering, at full throttle. This reduces wear
repairs would not be covered by correctly use the proper trailering on the vehicle.
(Continued) equipment.
. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
Use a lower gear if the
transmission shifts too often.
. Do not use the Fuel Saver Mode Check all trailer hitch parts and Following Distance
when towing. attachments, safety chains,
Stay at least twice as far behind the
. Obey speed limit restrictions. electrical connectors, lamps, tires
vehicle ahead as you would when
Do not drive faster than the and mirror adjustments. If the trailer
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
maximum posted speed for has electric brakes, start the vehicle
This can help to avoid situations
trailers, or no more than 90 km/h and trailer moving and then apply
that require heavy braking and
(55 mph), to reduce wear on the the trailer brake controller by hand
sudden turns.
vehicle. to be sure the brakes are working.
. For vehicles with the Ultra During the trip, check regularly to be Passing
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) sure that the load is secure, and the More passing distance is needed
system, turn the system off when lamps and trailer brakes are working when towing a trailer. Because the
towing a trailer. If the tow bar properly. rig is longer, it is necessary to go
is installed while not towing a farther beyond the passed vehicle
Towing with a Stability Control
trailer, change the URPA system before returning to the lane.
to the “Tow Bar” setting. See System
Ultrasonic Parking Assist on When towing, the sound of the Backing Up
page 8‑46 for more information. stability control system might be Hold the bottom of the steering
heard. The system is reacting to the wheel with one hand. To move the
Driving with a Trailer vehicle movement caused by the trailer to the left, move that hand to
Towing a trailer requires experience. trailer, which mainly occurs during the left. To move the trailer to the
Get familiar with handling and cornering. This is normal when right, move your hand to the right.
braking with the added trailer towing heavier trailers. Always back up slowly and,
weight. The vehicle is now longer if possible, have someone
and not as responsive as the guide you.
vehicle is by itself.
Making Turns are burned out. Check occasionally engine off. If the overheat warning
to be sure the trailer bulbs are still comes on, see Engine Overheating
Notice: Making very sharp turns
working. on page 9‑19.
while trailering could cause the
trailer to come in contact with the Driving On Grades Parking on Hills
vehicle. The vehicle could be
Reduce speed and shift to a
damaged. Avoid making very
sharp turns while trailering. lower gear before starting down a { WARNING
long or steep downgrade. If the
When turning with a trailer, make transmission is not shifted down, Parking the vehicle on a hill with
wider turns than normal so the the brakes might have to be used the trailer attached can be
trailer will not strike soft shoulders, so much that they would get hot and dangerous. If something goes
curbs, road signs, trees or other no longer work well. wrong, the rig could start to move.
objects. Use the turn signal well in People can be injured, and both
advance and avoid jerky or sudden The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
the vehicle and the trailer can be
maneuvers. Use a lower gear if the transmission
damaged. When possible, always
shifts too often.
park the rig on a flat surface.
Turn Signals When Towing a When towing at high altitude on
Trailer steep uphill grades, engine coolant If parking the rig on a hill:
The turn signal indicators on the will boil at a lower temperature than
1. Press the brake pedal, but do
instrument panel flash whenever at normal altitudes. If the engine is
not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn
signaling a turn or lane change. turned off immediately after towing
the wheels into the curb if facing
Properly hooked up, the trailer at high altitude on steep uphill
downhill or into traffic if facing
lamps also flash, telling other grades, the vehicle may show signs
uphill.
drivers the vehicle is turning, similar to engine overheating. To
changing lanes or stopping. avoid this, let the engine run while 2. Have someone place chocks
parked, preferably on level ground, under the trailer wheels.
When towing a trailer, the arrows with the transmission in P (Park) for
on the instrument panel flash for a few minutes before turning the
turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
3. When the wheel chocks are in Maintenance When Trailer Trailer Towing
place, release the brake pedal Towing
until the chocks absorb the load. Before pulling a trailer, there are
The vehicle needs service more three important considerations that
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then often when pulling a trailer. See this have to do with weight:
apply the parking brake and shift manual's Maintenance Schedule or
into P (Park).
. The weight of the trailer
Index for more information. Things
5. Release the brake pedal. that are especially important in . The weight of the trailer tongue
trailer operation are automatic . The total weight on the vehicle's
Leaving After Parking on a Hill transmission fluid, engine oil, axle tires
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal. lubricant, belts, cooling system and
brake system. Inspect these before Weight of the Trailer
2. Start the engine. and during the trip.
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
3. Shift into a gear. Check periodically to see that all
Speed, altitude, road grades,
4. Release the parking brake. hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
outside temperature, special
5. Let up on the brake pedal. Engine Cooling When Trailer equipment, and the amount of
Towing tongue weight the vehicle can carry
6. Drive slowly until the trailer is must be considered. See “Weight of
clear of the chocks. The cooling system may temporarily the Trailer Tongue” later in this
7. Stop and have someone pick up overheat during severe operating section for more information.
and store the chocks. conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 9‑19. Maximum trailer weight is calculated
assuming only the driver is in the
tow vehicle and it has all the
required trailering equipment.
The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in
the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, If there are a lot of options,
based upon the vehicle model and options. equipment, passengers or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
Maximum Trailer GCWR* weight the vehicle can carry, which
Weight with Trailer will also reduce the trailer weight the
Vehicle Brakes† vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
L4 Engine, FWD 680 kg (1,500 lbs) 2 625 kg (5,787 lbs) the tongue load must be added to
the GVW because the vehicle will
L4 Engine, AWD 680 kg (1,500 lbs) 2 700 kg (5,952 lbs) be carrying that weight, too. See
V6 Engine, FWD 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 600 kg (7,937 lbs) Vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑24.
V6 Engine, AWD 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 700 kg (8,157 lbs)
† For trailers without trailer brakes the maximum trailer weight is 454 kg
(1,000 lbs) and the GCWR is 2 300 kg (5,071 lbs). See Towing Equipment
on page 8‑63 for more information.
*The Gross Combination Weight Weight of the Trailer Tongue

Rating (GCWR) is the total
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is
allowable weight of the completely
an important weight to measure
loaded vehicle and trailer including
because it affects the total gross
any passengers, cargo, equipment
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
and conversions. The GCWR for the
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
vehicle should not be exceeded. If a weight-carrying hitch or a
curb weight of the vehicle, any
Ask your dealer/retailer for our cargo carried in it, and the people weight-distributing hitch is being
trailering information or advice. See who will be riding in the vehicle. used, the trailer tongue (A) should
Customer Assistance Offices on weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total
page 12‑3 for more information. loaded trailer weight (B).
After loading the trailer, weigh the Total Weight on the Vehicle's Towing Equipment
trailer and then the tongue, Tires
separately, to see if the weights are Hitches
proper. If they are not, adjustments Inflate the vehicle's tires to the
upper limit for cold tires. These Use the correct hitch equipment.
might be made by moving some See your dealer/retailer or a hitch
items around in the trailer. numbers can be found on the
Certification label or see Vehicle dealer for assistance.
Trailering may be limited by the Load Limits on page 8‑24 for more . The rear bumper on the vehicle
vehicle's ability to carry tongue information. Do not go over the is not intended for hitches. Do
weight. Tongue weight cannot cause GVW limit for the vehicle, or the not attach rental hitches or other
the vehicle to exceed the GVWR GAWR, including the weight of the bumper-type hitches to it. Use
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or trailer tongue. If using a weight only a frame-mounted hitch that
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle distributing hitch, do not go over the does not attach to the bumper.
Weight Rating). The effect of rear axle limit before applying the
additional weight may reduce the weight distribution spring bars.
. Will any holes be made in the
trailering capacity more than the body of the vehicle when the
total of the additional weight. trailer hitch is installed? If there
are, seal the holes when the
It is important that the vehicle hitch is removed. If the holes are
does not exceed any of its not sealed, dirt, water, and
ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue from the exhaust can get into the
Weight. The only way to be sure it is vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on
not exceeding any of these ratings page 8‑34.
is to weigh the vehicle and trailer.
Safety Chains Trailer Sway Conversions and

Always attach chains between the Control (TSC) Add-Ons
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
The vehicle has a Trailer Sway
safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer to help prevent the
Control (TSC) feature as part of the Add-On Electrical
StabiliTrak system. If TSC detects
tongue from contacting the road if it
that the trailer is swaying, the
Equipment
becomes separated from the hitch.
vehicle's brakes are automatically Notice: Do not add anything
Leave enough slack so the rig can
applied. electrical to the vehicle unless
turn. Never allow safety chains to
you check with your dealer/
drag on the ground.
retailer first. Some electrical
Trailer Brakes equipment can damage the
vehicle and the damage would
Does the trailer have its own not be covered by the vehicle's
brakes? Be sure to read and follow warranty. Some add-on electrical
the instructions for the trailer brakes equipment can keep other
so they are installed, adjusted and components from working as
When TSC is applying the brakes,
maintained properly. they should.
the TCS/StabiliTrak indicator
Because the vehicle has antilock light flashes to notify the driver to Add-on equipment can drain the
brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's reduce speed. See Traction Control vehicle battery, even if the vehicle is
brake system. If this is done, both System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light on not operating.
brake systems will not work well, page 4‑23. If the trailer continues to
or at all. sway, StabiliTrak will reduce engine The vehicle has an airbag system.
torque to help slow the vehicle. Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
TSC will not function if StabiliTrak is Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
turned off. Vehicle on page 2‑38 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2‑38.
Vehicle Care 9-1
Vehicle Care Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . 9-13

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Headlamps, Front Turn
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Signal, Sidemarker, and
General Information Power Steering Fluid Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 (2.4L L4 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
California Proposition Power Steering Fluid Taillamps, Turn Signal,
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 (3.0L V6 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
California Perchlorate Materials Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 and Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . 9-35
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Accessories and Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Vehicle Checks All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Electrical System
Doing Your Own Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . 9-27 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Automatic Transmission Engine Compartment Fuse
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Shift Lock Control System Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Engine Compartment Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Instrument Panel Fuse
Ignition Transmission Lock Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Wheels and Tires
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Park Brake and P (Park)
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 9-12 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . 9-44
Automatic Transmission Wiper Blade Replacement . . . 9-29
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Headlamp Aiming Tire Terminology and
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
9-2 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50 Jump Starting General Information

Tire Pressure Monitor Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51 For service and parts needs, visit
Tire Pressure Monitor Towing your dealer/retailer. You will receive
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78 genuine GM parts and GM-trained
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56 Recreational Vehicle and supported service people.
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78
Genuine GM parts have one of
When It Is Time for New Appearance Care these marks:
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-85
Different Size Tires and
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . 9-63
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . 9-73
Vehicle Care 9-3
California Proposition Accessories and covered under the terms of the

vehicle warranty and may affect
65 Warning Modifications remaining warranty coverage for
Most motor vehicles, including this Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer affected parts.
one, contain and/or emit chemicals accessories to the vehicle can affect GM Accessories are designed to
known to the State of California to vehicle performance and safety, complement and function with other
cause cancer and birth defects or including such things as airbags, systems on the vehicle. Your GM
other reproductive harm. Engine braking, stability, ride and handling, dealer/retailer can accessorize the
exhaust, many parts and systems, emissions systems, aerodynamics, vehicle using genuine GM
many fluids, and some component durability, and electronic systems Accessories. When you go to your
wear by-products contain and/or like antilock brakes, traction control, GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM
emit these chemicals. and stability control. Some of these Accessories, you will know that
accessories could even cause GM-trained and supported service
California Perchlorate malfunction or damage not covered technicians will perform the work
by the vehicle warranty.
Materials Requirements using genuine GM Accessories.
Damage to vehicle components Also, see Adding Equipment to the
Certain types of automotive
resulting from the installation or use Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
applications, such as airbag
of non‐GM certified parts, including page 2‑38.
initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
control module modifications, is not
and lithium batteries contained in
remote keyless transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials.
Special handling may be necessary.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
9-4 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Checks WARNING (Continued)

This vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Airbag System
Doing Your Own . Be sure to use the proper Check on page 2‑40.
Service Work nuts, bolts, and other
Keep a record with all parts receipts
fasteners. English and metric and list the mileage and the date of
{ WARNING fasteners can be easily
confused. If the wrong
any service work performed. See
Maintenance Records on
You can be injured and the fasteners are used, parts can page 10‑10.
vehicle could be damaged if you later break or fall off. You
try to do service work on a vehicle could be hurt.
without knowing enough about it.
If doing some of your own service
. Be sure you have sufficient
work, use the proper service
knowledge, experience,
manual. It tells you much more
the proper replacement
about how to service the vehicle
parts, and tools before
than this manual can. To order the
attempting any vehicle
proper service manual, see Service
maintenance task.
Publications Ordering Information on
(Continued) page 12‑12.
Vehicle Care 9-5
Hood
To open the hood:
2. Move the secondary hood

release lever to the right to
release the striker. The lever is
near the middle of the hood.
1. Pull the release handle with the
symbol on it. It is below the 3. Lift the hood.
instrument panel, to the left of Before closing the hood, check all
the steering wheel. filler caps are properly installed.
9-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
2.4L L4 Engine
Vehicle Care 9-7
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on G. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.

page 9‑13. See Jump Starting on
B. Engine Cover on page 9‑9. page 9‑74.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick (out of view). H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.

See Engine Oil on page 9‑10. See Jump Starting on
page 9‑74.
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine
Oil on page 9‑10. I. Battery on page 9‑25.
E. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See J. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and

Brakes on page 9‑22. Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 9‑16.
F. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 9‑38. K. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
page 9‑22.
9-8 Vehicle Care
3.0L V6 Engine
Vehicle Care 9-9
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on G. Engine Compartment Fuse Engine Cover

page 9‑13. Block on page 9‑38.
B. Power Steering Fluid H. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
3.0L V6 Engine Cover
(2.4L L4 Engine) on page 9‑21 See Jump Starting on
or Power Steering Fluid page 9‑74.
(3.0L V6 Engine) on page 9‑21. I. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine See Jump Starting on
Oil on page 9‑10. page 9‑74.
D. Engine Cover on page 9‑9. J. Battery on page 9‑25.
E. Engine Oil Dipstick (out of view). K. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
See Engine Oil on page 9‑10. Pressure Cap. See Engine
F. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Coolant on page 9‑16.
Brakes on page 9‑22. L. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
page 9‑22. To remove:
1. Remove the oil fill cap.
2. Hold cover on both sides and
pull upward.
3. Lift and remove the engine
cover.
4. Install cover by aligning on oil fill
tube, then firmly pushing down
onto the intake manifold.
5. Install the oil fill cap.
9-10 Vehicle Care
Engine Oil When to Add Engine Oil

Checking Engine Oil If the oil is below the cross-hatched
area at the tip of the dipstick, add
It is a good idea to check the engine at least one liter/quart of the
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to recommended oil. This section
get an accurate reading, the oil explains what kind of oil to use. For
must be warm and the vehicle must See Engine Compartment Overview
engine oil crankcase capacity, see
be on level ground. on page 9‑6 for the location of the
Capacities and Specifications on
engine oil fill cap.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a page 11‑2.
yellow loop. See Engine Add enough oil to put the level
Notice: Do not add too much oil.
Compartment Overview on somewhere in the proper operating
If the engine has so much oil that
page 9‑6 for the location of the range. Push the dipstick all the way
the oil level gets above the
engine oil dipstick. back in when through.
cross-hatched area that shows
1. Turn off the engine and give the the proper operating range, the
oil several minutes to drain back engine could be damaged.
into the oil pan. If this is not
done, the oil dipstick might not
show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it
with a paper towel or cloth, then
push it back in all the way.
Remove it again, keeping the tip
down, and check the level.
Vehicle Care 9-11
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Cold Temperature Operation

Look for three things: If in an area of extreme cold, where
the temperature falls below −29°C
. GM6094M
(−20°F), use either an SAE 5W-30
Use only an oil that meets GM synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30
Standard GM6094M. engine oil. Both provide easier cold
Oils meeting these requirements starting for the engine at extremely
. SAE 5W-30 should have the starburst low temperatures. Always use an oil
SAE 5W-30 is best for the symbol on the container. This that meets the required
vehicle. These numbers on an symbol indicates that the oil has specification, GM6094M.
oil container show its viscosity, been certified by the American
or thickness. Do not use other Petroleum Institute (API). Engine Oil Additives / Engine
viscosity oils such as Notice: Use only engine oil Oil Flushes
SAE 20W-50. identified as meeting GM Do not add anything to the oil. The
. American Petroleum Institute Standard GM6094M and showing recommended oils with the starburst
(API) starburst symbol the American Petroleum Institute symbol that meet GM standards
Certified For Gasoline Engines are all that is needed for good
starburst symbol. Failure to use performance and engine protection.
the recommended oil can result
in engine damage not covered by Engine oil system flushes are not
the vehicle warranty. recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
9-12 Vehicle Care
Engine Oil Life System as possible within the next 1 000 km How to Reset the Engine Oil
(600 miles). It is possible that, Life System
When to Change Engine Oil if driving under the best conditions,
the oil life system might not indicate Reset the system whenever the
This vehicle has a computer system engine oil is changed so that the
that indicates when to change the that an oil change is necessary for
over a year. However, the engine oil system can calculate the next
engine oil and filter. This is based engine oil change. To reset the
on engine revolutions and engine and filter must be changed at least
once a year and at this time the system:
temperature, and not on mileage.
Based on driving conditions, the system must be reset. Your dealer/ 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
mileage at which an oil change is retailer has trained service people the engine off.
indicated can vary considerably. For who will perform this work using
2. Fully press and release the
the oil life system to work properly, genuine parts and reset the system.
accelerator pedal three times
the system must be reset every time It is also important to check the oil
within five seconds.
the oil is changed. regularly and keep it at the proper
level. If the vehicle has Driver Information
When the system has calculated Center (DIC) buttons:
that oil life has been diminished, it If the system is ever reset
accidentally, the oil must be 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
indicates that an oil change is
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles) with the engine off.
necessary. A “Change Engine
Oil Soon” message comes on. since the last oil change. 2. Press the DIC menu button until
See Engine Oil Messages on Remember to reset the oil life “Remaining Oil Life” displays.
page 4‑34. Change the oil as soon system whenever the oil is changed.
3. Press and hold the set/clear
button until “100%” is displayed.
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
The system is reset when the
“Change Engine Oil Soon” message
goes off.
Vehicle Care 9-13
What to Do with Used Oil Automatic Transmission Change the fluid and filter at the
intervals listed in Scheduled
Used engine oil contains elements Fluid Maintenance on page 10‑2, and be
that can be unhealthy for your skin
How to Check Automatic sure to use the fluid listed in
and could even cause cancer. Do
Transmission Fluid Recommended Fluids and
not let used oil stay on your skin.
Lubricants on page 10‑7.
Clean your skin and nails with soap It is not necessary to check
and water, or a good hand cleaner. the transmission fluid level.
Wash or properly dispose of clothing Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
A transmission fluid leak is the
or rags. See the manufacturer's only reason for fluid loss. If a leak See Engine Compartment Overview
warnings about the use and occurs, take the vehicle to your on page 9‑6 for the location of the
disposal of oil products. dealer/retailer service department engine air cleaner/filter.
Used oil can be a threat to the and have it repaired as soon as
When to Inspect the Engine Air
environment. If you change your possible.
Cleaner/Filter
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil There is a special procedure for
from the filter before disposal. Never checking and changing the Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
dispose of oil by putting it in the transmission fluid. Because this Maintenance II intervals and replace
trash, pouring it on the ground, into procedure is difficult, this should be it at the first oil change after each
sewers, or into streams or bodies of done at your dealer/retailer service 80 000 km (50,000 mile) interval.
water. Recycle it by taking it to a department. Contact your dealer/ See Scheduled Maintenance on
place that collects used oil. retailer for additional information or page 10‑2 for more information.
the procedure can be found in the If driving in dusty/dirty conditions,
service manual. To purchase a inspect the filter at each engine oil
service manual, see Service change.
Publications Ordering Information on
page 12‑12.
9-14 Vehicle Care
How to Inspect the Engine Air How to Reinstall Engine Air

Cleaner/Filter Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, 1. Install the air cleaner into the air
remove the filter from the vehicle cleaner housing. The outer air
and lightly shake the filter to release cleaner filter seal must be fitted
loose dust and dirt. If the filter properly in the air cleaner
remains caked with dirt, a new filter housing.
is required. 2. Align the air cleaner housing
To inspect or replace the engine air cover tabs to the air cleaner
cleaner/filter: housing.
1. Open the hood. See Hood on 3. Install the air cleaner housing
3. Remove the four air cleaner
page 9‑5. cover using the four screws.
housing cover screws.
2. Locate the air filter housing on
4. Pull straight up on cover, and
the front passenger side of the
while holding the cover, remove
engine compartment. See
the air filter.
Engine Compartment Overview
on page 9‑6.
Vehicle Care 9-15
Cooling System
{ WARNING
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is

3.0 L V6 Engine
off, dirt can easily get into the
engine, which could damage it. 2.4 L L4 Engine A. Engine Cooling Fans
Always have the air cleaner/filter B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
in place when you are driving. A. Engine Cooling Fan
Pressure Cap
B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap
{ WARNING
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
9-16 Vehicle Care
If the coolant inside the coolant If there seems to be no leak, with Engine Coolant
surge tank is boiling, do not do the engine on, check to see if
anything else until it cools down. the electric engine cooling fan The cooling system in the vehicle
Park the vehicle on a level surface. is running. If the engine is is filled with DEX-COOL® engine
overheating, the fan should be coolant. This coolant is designed to
The coolant level should be at the remain in the vehicle for five years
COLD FILL line. If it is not, there running. If it is not, your vehicle
needs service. Turn off the engine. or 240 000 km (150,000 miles),
might be a leak at the radiator whichever occurs first.
hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water Notice: Using coolant other
pump, or somewhere else in the than DEX-COOL® can cause The following explains the cooling
cooling system. premature engine, heater core, system and how to check and add
or radiator corrosion. In addition, coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating,
{ WARNING the engine coolant could require
changing sooner, at 50 000 km see Engine Overheating on
Heater and radiator hoses, and (30,000 miles) or 24 months, page 9‑19.
other engine parts, can be very whichever occurs first. Any
hot. Do not touch them. If you do, repairs would not be covered by
you can be burned. the vehicle warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant
Do not run the engine if there is a in the vehicle.
leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Vehicle Care 9-17
What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Checking Coolant

drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
The vehicle must be on a level
{ WARNING coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
surface when checking the coolant
level.
Adding only plain water to This mixture:
the cooling system can be Check to see if coolant is visible in
. Gives freezing protection down
dangerous. Plain water, or some the coolant surge tank. If the coolant
to −37°C (−34°F), outside
other liquid such as alcohol, can inside the coolant surge tank is
temperature.
boil before the proper coolant boiling, do not do anything else
. Gives boiling protection up to until it cools down. If coolant is
mixture will. The vehicle's coolant 129°C (265°F), engine visible but the coolant level is not
warning system is set for the temperature. at or above the COLD mark, add a
proper coolant mixture. With plain 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water or the wrong mixture, the
. Protects against rust and
corrosion. water and DEX-COOL® coolant at
engine could get too hot but you the coolant surge tank, but be
would not get the overheat . Will not damage aluminum parts. sure the cooling system is cool
warning. The engine could catch . Helps keep the proper engine before this is done. See Engine
fire and you or others could be temperature. Overheating on page 9‑19 for more
burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of information.
clean, drinkable water and Notice: If an improper coolant
mixture is used, the engine could The coolant surge tank is located in
DEX-COOL® coolant. the engine compartment on the
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be driver side of the vehicle. See
covered by the vehicle warranty. Engine Compartment Overview on
Too much water in the mixture page 9‑6 for more information on
can freeze and crack the engine, location.
radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
9-18 Vehicle Care
How to Add Coolant to the If coolant is needed, add the proper

Coolant Surge Tank { WARNING DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the
coolant surge tank.
An electric engine cooling fan
{ WARNING under the hood can start up even
You can be burned if you spill
and can cause injury. Keep
coolant on hot engine parts.
hands, clothing, and tools away
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
from any underhood electric fan.
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill
The coolant surge tank pressure
coolant on a hot engine.
{ WARNING cap can be removed when the
Notice: This vehicle has a cooling system, including the surge
Steam and scalding liquids from a tank pressure cap and upper
specific coolant fill procedure.
hot cooling system can blow out radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Failure to follow this procedure
and burn you badly. They are
could cause the engine to 1. Turn the pressure cap slowly
overheat and be severely under pressure, and if you turn
counterclockwise. If a hiss is
damaged. the surge tank pressure heard, wait for that to stop.
cap — even a little — they can A hiss means there is still some
come out at high speed. Never pressure left.
turn the cap when the cooling
system, including the surge tank 2. Keep turning the cap and
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the remove it.
cooling system and surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever
have to turn the pressure cap.
Vehicle Care 9-19
engine cooling fan(s). By this Engine Overheating

time, the coolant level inside the
coolant surge tank may be The vehicle has an indicator to warn
lower. If the level is lower, add of engine overheating. There is an
more of the proper mixture to the engine coolant temperature warning
coolant surge tank until the level light on the vehicle's instrument
reaches the line pointed to on panel. See Engine Coolant
the front of the coolant Temperature Gage on page 4‑15.
surge tank. Decide whether to lift the hood
5. Replace the pressure cap. when this warning appears, or get
Be sure the pressure cap is service help instead.
hand–tight and full seated. If lifting the hood , make sure the
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with vehicle is parked on a level surface.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not
the proper mixture to the COLD
tightly installed, coolant loss and Then check to see if the engine
FILL line.
possible engine damage may cooling fans are running. If the
4. With the coolant surge tank occur. Be sure the cap is properly engine is overheating, both fans
pressure cap off, start the and tightly secured. should be running. If they are not,
engine and let it run until the do not continue to run the engine
If coolant is needed, add the proper
upper radiator hose starts and have the vehicle serviced.
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the
getting hot. Watch out for the
coolant surge tank. Notice: Engine damage from
running the engine without
coolant is not covered by the
warranty.
9-20 Vehicle Care
If Steam Is Coming From The If No Steam Is Coming From If the temperature overheat gage
Engine Compartment The Engine Compartment is no longer in the overheat zone or
an overheat warning no longer
If an engine overheat warning is displays, the vehicle can be driven.
{ WARNING displayed but no steam can be seen Continue to drive the vehicle slow
or heard, the problem may not be for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
Steam from an overheated engine too serious. Sometimes the engine
can burn you badly, even if you vehicle distance from the vehicle in
can get a little too hot when the front. If the warning does not come
just open the hood. Stay away vehicle: back on, continue to drive normally.
from the engine if you see or hear .
steam coming from it. Just turn it Climbs a long hill on a hot day. If the warning continues, pull over,
off and get everyone away from . Stops after high-speed driving. stop, and park the vehicle
the vehicle until it cools down. right away.
. Idles for long periods in traffic.
Wait until there is no sign of If there is no sign of steam, idle the
steam or coolant before you open
. Tows a trailer.
engine for three minutes while
the hood. If the overheat warning is displayed parked. If the warning is still
with no sign of steam: displayed, turn off the engine until it
If you keep driving when your
engine is overheated, the liquids 1. Turn the air conditioning off. cools down.
in it can catch fire. You or others 2. Turn the heater on to the highest
could be badly burned. Stop your temperature and to the highest
engine if it overheats, and get out fan speed. Open the windows as
of the vehicle until the engine necessary.
is cool.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
If it is safe to do so, pull off
the road, shift to P (Park) or
N (Neutral) and let the
engine idle.
Vehicle Care 9-21
Power Steering Fluid When to Check Power Steering 4. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
Fluid dipstick with a clean rag.
(2.4L L4 Engine)
The power steering fluid does not 5. Replace the cap and completely
The vehicle has electric power tighten it.
steering and does not use power need to be checked unless there is
steering fluid. a leak in the system. Have the 6. Remove the cap again and
system inspected and repaired if look at the fluid level on the
there is a fluid loss. dipstick.
Power Steering Fluid
(3.0L V6 Engine) How to Check Power Steering The fluid level should be between
Fluid MAX and MIN line at room
temperature. If the fluid is on or
To check:
below MIN line, add fluid.
1. Turn the engine off and let it
cool down. What to Use
2. Remove the engine cover. Refer For the proper fluid, see
to Engine Cover on page 9‑9. Recommended Fluids and
The power steering fluid reservoir Lubricants on page 10‑7.
3. Wipe the cap and the top of the
is to the rear of the engine reservoir clean.
compartment on the passenger
side of the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 9‑6.
9-22 Vehicle Care
Washer Fluid Notice: Brakes

. When using concentrated This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc
What to Use washer fluid, follow the brake pads have built-in wear
Read the manufacturer's manufacturer's instructions indicators that make a high-pitched
instructions before refilling the for adding water. warning sound when the brake pads
windshield washer fluid. If operating . Do not mix water with are worn and new pads are needed.
the vehicle in an area where the The sound can come and go or be
ready-to-use washer fluid.
temperature may fall below freezing, heard all the time the vehicle is
Water can cause the solution
use a fluid that has sufficient to freeze and damage the moving, except when applying the
protection against freezing. washer fluid tank and other brake pedal firmly.
Adding Washer Fluid parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
{ WARNING
. Fill the washer fluid tank only The brake wear warning sound
three-quarters full when it is means that soon the brakes will
very cold. This allows for not work well. That could lead to
fluid expansion if freezing an accident. When the brake
occurs, which could damage wear warning sound is heard,
Open the cap with the washer the tank if it is have the vehicle serviced.
symbol on it and add washer fluid completely full.
until full. See Engine Compartment Notice: Continuing to drive with
Overview on page 9‑6 for
. Do not use engine coolant worn-out brake pads could result
reservoir location. (antifreeze) in the windshield in costly brake repair.
washer. It can damage the
vehicle's windshield washer
system and paint.
Vehicle Care 9-23
Some driving conditions or climates Brake Pedal Travel Replacing Brake System Parts
can cause a brake squeal when the
See your dealer/retailer if the brake The braking system on a vehicle is
brakes are first applied or lightly
pedal does not return to normal complex. Its many parts have to be
applied. This does not mean
height, or if there is a rapid increase of top quality and work well together
something is wrong with the brakes.
in pedal travel. This could be a sign if the vehicle is to have really good
Properly torqued wheel nuts are that brake service might be braking. The vehicle was designed
necessary to help prevent brake required. and tested with top-quality brake
pulsation. When tires are rotated, parts. When parts of the braking
inspect brake pads for wear and Brake Adjustment system are replaced, be sure to get
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the Every time the brakes are applied, new, approved replacement parts.
proper sequence to torque with or without the vehicle moving, If this is not done, the brakes might
specifications in Capacities and the brakes adjust for wear. not work properly. For example,
Specifications on page 11‑2. installing disc brake pads that are
Brake linings should always be wrong for the vehicle, can change
replaced as complete axle sets. the balance between the front and
rear brakes — for the worse. The
braking performance expected can
change in many other ways if the
wrong replacement brake parts are
installed.
9-24 Vehicle Care
Brake Fluid There are only two reasons why the installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
brake fluid level in the reservoir as necessary, only when work is
might go down: done on the brake hydraulic system.
. The brake fluid level goes down
because of normal brake lining { WARNING
wear. When new linings are
installed, the fluid level goes If too much brake fluid is added, it
back up. can spill on the engine and burn,
The brake master cylinder reservoir if the engine is hot enough. You
. A fluid leak in the brake or others could be burned, and
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
hydraulic system can also the vehicle could be damaged.
indicated on the reservoir cap. See
cause a low fluid level. Have the
Engine Compartment Overview on Add brake fluid only when work is
brake hydraulic system fixed,
page 9‑6 for the location of the done on the brake hydraulic
since a leak means that sooner
reservoir. system.
or later the brakes will not
work well.
When the brake fluid falls to a low
Do not top off the brake fluid. level, the brake warning light comes
Adding fluid does not correct a leak. on. See Brake System Warning
If fluid is added when the linings are Light on page 4‑21.
worn, there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are
Vehicle Care 9-25
What to Add Notice: Battery

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid . Using the wrong fluid can Refer to the replacement number on
from a sealed container. See badly damage brake the original battery label when a
Recommended Fluids and hydraulic system parts. For new battery is needed.
Lubricants on page 10‑7. example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as
Always clean the brake fluid
reservoir cap and the area around engine oil, in the brake { DANGER
the cap before removing it. This hydraulic system can Battery posts, terminals, and
helps keep dirt from entering the damage brake hydraulic
related accessories contain lead
reservoir. system parts so badly that
and lead compounds, chemicals
they will have to be replaced.
known to the State of California to
Do not let someone put in
{ WARNING the wrong kind of fluid. cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.
With the wrong kind of fluid in the . If brake fluid is spilled on
brake hydraulic system, the the vehicle's painted
brakes might not work well. This surfaces, the paint finish can
could cause a crash. Always use be damaged. Be careful not
the proper brake fluid. to spill brake fluid on the
vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately.
9-26 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Storage All-Wheel Drive If the level is below the bottom

of the filler plug hole, located on
{ WARNING Transfer Case the transfer case, you will need to
add some lubricant. Add enough
When to Check and Change
Batteries have acid that can burn lubricant to raise the level to the
Lubricant
you and gas that can explode. bottom of the filler plug hole.
You can be badly hurt if you are Refer to the Maintenance Schedule A fluid loss could indicate a
not careful. See Jump Starting on to determine how often to check the problem; check and have it
page 9‑74 for tips on working lubricant and when to change it. repaired, if needed.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
around a battery without What to Use
page 10‑2.
getting hurt.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
How to Check Lubricant
Infrequent Usage: Remove the to determine what kind of lubricant
black, negative (−) cable from the to use. See Recommended Fluids
battery to keep the battery from and Lubricants on page 10‑7.
running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle
charger.
To get an accurate reading, the

vehicle should be on a level
surface.
Vehicle Care 9-27
Starter Switch Check 3. Try to start the engine in each 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
gear. The vehicle should start See Parking Brake on
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). page 8‑40.
{ WARNING If the vehicle starts in any other Be ready to apply the regular
When you are doing this position, contact your dealer/ brake immediately if the vehicle
retailer for service. begins to move.
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle 3. With the engine off, turn the
moves, you or others could be Automatic Transmission
ignition to ON/RUN, but do not
injured. Shift Lock Control start the engine. Without
System Check applying the regular brake, try to
1. Before starting this check, be move the shift lever out of
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle. { WARNING P (Park) with normal effort. If the
shift lever moves out of P (Park),
2. Firmly apply both the parking When you are doing this contact your dealer/retailer for
brake and the regular brake. inspection, the vehicle could service.
See Parking Brake on move suddenly. If the vehicle
page 8‑40. moves, you or others could be
Do not use the accelerator injured.
pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it 1. Before starting this check, be
starts. sure there is enough room
around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface.
9-28 Vehicle Care
Ignition Transmission Park Brake and P (Park) Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
Lock Check Mechanism Check your foot on the regular brake, set
While parked, and with the parking the parking brake.
brake set, try to turn the ignition to { WARNING . To check the parking brake's
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever holding ability: With the engine
position. When you are doing this check,
the vehicle could begin to move. running and the transmission in
. The ignition should turn to You or others could be injured N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
LOCK/OFF only when the shift pressure from the regular brake
and property could be damaged.
lever is in P (Park). pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
Make sure there is room in front
held by the parking brake only.
. The ignition key should come of the vehicle in case it begins to
out only in LOCK/OFF. roll. Be ready to apply the regular . To check the P (Park)
brake at once should the vehicle mechanism's holding ability:
Contact your dealer/retailer if
begin to move. With the engine running, shift to
service is required.
P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if
service is required.
Vehicle Care 9-29
Wiper Blade Replacement Front Wiper Blade 3. Install the wiper blade connector
Replacement by sliding into the end of the
Windshield wiper blades should be wiper arm until the square button
inspected for wear and cracking. To replace the front wiper blades: on the wiper blade clicks into
See Scheduled Maintenance on 1. Lift the wiper arm from the place with the wiper arm.
page 10‑2 for more information. windshield until no further 4. Place the wiper arm with the
Replacement blades come in movement is possible. wiper blade in place back on the
different types and are removed in windshield.
different ways. For proper type and
length, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 10‑9.
Notice: Allowing the wiper blade
arm to touch the windshield when
no wiper blade is installed could
damage the windshield. Any 2. Press the square button on the
damage that occurs would not be top side, at the end of the wiper
covered by your warranty. Do not arm, and pull the wiper blade out
allow the wiper blade arm to of the end of the wiper arm.
touch the windshield.
9-30 Vehicle Care
Rear Wiper Blade Replacement 5. Align the wiper blade with the
arm and hold both ends of the
To replace the rear wiper blade:
arm while gently squeezing until
1. Lift the wiper arm from the the blade snaps into place.
liftgate glass until no further
Do not apply excessive force
movement is possible.
during this operation.
2. Hold the wiper arm at the tip with
Reposition the blade in the arm
one hand and hold the wiper
and repeat, if blade is not
blade at the tip with the
correctly positioned.
other hand.
6. Place the wiper arm with the
3. Pull down on the wiper blade.
wiper blade attached back on
The blade will pull away from
4. Place the wiper blade into the the liftgate glass.
the arm.
wiper arm aligning the blade
attachment rivet with the arm
attachment.
Vehicle Care 9-31
. Should be fully assembled and
Headlamp Aiming The vehicle should be properly
prepared as follows. The vehicle: all other work stopped while
The headlamp aiming system has headlamp aiming is being
. Should be placed so the performed.
been preset at the factory.
headlamps are 7.6 m (25 ft) from
If the vehicle is damaged in an a light colored wall.
. Should be normally loaded with
accident, the aim of the headlamps a full tank of fuel and one person
. Must have all four tires on a or 75 kg (160 lbs) sitting on the
may be affected and adjustment
level surface which is level all driver's seat.
may be necessary.
the way to the wall.
It is recommended that a dealer/ . Tires should be properly inflated.
. Should be placed so it is
retailer adjust the headlamps. To Headlamp aiming is done with the
perpendicular to the wall or other
re-aim the headlamps yourself, use vehicle's low-beam headlamps. The
flat surface.
the following procedure. high-beam headlamps will be
. Should not have any snow, ice, correctly aimed if the low-beam
or mud on it. headlamps are aimed properly.
9-32 Vehicle Care
To adjust the vertical aim, do the Notice: Do not cover a headlamp

following: to improve beam cut-off when
1. Open the hood. See Hood on aiming. Covering a headlamp may
page 9‑5 for more information. cause excessive heat build-up
which may cause damage to the
headlamp.
6. Turn on the low-beam
headlamps and place a piece
of cardboard or equivalent in
front of the headlamp not being
adjusted. This allows only the
beam of light from the headlamp
4. At the wall measure from the being adjusted to be seen on the
ground upward (A) to the flat surface.
recorded distance from
Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of on the wall the width of the
the low‐beam headlamp. vehicle at the height of the mark
in Step 4.
3. Measure the distance from the
ground to the aim dot on the
low‐beam headlamp. Record the
distance.
Vehicle Care 9-33
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 9‑37.
For any bulb changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer/retailer.
7. Locate the vertical headlamp 9. Make sure that the light from the
aiming screws, which are under headlamp is positioned at the
the hood near each headlamp bottom edge of the horizontal
assembly. tape line. The lamp on the
The adjustment screw can be left (A) shows the correct
turned with a E8 Torx® socket. headlamp aim. The lamp on the
right (B) shows the incorrect
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw headlamp aim.
until the headlamp beam
is aimed to the horizontal tape 10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for
line. Turn it clockwise or the opposite headlamp.
counterclockwise to raise or
lower the angle of the beam.
9-34 Vehicle Care
Headlamps, Front Turn To replace: 3. If replacing low/high headlamp

bulb, remove the dust cover cap
Signal, Sidemarker, and 1. Turn the tire to reach the access
from the back of the headlamp
Parking Lamps port cap located on front of
wheel well cover. housing by turning the cap
counterclockwise.
4. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove
from lamp assembly.
5. Remove the bulb from the
socket or disconnect bulb
assembly from harness
connector.
6. Install new bulb.
7. Reinstall the lamp socket to
lamp assembly turning
A. Low Beam Headlamp clockwise.
A. Screw
B. High Beam headlamp 8. Replace the dust cover cap on
B. Access Port Cap headlamps.
C. Park/Turn Signal Lamp
2. Remove screw (A) and turn 9. Reinstall the wheel well cover
D. Side Marker Lamp access port cap (B) access port cap and secure by
counterclockwise to remove. installing screw.
Vehicle Care 9-35
Fog Lamps 4. Push the bulb socket into the To replace one of these lamps:
fog lamp assembly and turn 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
To replace one of these bulbs: clockwise to lock it into place. (Manual) on page 1‑8 or
5. Reconnect the bulb socket to the Liftgate (Power) on page 1‑9.
electrical connector.
Taillamps, Turn Signal,

Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
and Back-Up Lamps
1. Locate the fog lamp assembly

under the front facia.
A. Screw
2. Disconnect the bulb socket from
the electrical connector, turn and B. Screw Cover
pull out the bulb assembly. 2. Remove the two screw
3. Remove the old bulb from the covers (B) from the taillamp
bulb socket and push the new assembly.
bulb straight into the bulb socket A. Sidemarker 3. Remove the two screws (A)
until it connects. B. Stoplamp/Turn Signal Lamp/ securing the taillamp assembly.
Taillamp 4. Pull taillamp assembly out of
C. Back-up Lamp vehicle body.
9-36 Vehicle Care
5. Disconnect the lamp wiring License Plate Lamp

harness.
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the liftgate partway. See
Liftgate (Manual) on page 1‑8
or Liftgate (Power) on
A. Bulb Socket
B. Bulb
C. Lamp Assembly
6. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and pull it out. 4. Turn the bulb socket (A)
counterclockwise to remove from
7. Pull the bulb straight out of the
lamp assembly (C).
socket.
Passenger side shown, driver side 5. Pull the bulb (B) straight out of
8. Install the new bulb.
similar the bulb socket.
9. Push the bulb socket in and turn
it clockwise. 2. Push the left end of the lamp
assembly towards the right.
10. Reverse steps 2 through 5 to
reinstall lamp assembly. 3. Pull the lamp assembly down to
remove from liftgate.
Vehicle Care 9-37
6. Push the replacement bulb Replacement Bulbs Electrical System

straight into the bulb socket
and turn the bulb socket Bulb
Exterior Lamp
clockwise to install into lamp Number Fuses
assembly. Back-Up Lamp 921 The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
7. Turn the lamp assembly into the protected from short circuits by
Fog Lamp Front H11
liftgate engaging the clip side fuses. This greatly reduces the
first. Headlamp chance of damage caused by
HB3
High Beam electrical problems.
8. Push on the lamp side opposite
the clip until the lamp assembly Headlamp Look at the silver-colored band
H11
snaps into place. Low Beam inside the fuse. If the band is broken
or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
License Plate Lamp W5WLL
to replace a bad fuse with a new
Parking Lamp/Turn one of the identical size and rating.
T20
Signal Front
There are two fuse blocks in the
Sidemarker Front vehicle: one in the engine
194
and Rear compartment and one in the
instrument panel.
Taillamp/Turn Signal
3157K There is a fuse puller located in the
Lamp/Stop Lamp
engine compartment fuse block.
For replacement bulbs not listed See Engine Compartment Fuse
here, contact your dealer/retailer. Block on page 9‑38. It can be used
to easily remove fuses from the fuse
block.
9-38 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
To remove the fuse block cover,

squeeze the clips on the cover and Engine Compartment Fuse Block
lift it straight up.
The vehicle may not be equipped J-Case Usage J-Case Usage
with all of the fuses and relays Fuses Fuses
shown.
1 Cool Fan 1 Memory Seat
Notice: Spilling liquid on any 5
Module
electrical components on the 2 Cool Fan 2
vehicle may damage it. Always 6 Power Seat – Left
3 Rear Defog
keep the covers on any electrical Instrument Panel
component. Power 7
4 Fuse Block 1
Windows – Right
Vehicle Care 9-39
J-Case Usage Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage

Fuses
Engine Control 32 Horn
18
Instrument Panel Module Battery
8 Right High‐Beam
Fuse Block 2 33
19 Heated Mirror Headlamp
9 Starter
20 Trailer Left Left High‐Beam
34
10 Brake Booster Headlamp
21 Lift Gate Module
11 Sunroof 35 Ignition Even Coil
22 Power Lumbar
Antilock Brake 36 Ignition Odd Coil
12 23 Trailer Right
System Pump
37 Windshield Washer
24 Canister Vent
Instrument Panel
13 38 Front Fog Lamps
Fuse Block 3 Memory Mirror
25
Module Post Catalytic
Power
14 39 Converter Oxygen
Windows – Left Regulated Voltage
Sensor
26 Control Battery
Antilock Brake
15 Sensor Engine Control
System Module 40
Module
Rear Accessory
27
Mini Fuses Usage Power Outlet Pre–Catalytic
41 Converter Oxygen
Transmission 28 Wiper
Sensor
16 Control Module 29 Rear Wiper
Battery Transmission
42
Air Conditioning Control Module
17 Trailer Parking Light 30
Compressor
43 Mirror
31 Rear Latch
9-40 Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses Usage Micro Usage Instrument Panel Fuse

Chassis Control
Relays Block
44
Module Ignition 54 Rear Defogger
45 Spare 55 Cooling Fan Low
46 Rear Drive Module Head Lamp
56
High Beam
Lift Gate Module
47
Logic 57 Cooling Fan Control
Instrument Panel Wiper On/Off
48 58
Fuse Block Ignition Control
49 Heated Seat – Front Air Conditioning
59
Compressor
Chassis Control
50
Module 60 Wiper Speed
Engine Control 61 Fog Lamp The instrument panel fuse block is
51 located on the passenger side panel
Module
62 Engine Control of the center console. To access the
52 Rear Vision Camera fuses, open the fuse panel door
63 Starter
from the passenger side by pulling
Midi Fuse Usage 64 Run/Crank it out.
Electric Power To reinstall the door, insert the tabs
53 Mini Relays Usage on the bottom of the door into the
Steering
65 Cooling Fan High console first, then push the door
back into its original location.
66 Brake Booster
Vehicle Care 9-41
The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses and relays shown. Mini Fuses Usage
Noise Control
7
Module
Body Control
8
Module 4
9 Radio
10 SEO Battery
Ultrasonic Rear
11
Parking Aid Module
Heater, Ventilation
12 and Air Conditioning
Battery
Auxiliary Power
13
Front
Instrument Panel Fuse Block Heater, Ventilation

14 and Air Conditioning
Ignition
Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage
15 Display
1 Steering Wheel DM Body Control
4 Body Control
Module 1 16
2 Spare Module 5
5 Infotainment
3 Spare Auxiliary
Body Control 17
6 Power Rear
Module 7
9-42 Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage J‐Case Usage

Fuses
Instrument Panel 31 Amplifier
18
Cluster Ignition 29 Front Blower Motor
Discrete Logic
32
19 PDI Module Ignition Switch Body Control
40
Module 8
Body Control Communications
20 33
Module 6 Integration Module
Relays Usage
SEO Retained Body Control
21 34 41 LOG Relay
Accessory Power Module 2
22 SDM Ignition 35 SDM Battery Retained Accessory
42
Power Relay
23 Spare Data Link
36
Connection
24 Spare
Instrument Panel
25 PRNDL 37
Cluster Battery
26 Spare
IOS Module
27 Spare 38 (Passenger Sensing
28 Spare System)
39 Spare
Body Control
30
Module 3
Vehicle Care 9-43
Wheels and Tires { WARNING WARNING (Continued)

Tires Poorly maintained and improperly . Overinflated tires are more
used tires are dangerous. likely to be cut, punctured
Your new vehicle comes with
high-quality tires made by a . Overloading your tires can or broken by a sudden
leading tire manufacturer. If you cause overheating as a result impact — such as when
ever have questions about your of too much flexing. You you hit a pothole. Keep
could have an air-out and a tires at the recommended
tire warranty and where to serious accident. See Vehicle pressure.
obtain service, see your vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑24.
Warranty booklet for details. For . Worn, old tires can cause
additional information refer to
. Underinflated tires pose the accidents. If your tread is
same danger as overloaded badly worn, or if your tires
the tire manufacturer. tires. The resulting accident have been damaged,
could cause serious injury. replace them.
Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your
tires are cold. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑50.
(Continued)
9-44 Vehicle Care
Tire Sidewall Labeling and service description. See the Tire Identification Number
“Tire Size” illustration later in this (TIN). The TIN shows the
Useful information about a tire is section for more detail. manufacturer and plant code,
molded into its sidewall. The tire size, and date the tire was
examples below show a typical (B) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria manufactured. The TIN is
passenger vehicle tire and a molded onto both sides of the
compact spare tire sidewall. Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to tire, although only one side may
GM's specific tire performance have the date of manufacture.
criteria have a TPC specification (E) Tire Ply Material : The type
code molded onto the sidewall. of cord and number of plies in
GM's TPC specifications meet or the sidewall and under the tread.
exceed all federal safety (F) Uniform Tire Quality
guidelines. Grading (UTQG): Tire
(C) DOT (Department of manufacturers are required to
Transportation): The grade tires based on three
Department of Transportation performance factors: treadwear,
(DOT) code indicates that traction, and temperature
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example the tire is in compliance with resistance. For more information
the U.S. Department of see Uniform Tire Quality
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a Transportation Motor Vehicle Grading on page 9‑61 .
combination of letters and Safety Standards.
numbers used to define a (G) Maximum Cold Inflation
particular tire's width, height, (D) Tire Identification Number Load Limit: Maximum load
aspect ratio, construction type, (TIN): The letters and numbers that can be carried and the
following the DOT (Department maximum pressure needed to
of Transportation) code is the support that load.
Vehicle Care 9-45
regular road tire has lost air (E) Tire Inflation: The
and gone flat. If your vehicle temporary use tire or compact
has a compact spare tire, spare tire should be inflated to
see Compact Spare Tire on 420 kPa (60 psi). For more
page 9‑73 and If a Tire Goes Flat information on tire pressure and
on page 9‑64 . inflation see Tire Pressure on
(C) Tire Identification Number page 9‑50 .
(TIN): The letters and numbers (F) Tire Size: A combination of
following the DOT (Department letters and numbers define a
of Transportation) code is tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
the Tire Identification Number construction type, and service
Compact Spare Tire Example (TIN). The TIN shows the description. The letter T as the
(A) Tire Ply Material: The type manufacturer and plant code, first character in the tire size
of cord and number of plies in tire size, and date the tire was means the tire is for temporary
the sidewall and under the tread. manufactured. The TIN is use only.
molded onto both sides of the (G) TPC Spec (Tire
(B) Temporary Use Only: The tire, although only one side may
compact spare tire or temporary Performance Criteria
have the date of manufacture. Specification): Original
use tire has a tread life of
approximately 5 000 km (D) Maximum Cold Inflation equipment tires designed to
(3,000 miles) and should not be Load Limit: Maximum load that GM's specific tire performance
driven at speeds over 105 km/h can be carried and the criteria have a TPC specification
(65 mph). The compact spare maximum pressure needed to code molded onto the sidewall.
tire is for emergency use when a support that load. GM's TPC specifications meet or
exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
9-46 Vehicle Care
Tire Designations (B) Tire Width: The three‐digit (E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of
number indicates the tire section the wheel in inches.
Tire Size width in millimeters from (F) Service Description:
The following illustration shows sidewall to sidewall. These characters represent
an example of a typical (C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit the load index and speed rating
passenger vehicle tire size. number that indicates the tire of the tire. The load index
height‐to‐width measurements. represents the load carry
For example, if the tire size capacity a tire is certified to
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in carry. The speed rating is the
item C of the illustration, it would maximum speed a tire is
mean that the tire's sidewall is certified to carry a load.
60 percent as high as it is wide.
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire: (D) Construction Code: A
The United States version of a letter code is used to indicate
metric tire sizing system. The the type of ply construction in
letter P as the first character in the tire. The letter R means
the tire size means a passenger radial ply construction; the
vehicle tire engineered to letter D means diagonal or bias
standards set by the U.S. Tire ply construction; and the letter B
and Rim Association. means belted‐bias ply
construction.
Vehicle Care 9-47
Tire Terminology and Belt: A rubber coated layer of Curb Weight: The weight of a
Definitions cords that is located between motor vehicle with standard and
the plies and the tread. Cords optional equipment including the
Air Pressure: The amount of may be made from steel or other maximum capacity of fuel, oil,
air inside the tire pressing reinforcing materials. and coolant, but without
outward on each square inch passengers and cargo.
of the tire. Air pressure is Bead: The tire bead contains
expressed in psi (pounds per steel wires wrapped by steel DOT Markings: A code molded
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal). cords that hold the tire onto into the sidewall of a tire
the rim. signifying that the tire is in
Accessory Weight: This compliance with the U.S.
means the combined weight Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire
in which the plies are laid at Department of Transportation
of optional accessories. (DOT) motor vehicle safety
Some examples of optional alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of standards. The DOT code
accessories are, automatic includes the Tire Identification
transmission, power steering, the tread.
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
power brakes, power windows, Cold Tire Pressure: The designator which can also
power seats, and air amount of air pressure in a tire, identify the tire manufacturer,
conditioning. measured in psi (pounds per production plant, brand, and
Aspect Ratio: The relationship square inch) or kPa (kilopascal) date of production.
of a tire's height to its width. before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Tire Pressure GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
on page 9‑50 . Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 8‑24 .
9-48 Vehicle Care
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Inflation Pressure: Outward Facing Sidewall: The
Rating for the front axle. See The maximum air pressure to side of an asymmetrical tire that
Vehicle Load Limits on which a cold tire can be inflated. has a particular side that faces
page 8‑24 . The maximum air pressure is outward when mounted on a
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight molded onto the sidewall. vehicle. The side of the tire that
Rating for the rear axle. See Maximum Load Rating: The contains a whitewall, bears
Vehicle Load Limits on load rating for a tire at the white lettering, or bears
page 8‑24 . maximum permissible inflation manufacturer, brand, and/or
pressure for that tire. model name molding that is
Intended Outboard Sidewall : higher or deeper than the same
The side of an asymmetrical tire, Maximum Loaded Vehicle moldings on the other sidewall
that must always face outward Weight: The sum of curb of the tire.
when mounted on a vehicle. weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, and Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric tire used on passenger cars and
unit for air pressure. production options weight.
some light duty trucks and
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: Normal Occupant Weight: The multipurpose vehicles.
A tire used on light duty trucks number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by Recommended Inflation
and some multipurpose Pressure: Vehicle
passenger vehicles. 68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 8‑24 . manufacturer's recommended
Load Index: An assigned tire inflation pressure as shown
number ranging from 1 to 279 Occupant Distribution : on the tire placard. See Tire
that corresponds to the load Designated seating positions. Pressure on page 9‑50 and
carrying capacity of a tire. Vehicle Load Limits on
page 8‑24 .
Vehicle Care 9-49
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic Treadwear Indicators: Narrow Vehicle Capacity Weight:
tire in which the ply cords that bands, sometimes called wear The number of designated
extend to the beads are laid at bars, that show across the seating positions multiplied by
90 degrees to the centerline of tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
the tread. (1/16 inch) of tread remains. cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Rim: A metal support for a tire See When It Is Time for New Limits on page 8‑24 .
and upon which the tire beads Tires on page 9‑58 . Vehicle Maximum Load on the
are seated. UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Tire: Load on an individual tire
Sidewall: The portion of a tire Grading Standards): due to curb weight, accessory
between the tread and the bead. A tire information system that weight, occupant weight, and
provides consumers with cargo weight.
Speed Rating: An ratings for a tire's traction,
alphanumeric code assigned Vehicle Placard: A label
temperature, and treadwear. permanently attached to a
to a tire indicating the maximum Ratings are determined by
speed at which a tire can vehicle showing the vehicle's
tire manufacturers using capacity weight and the original
operate. government testing procedures. equipment tire size and
Traction: The friction between The ratings are molded into the recommended inflation pressure.
the tire and the road surface. sidewall of the tire. See Uniform See “Tire and Loading
The amount of grip provided. Tire Quality Grading on Information Label” under Vehicle
page 9‑61 . Load Limits on page 8‑24 .
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with
the road.
9-50 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure If your tires have too much air For additional information
(over‐inflation), you can get regarding how much weight
Tires need the correct amount of the following: your vehicle can carry, and an
air pressure to operate example of the Tire and Loading
effectively. . Unusual wear
Information label, see Vehicle
Notice: Do not let anyone tell . Poor handling Load Limits on page 8‑24 . How
you that under‐inflation or . Rough ride you load your vehicle affects
over‐inflation is all right. It is vehicle handling and ride
not. If your tires do not have
. Needless damage from comfort. Never load your vehicle
enough air (under‐inflation), road hazards with more weight than it was
you can get the following: A vehicle specific Tire and designed to carry.
. Too much flexing Loading Information label is
attached to your vehicle. This When to Check
. Too much heat label shows your vehicle's Check your tires once a month
. Tire overloading original equipment tires and the or more. Do not forget to check
correct inflation pressures for the compact spare tire, if the
. Premature or your tires when they are cold. vehicle has one. The compact
irregular wear The recommended cold tire spare should be at 60 psi
. Poor handling inflation pressure, shown on the (420 kPa). For additional
. Reduced fuel economy label, is the minimum amount of information regarding the
air pressure needed to support compact spare tire, see
your vehicle's maximum load Compact Spare Tire on
carrying capacity. page 9‑73 .
Vehicle Care 9-51
How to Check If the cold tire inflation pressure Tire Pressure Monitor
Use a good quality pocket-type matches the recommended System
gage to check tire pressure. pressure on the Tire and
Loading Information label, no The Tire Pressure Monitor System
You cannot tell if your tires (TPMS) uses radio and sensor
are properly inflated simply by further adjustment is necessary.
technology to check tire pressure
looking at them. Radial tires may If the inflation pressure is low, levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
look properly inflated even when add air until you reach the the air pressure in your vehicle's
they are under‐inflated. Check recommended amount. tires and transmit tire pressure
the tire's inflation pressure when If you overfill the tire, release air readings to a receiver located in the
the tires are cold. Cold means by pushing on the metal stem vehicle.
your vehicle has been sitting for in the center of the tire valve. Each tire, including the spare
at least three hours or driven no Re‐check the tire pressure with (if provided), should be checked
more than 1.6 km (1 mile). the tire gage. monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
Remove the valve cap from the Be sure to put the valve caps by the vehicle manufacturer on the
tire valve stem. Press the tire back on the valve stems. They vehicle placard or tire inflation
gage firmly onto the valve to help prevent leaks by keeping pressure label. (If your vehicle has
get a pressure measurement. out dirt and moisture. tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
9-52 Vehicle Care
As an added safety feature, your Your vehicle has also been Always check the TPMS malfunction
vehicle has been equipped with a equipped with a TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tire pressure monitoring system indicator to indicate when the tires or wheels on your vehicle to
(TPMS) that illuminates a low system is not operating properly. ensure that the replacement or
tire pressure telltale when one or The TPMS malfunction indicator is alternate tires and wheels allow the
more of your tires is significantly combined with the low tire pressure TPMS to continue to function
under‐inflated. telltale. When the system detects a properly.
Accordingly, when the low tire malfunction, the telltale will flash for See Tire Pressure Monitor
pressure telltale illuminates, you approximately one minute and then Operation on page 9‑53 for
should stop and check your tires as remain continuously illuminated. additional information.
soon as possible, and inflate them This sequence will continue upon
to the proper pressure. Driving on a subsequent vehicle start‐ups as Federal Communications
significantly under‐inflated tire long as the malfunction exists. Commission (FCC) and
causes the tire to overheat and can When the malfunction indicator is Industry and Science Canada
lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation illuminated, the system may not be See Radio Frequency Statement on
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire able to detect or signal low tire page 12‑16 for information
tread life, and may affect the pressure as intended. TPMS regarding Part 15 of the Federal
vehicle's handling and stopping malfunctions may occur for a variety Communications Commission (FCC)
ability. of reasons, including the installation Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry
Please note that the TPMS is of replacement or alternate tires or and Science Canada.
not a substitute for proper tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent
maintenance, and it is the driver's the TPMS from functioning properly.
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under‐inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Vehicle Care 9-53
Tire Pressure Monitor At the same time a message to See Vehicle Load Limits on
check the pressure in a specific tire page 8‑24, for an example of the
Operation appears on the Driver Information Tire and Loading Information label
This vehicle may have a Tire Center (DIC) display. The low tire and its location on your vehicle.
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). pressure warning light and the DIC Also see Tire Pressure on
The TPMS is designed to warn the warning message come on at each page 9‑50.
driver when a low tire pressure ignition cycle until the tires are Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you
condition exists. TPMS sensors are inflated to the correct inflation about a low tire pressure condition
mounted onto each tire and wheel pressure. Using the DIC, tire but it does not replace normal tire
assembly, excluding the spare tire pressure levels can be viewed by maintenance. See Tire Inspection
and wheel assembly. The TPMS the driver. For additional information on page 9‑56, Tire Rotation on
sensors monitor the air pressure in and details about the DIC operation page 9‑56 and Tires on page 9‑43.
the vehicle's tires and transmit the and displays see Driver Information
tire pressure readings to a receiver Center (DIC) on page 4‑27. Notice: Liquid tire sealants could
located in the vehicle. damage the Tire Pressure Monitor
The low tire pressure warning light System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
may come on in cool weather when damage caused by using a tire
the vehicle is first started, and then sealant is not covered by your
turn off as you start to drive. This warranty. Do not use liquid tire
could be an early indicator that the sealants.
air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the
proper pressure.
When a low tire pressure condition
is detected, the TPMS illuminates A Tire and Loading Information
the low tire pressure warning light label, attached to your vehicle,
located on the instrument panel shows the size of your vehicle's
cluster. original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressure for your
vehicle's tires when they are cold.
9-54 Vehicle Care
TPMS Malfunction Light and

. The TPMS sensor matching . Replacement tires or wheels do
Message process was started but not not match your vehicle's original
completed or not completed equipment tires or wheels. Tires
The TPMS will not function properly successfully after rotating the and wheels other than those
if one or more of the TPMS sensors vehicle's tires. The DIC message recommended for your vehicle
are missing or inoperable. When the and TPMS malfunction light could prevent the TPMS from
system detects a malfunction, the should go off once the TPMS functioning properly. See Buying
low tire warning light flashes for sensor matching process is New Tires on page 9‑58.
about one minute and then stays on performed successfully. See
for the remainder of the ignition
. Operating electronic devices or
“TPMS Sensor Matching being near facilities using radio
cycle. A DIC warning message is Process” later in this section.
also displayed. The low tire warning wave frequencies similar to the
light and DIC warning message
. One or more TPMS sensors are TPMS could cause the TPMS
come on at each ignition cycle until missing or damaged. The DIC sensors to malfunction.
the problem is corrected. Some of message and the TPMS If the TPMS is not functioning it
the conditions that can cause the malfunction light should go off cannot detect or signal a low tire
malfunction light and DIC message when the TPMS sensors are condition. See your dealer/retailer
to come on are: installed and the sensor for service if the TPMS malfunction
matching process is performed light and DIC message comes on
. One of the road tires has been successfully. See your dealer/
replaced with the spare tire. The and stays on.
spare tire does not have a
TPMS sensor. The TPMS
malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you
re‐install the road tire containing
the TPMS sensor.
Vehicle Care 9-55
TPMS Sensor Matching tire's air pressure, do not exceed The TPMS sensor matching process
Process the maximum inflation pressure is outlined below:
indicated on the tire's sidewall. 1. Set the parking brake.
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
identification code. Any time you To decrease air-pressure out of a 2. Turn the ignition switch to
rotate your vehicle's tires or replace tire you can use the pointed end of ON/RUN with the engine off.
one or more of the TPMS sensors, the valve cap, a pencil-style air
the identification codes will need to pressure gage, or a key. 3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry
be matched to the new tire/wheel (RKE) transmitter's lock and
You have two minutes to match unlock buttons at the same time
position. The sensors are matched the first tire/wheel position, and
to the tire/wheel positions in the for approximately five seconds.
five minutes overall to match all four The horn sounds twice to signal
following order: driver side front tire, tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer
passenger side front tire, passenger the receiver is in relearn mode
than two minutes, to match the first and Tire Learning Active
side rear tire, and driver side rear tire and wheel, or more than
tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. message displays on the DIC
five minutes to match all four tire screen.
See your dealer/retailer for service. and wheel positions the matching
The TPMS sensors can also be process stops and you need to 4. Start with the driver side
matched to each tire/wheel position start over. front tire.
by increasing or decreasing the
tire's air pressure. If increasing the
9-56 Vehicle Care
5. Remove the valve cap from the 8. Proceed to the driver side rear Tire Inspection
valve cap stem. Activate the tire, and repeat the procedure
TPMS sensor by increasing or in Step 5. The horn sounds We recommend that you
decreasing the tire's air pressure two times to indicate the sensor regularly inspect your vehicle's
for five seconds, or until a identification code has been tires, including the spare tire,
horn chirp sounds. The horn matched to the driver side rear if the vehicle has one, for signs
chirp, which may take up to tire, and the TPMS sensor of wear or damage. See When It
30 seconds to sound, confirms matching process is no longer Is Time for New Tires on
that the sensor identification active. The Tire Learning Active page 9‑58 for more information.
code has been matched to this message on the DIC display
tire and wheel position. screen goes off.
Tire Rotation
6. Proceed to the passenger side 9. Turn the ignition switch to
front tire, and repeat the LOCK/OFF. Tires should be rotated every
procedure in Step 5. 8 000 to 13 000 km (5,000 to
10. Set all four tires to the
8,000 miles). See Scheduled
7. Proceed to the passenger side recommended air pressure
rear tire, and repeat the level as indicated on the Tire Maintenance on page 10‑2 .
procedure in Step 5. and Loading Information label. The purpose of a regular tire
11. Put the valve caps back on the rotation is to achieve a uniform
valve stems. wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that the vehicle
continues to perform most like it
did when the tires were new.
Vehicle Care 9-57
Any time you notice unusual Do not include the compact

wear, rotate the tires as soon as spare tire in the tire rotation. { WARNING
possible and check wheel After the tires have been Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
alignment. Also check for rotated, adjust the front and rear parts to which it is fastened, can
damaged tires or wheels. See inflation pressures as shown on make wheel nuts become loose
When It Is Time for New Tires the Tire and Loading Information after time. The wheel could come
on page 9‑58 and Wheel label. See Tire Pressure on off and cause an accident. When
Replacement on page 9‑63 . page 9‑50 and Vehicle Load changing a wheel, remove any
Limits on page 8‑24 . rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor an emergency, use a cloth or a
System. See Tire Pressure paper towel to do this; but be sure
Monitor Operation on page 9‑53 . to use a scraper or wire brush
Make certain that all wheel nuts later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
are properly tightened. See
on page 9‑64.
“Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on
page 11‑2 .
When rotating the vehicle's tires,

always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
9-58 Vehicle Care
When It Is Time for New The vehicle needs new tires if any wear out before they degrade due to
of the following statements are true: age. If you are unsure about the
Tires need to replace the tires as they get
. You can see the indicators at
Various factors, such as three or more places around older, consult the tire manufacturer
maintenance, temperatures, driving the tire. for more information.
speeds, vehicle loading, and road
conditions influence when you need . You can see cord or fabric Buying New Tires
new tires. showing through the tire's
rubber. GM has developed and matched
. The tread or sidewall is cracked,
specific tires for your vehicle.
cut, or snagged deep enough to The original equipment tires
show cord or fabric. installed on your vehicle, when
it was new, were designed to
. The tire has a bump, bulge,
or split.
meet General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria
. The tire has a puncture, cut, Specification (TPC Spec)
or other damage that cannot be system rating. If you need
repaired well because of the size
replacement tires, GM strongly
or location of the damage.
recommends that you get tires
The rubber in tires degrades over with the same TPC Spec rating.
time. This is also true for the spare This way, your vehicle will
One way to tell when it is time for tire, if the vehicle has one, even
new tires is to check the treadwear continue to have tires that are
if it is not being used. Multiple
indicators, which appear when the conditions affect how fast this aging designed to give the same
tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) or takes place, including temperatures, performance and vehicle safety,
less of tread remaining. loading conditions, and inflation during normal use, as the
pressure maintenance. With proper original tires.
care and maintenance tires typically
Vehicle Care 9-59
GM's exclusive TPC Spec See Tire Inspection on page 9‑56

system considers over a and Tire Rotation on page 9‑56 { WARNING
dozen critical specifications that for information on proper tire If you use bias-ply tires on the
impact the overall performance rotation. vehicle, the wheel rim flanges
of your vehicle, including brake could develop cracks after
system performance, ride and { WARNING many miles of driving. A tire
handling, traction control, and and/or wheel could fail
tire pressure monitoring Mixing tires could cause you
to lose control while driving. suddenly, causing a crash.
performance. GM's TPC Spec Use only radial-ply tires with
number is molded onto the tire's If you mix tires of different
sizes, brands, or types (radial the wheels on the vehicle.
sidewall near the tire size. If the
tires have an all‐season tread and bias-belted tires), the If you must replace your
design, the TPC Spec number vehicle may not handle vehicle's tires with those that do
will be followed by an MS for properly, and you could have not have a TPC Spec number,
mud and snow. See Tire a crash. Using tires of different make sure they are the same
Sidewall Labeling on page 9‑44 sizes, brands, or types may size, load range, speed rating,
for additional information. also cause damage to your and construction type (radial and
vehicle. Be sure to use the bias‐belted tires) as your
GM recommends replacing tires correct size, brand, and type
in sets of four. This is because vehicle's original tires.
of tires on all wheels. It is
uniform tread depth on all tires all right to drive with your
will help keep your vehicle compact spare temporarily, as
performing most like it did when it was developed for use on
the tires were new. Replacing your vehicle. See Compact
less than a full set of tires can Spare Tire on page 9‑73 .
affect the braking and handling
performance of your vehicle.
9-60 Vehicle Care
Vehicles that have a tire Different Size Tires and

pressure monitoring system Wheels
{ WARNING
could give an inaccurate If you add different sized
low‐pressure warning if non‐TPC If you add wheels or tires that are a
different size than your original wheels, your vehicle may not
Spec rated tires are installed provide an acceptable level of
equipment wheels and tires, this
on your vehicle. Non‐TPC could affect the way your vehicle performance and safety if tires not
Spec rated tires may give a performs, including its braking, ride recommended for those wheels
low‐pressure warning that is and handling characteristics, are selected. You may increase
higher or lower than the proper stability, and resistance to rollover. the chance that you will crash and
warning level you would get with Additionally, if your vehicle has suffer serious injury. Only use GM
TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire electronic systems such as anti‐lock specific wheel and tire systems
Pressure Monitor System on brakes, rollover airbags, traction developed for your vehicle, and
page 9‑51 . control, and electronic stability have them properly installed by a
control, the performance of these GM certified technician.
Your vehicle's original systems can be affected.
equipment tires are listed on See Buying New Tires on
the Tire and Loading Information page 9‑58 and Accessories and
Label. See Vehicle Load Limits Modifications on page 9‑3 for
on page 8‑24 , for more additional information.
information about the Tire and
Loading Information Label and
its location on your vehicle.
Vehicle Care 9-61
Uniform Tire Quality most passenger car tires. The Treadwear

Grading Uniform Tire Quality Grading The treadwear grade is a
(UTQG) system does not apply comparative rating based on the
Quality grades can be found to deep tread, winter-type snow
where applicable on the tire wear rate of the tire when tested
tires, space-saver, or temporary under controlled conditions on
sidewall between tread shoulder use spare tires, tires with
and maximum section width. For a specified government test
nominal rim diameters of course. For example, a tire
example: 25 to 30 cm (10 to 12 inches), graded 150 would wear one and
Treadwear 200 Traction AA or to some limited-production a half (1.5) times as well on the
Temperature A tires. government course as a tire
The following information relates While the tires available on graded 100. The relative
to the system developed by the General Motors passenger cars performance of tires depends
United States National Highway and light trucks may vary with upon the actual conditions of
Traffic Safety Administration respect to these grades, they their use, however, and may
(NHTSA), which grades tires must also conform to federal depart significantly from the
by treadwear, traction, and safety requirements and norm due to variations in
temperature performance. This additional General Motors Tire driving habits, service practices,
applies only to vehicles sold in Performance Criteria (TPC) and differences in road
the United States. The grades standards. characteristics and climate.
are molded on the sidewalls of
9-62 Vehicle Care
Traction – AA, A, B, C material of the tire to degenerate Wheel Alignment and Tire
The traction grades, from and reduce tire life, and Balance
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, excessive temperature can
lead to sudden tire failure. The The tires and wheels on the vehicle
and C. Those grades represent were aligned and balanced carefully
the tire's ability to stop on wet grade C corresponds to a level
at the factory to give the longest tire
pavement as measured under of performance which all life and best overall performance.
controlled conditions on passenger car tires must meet Adjustments to wheel alignment and
specified government test under the Federal Motor Vehicle tire balancing will not be necessary
surfaces of asphalt and Safety Standard No. 109. on a regular basis. However, if there
concrete. A tire marked C may Grades B and A represent is unusual tire wear or the vehicle
have poor traction performance. higher levels of performance on pulls to one side or the other, the
the laboratory test wheel than alignment should be checked. If the
Temperature – A, B, C the minimum required by law. vehicle vibrates when driving on a
It should be noted that the smooth road, the tires and wheels
The temperature grades are might need to be rebalanced. See
A (the highest), B, and C, temperature grade for this tire is
your dealer/retailer for proper
representing the tire's resistance established for a tire that is diagnosis.
to the generation of heat and its properly inflated and not
ability to dissipate heat when overloaded. Excessive speed,
tested under controlled underinflation, or excessive
conditions on a specified indoor loading, either separately or in
laboratory test wheel. Sustained combination, can cause heat
high temperature can cause the buildup and possible tire failure.
Vehicle Care 9-63
Wheel Replacement Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or Using the wrong replacement { WARNING
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
Putting a used wheel on the
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and nuts on your vehicle can be
vehicle is dangerous. You cannot
wheel nuts should be replaced. dangerous. It could affect the
If the wheel leaks air, replace it know how it has been used or
braking and handling of your
(except some aluminum wheels, how far it has been driven.
vehicle, make your tires lose air
which can sometimes be repaired). It could fail suddenly and cause a
and make you lose control. You
See your dealer/retailer if any of crash. If you have to replace a
could have a collision in which
these conditions exist. wheel, use a new GM original
you or others could be injured.
equipment wheel.
Your dealer/retailer will know the Always use the correct wheel,
kind of wheel you need. wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
Each new wheel should have the replacement.
same load-carrying capacity,
Notice: The wrong wheel can
diameter, width, offset, and be
also cause problems with bearing
mounted the same way as the one it
life, brake cooling, speedometer
replaces.
or odometer calibration,
If you need to replace any of the headlamp aim, bumper height,
wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, vehicle ground clearance, and tire
or Tire Pressure Monitor System or tire chain clearance to the
(TPMS) sensors, replace them only body and chassis.
with new GM original equipment
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for
the vehicle.
9-64 Vehicle Care
Tire Chains WARNING (Continued)

A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction
{ WARNING vehicle's wheels. If you do find you would use in a skid. In any rear
traction devices that will fit, install blowout remove your foot from the
Do not use tire chains. There is them on the front tires. accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle
not enough clearance. Tire chains
under control by steering the way
used on a vehicle without the If a Tire Goes Flat you want the vehicle to go. It may
proper amount of clearance can be very bumpy and noisy, but you
cause damage to the brakes, It is unusual for a tire to blowout
while you are driving, especially if can still steer. Gently brake to a
suspension or other vehicle parts. stop, well off the road if possible.
The area damaged by the tire you maintain your vehicle's tires
chains could cause you to lose properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is
control of the vehicle and you or much more likely to leak out slowly. { WARNING
But if you should ever have a
others may be injured in a crash. Lifting a vehicle and getting
blowout, here are a few tips about
Use another type of traction what to expect and what to do: under it to do maintenance or
device only if its manufacturer repairs is dangerous without the
If a front tire fails, the flat tire appropriate safety equipment and
recommends it for use on the creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
vehicle and tire size combination training. If a jack is provided with
toward that side. Take your foot off
and road conditions. Follow that the vehicle, it is designed only for
the accelerator pedal and grip the
manufacturer's instructions. To steering wheel firmly. Steer to changing a flat tire. If it is used for
help avoid damage to the vehicle, maintain lane position, and then anything else, you or others could
drive slowly, readjust or remove gently brake to a stop well out of the be badly injured or killed if the
the device if it is contacting the traffic lane. vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
vehicle, and do not spin the is provided with the vehicle, only
(Continued) use it for changing a flat tire.
Vehicle Care 9-65
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire

and wheel damage by driving slowly WARNING (Continued)
to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard 3. Turn off the engine and do
Warning Flashers on page 5‑2. not restart while the vehicle
is raised.
{ WARNING 4. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
Changing a tire can be
dangerous. The vehicle can slip To be certain the vehicle will not
off the jack and roll over or fall on move, put blocks at the front and
you or other people. You and they rear of the tire farthest away from
could be badly injured or even the one being changed. That A. Wheel Block
killed. Find a level place to would be the tire on the other B. Flat Tire
change your tire. To help prevent side, at the opposite end of the
vehicle. The following information explains
the vehicle from moving: how to repair or change a tire.
1. Set the parking brake firmly. When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),
2. Put an automatic use the following example as a
transmission shift lever in guide to assist you in the placement
P (Park), or shift a manual of wheel blocks (A).
transmission to 1 (First) or
R (Reverse).
(Continued)
9-66 Vehicle Care
Tire Changing Removing the Flat Tire and

Installing the Spare Tire
Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools 1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
To access the spare tire and tools: Flat on page 9‑64 for more
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate information.
(Manual) on page 1‑8 or 2. For vehicles with wheel nut
Liftgate (Power) on page 1‑9. caps, turn the wheel wrench
2. Lift the load floor up. counterclockwise to loosen and
remove them.
Do not try to remove plastic caps
4. Turn the retainer nut from the cover or center cap.
counterclockwise and remove
the spare tire. 3. For vehicles with a wheel cover
or center cap, pull the cover or
5. Place the spare tire next to the center cap away from the wheel
tire being changed. to remove it. Store the wheel
cover in the cargo area until you
have the flat tire repaired or
replaced.
3. Remove the extension (A),

wheel wrench (B) and jack (C).
Place the tools next to the tire
being changed.
Vehicle Care 9-67
Notice: Make sure that the jack

lift head is in the correct position
or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty.
4. Turn the wheel wrench Rear

counterclockwise to loosen all
6. Position the jack lift head at the
the wheel nuts, but do not
jack location nearest the flat tire.
remove them yet.
The location is indicated by a
5. Place the jack near the flat tire. mark on the bottom edge of the
Front front and rear door plastic
molding. The jack must not be
used in any other position.
9-68 Vehicle Care
{ WARNING
Raising your vehicle with the
jack improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help
avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
Place the jack notch (A) under 8. Fit the jack handle extension
the frame rail seam (B). { WARNING onto the jack by sliding the hook
7. Put the compact spare tire through the end of the jack.
Lifting a vehicle and getting
near you. under it to do maintenance or
repairs is dangerous without the
{ WARNING appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
Getting under a vehicle when it is the vehicle, it is designed only for
jacked up is dangerous. If the changing a flat tire. If it is used for
vehicle slips off the jack, you anything else, you or others could
could be badly injured or killed. be badly injured or killed if the
Never get under a vehicle when it vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is supported only by a jack. is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
Vehicle Care 9-69
9. Insert the other end of the jack 10. Place the jack under the 11. Raise the vehicle by turning the
handle into the wrench. vehicle. jack handle clockwise. Raise
the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough
room for the road tire to clear
the ground.
9-70 Vehicle Care
WARNING (Continued) { WARNING

paper towel to do this; but be sure Never use oil or grease on bolts
to use a scraper or wire brush or nuts because the nuts might
later, if needed, to get all the rust come loose. The vehicle's wheel
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat could fall off, causing a crash.
on page 9‑64.
16. Reinstall the wheel nuts.
Tighten each nut by hand until
the wheel is held against
the hub.
12. Remove all of the wheel nuts. 17. Lower the vehicle by turning
the jack handle
13. Remove the flat tire. counterclockwise.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the Wheel nuts that are improperly or
parts to which it is fastened, can incorrectly tightened can cause
make wheel nuts become loose the wheels to become loose or
after time. The wheel could come come off. The wheel nuts should
off and cause an accident. When 14. Remove any rust or dirt from
the wheel bolts, mounting be tightened with a torque wrench
changing a wheel, remove any to the proper torque specification
surfaces, and spare wheel.
rust or dirt from places where the after replacing. Follow the torque
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In 15. Place the compact spare tire
specification supplied by the
an emergency, use a cloth or a on the wheel-mounting surface.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 9-71
When reinstalling the wheel cover or

WARNING (Continued) center cap on the full-size tire,
tighten all five plastic caps hand
aftermarket manufacturer when snug with the aid of the wheel
using accessory locking wheel wrench and tighten them with the
nuts. See Capacities and wheel wrench an additional one‐
Specifications on page 11‑2 for quarter of a turn.
original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications. Notice: Wheel covers will not fit
on your vehicle's compact spare.
Notice: Improperly tightened If you try to put a wheel cover on
wheel nuts can lead to brake the compact spare, the cover or
pulsation and rotor damage. To the spare could be damaged.
18. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in
avoid expensive brake repairs,
a crisscross sequence, as
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
shown.
the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification. See 19. Lower the jack all the way and
Capacities and Specifications on remove the jack from under the
page 11‑2 for the wheel nut vehicle.
torque specification. 20. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly
with the wheel wrench.
9-72 Vehicle Care
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire To store the flat tire: 3. Put the flat tire in the rear
and Tools storage area with the valve stem
pointing toward the rear of the
vehicle.
{ WARNING
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
1. Remove the cable package. The

cable is stored in a plastic bag
under the compact spare tire.
2. Remove the small center cap by 4. Pull the cable (A) through the
tapping the back of the cap with door striker (D) then the center
the extension of the shaft, if the of the wheel (C).
vehicle has aluminum wheels.
Vehicle Care 9-73
Compact Spare Tire
{ WARNING
Driving with more than one
compact spare tire at a time could
result in loss of braking and
handling. This could lead to a
crash and you or others could be
injured. Use only one compact
spare tire at a time.
5. Hook the cable onto the outside 8. Make sure the metal tube is If this vehicle has a compact spare
portion of the liftgate hinges (B). centered at the striker. Push the tire it was fully inflated when the
6. Hook the other end of the cable tube toward the front of the vehicle was new, however, it can
onto the outside portion of the vehicle. lose air after a time. Check the
liftgate hinge on the other side of 9. Close the liftgate and make sure inflation pressure regularly. It should
the vehicle. it is latched properly. be 420 kPa (60 psi).
7. Pull on the cable to make sure it The compact spare is for temporary After installing the compact spare
is secure. use only. Replace the compact on the vehicle, stop as soon as
spare tire with a full-size tire as possible and make sure the spare
soon as you can. tire is correctly inflated. The
compact spare is made to perform
well at speeds up to 105 km/h
(65 mph) for distances up to
5 000 km (3,000 miles), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size
tire repaired or replaced at your
9-74 Vehicle Care
convenience. Of course, it is best to Jump Starting

replace the spare with a full-size tire { WARNING
as soon as possible. The spare tire Jump starting can be used on
will last longer and be in good vehicles with run‐down batteries by Using an open flame near a
shape in case it is needed again. using jumper cables and another battery can cause battery gas to
vehicle. explode. People have been hurt
Notice: When the compact doing this, and some have been
spare is installed, do not take
the vehicle through an automatic { WARNING blinded. Use a flashlight if you
need more light.
car wash with guide rails. The
compact spare can get caught on Batteries can hurt you. They can Be sure the battery has enough
the rails which can damage the be dangerous because: water. You do not need to add
tire, wheel and other parts of the . They contain acid that can water to the battery installed in
vehicle. burn you. your new vehicle. But if a battery
Do not use the compact spare on . They contain gas that can has filler caps, be sure the right
other vehicles. explode or ignite. amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that
Do not mix the compact spare tire or . They contain enough first. If you do not, explosive gas
wheel with other wheels or tires. electricity to burn you. could be present.
They will not fit. Keep the spare tire
and its wheel together. If you do not follow these steps Battery fluid contains acid that
exactly, some or all of these can burn you. Do not get it on
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the things can hurt you.
compact spare. Using them can you. If you accidentally get it in
damage the vehicle and can your eyes or on your skin, flush
damage the chains too. Do not the place with water and get
use tire chains on the compact medical help immediately.
spare.
Vehicle Care 9-75
Be sure to use the following steps to Notice: If the jumper cables are 2. The vehicles should be close
do it safely. Ignoring these steps connected or removed in the enough for the jumper cables to
could result in costly damage to the wrong order, electrical shorting reach, but the vehicles should
vehicle that would not be covered may occur and damage the not be touching. Touching could
by the warranty. vehicle. The repairs would not be cause grounding and possible
Trying to start the vehicle by covered by the vehicle warranty. electrical system damage.
pushing or pulling it will not work, Always connect and remove the Put both vehicles in P (Park)
and it could damage the vehicle. jumper cables in the correct and set the parking brake firmly.
order, making sure that the
Notice: If you leave the radio or cables do not touch each other or 3. Unplug accessories plugged into
other accessories on during the other metal. the cigarette lighter or the
jump starting procedure, they accessory power outlet. Turn off
could be damaged. The repairs 1. The vehicle used to jump start the radio and all lamps that are
would not be covered by the must have 12-volt battery with a not needed. Turn off the ignition
warranty. Always turn off the negative ground. on both vehicles.
radio and other accessories when Notice: If the other vehicle's
jump starting the vehicle. system is not a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both
vehicles can be damaged. Only
use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump
start your vehicle.
9-76 Vehicle Care
4. Locate the positive (+) and 5. The remote positive (+) 8. Do not let the other end
negative (−) terminals on both terminal (A) is located on the touch metal. Connect it to
vehicles. Some vehicles have underhood fuse block, on the the positive (+) terminal of the
remote jump starting terminals. driver side. Lift the red cap to good battery. Use a remote
uncover the terminal. positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
The remote negative (−) has one.
terminal (B) is a stud behind the 9. Connect the black negative (−)
metal tab stamped with GND (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal
near the driver side strut tower. of the good battery. Use a
6. The jumper cables should be in remote negative (−) terminal if
good working condition with no the vehicle has one.
loose or missing insulation. The Do not let the other end touch
vehicles could be damaged if anything until the next step. The
they are not. other end of the negative (−)
7. Connect the red positive (+) cable does not go to the dead
cable to the positive (+) terminal battery. It goes to a heavy,
on the vehicle with the dead unpainted metal engine part or
{ WARNING battery. Use a remote to a remote negative (−) terminal
positive (+) terminal if the on the vehicle with the dead
An electric fan can start up even battery.
vehicle has one.
and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
Vehicle Care 9-77
10. Connect the other end of the To disconnect the jumper cables
negative (−) cable away from from both vehicles:
the dead battery, but not near 1. Disconnect the black
engine parts that move. negative (−) cable from the
11. Start the vehicle with the good vehicle that had the dead
battery and run the engine. battery.
12. Press the unlock symbol on 2. Disconnect the black
the remote keyless entry negative (−) cable from the
transmitter to disarm the vehicle with the good battery.
security system, if equipped. 3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
13. Try to start the vehicle that had cable from the vehicle with the
the dead battery. If it will not Jumper Cable Removal good battery.
start after a few tries, it needs 4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine
service. cable from the other vehicle.
Part or Remote Negative (−)
Notice: If the jumper cables are Terminal 5. Return the underhood fuse block
connected or removed in the cover to its original position,
B. Good Battery or Remote
wrong order, electrical shorting if applicable.
Positive (+) and Remote
may occur and damage the
Negative (−) Terminals
vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. C. Dead Battery or Remote
Always connect and remove the Positive (+) Terminal
jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or
other metal.
9-78 Vehicle Care
Towing Recreational Vehicle Here are some important things to

consider before recreational vehicle
Towing towing:
Towing the Vehicle Recreational vehicle towing means . What is the towing capacity
To avoid damage, the disabled towing the vehicle behind another of the towing vehicle? Be
vehicle should be towed with all vehicle – such as behind a sure to read the tow
four wheels off the ground. Consult motorhome. The two most common vehicle manufacturer's
your dealer/retailer or a professional types of recreational vehicle towing recommendations.
towing service if the disabled are known as dinghy towing and
vehicle must be towed. See dolly towing. Dinghy towing is . What is the distance that will be
Roadside Assistance Program on towing the vehicle with all four travelled? Some vehicles have
page 12‑6. wheels on the ground. Dolly towing restrictions on how far and how
is towing the vehicle with two long they can tow.
To tow the vehicle behind
wheels on the ground and two . Is the proper towing equipment
another vehicle for recreational
wheels up on a device known as a going to be used? See your
purposes — such as behind a
dolly. dealer/retailer or trailering
motorhome, see Recreational
Vehicle Towing following. professional for additional
advice and equipment
recommendations.
. Is the vehicle ready to be
towed? Just as preparing the
vehicle for a long trip, make sure
the vehicle is prepared to be
towed.
Vehicle Care 9-79
Dinghy Towing 4. Turn all accessories off.

Front-wheel‐drive and 5. To prevent the battery from
all-wheel-drive vehicles may be draining while the vehicle is
dinghy towed from the front. These being towed, remove fuse 32,
vehicles can also be towed by the Discrete Logic Ignition
placing them on a platform trailer Switch fuse, from the instrument
with all four wheels off of the panel fuse block and store it in a
ground. For other towing options, safe location. See Instrument
see “Dolly Towing” following in this Panel Fuse Block on page 9‑40.
section. Notice: If the vehicle is towed
For vehicles being dinghy towed, without performing each of the
the vehicle should be run at the steps listed under “Dinghy
To tow the vehicle from the front
beginning of each day and at each Towing,” the automatic
with all four wheels on the ground:
RV fuel stop for about five minutes. transmission could be damaged.
This will ensure proper lubrication of 1. Position the vehicle that will be Be sure to follow all steps of the
transmission components. towed and secure it to the dinghy towing procedure prior to
towing vehicle. and after towing the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition key to Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) is
ACC/ACCESSORY. exceeded while towing the
3. Shift the transmission to vehicle, it could be damaged.
N (Neutral). Never exceed 105 km/h (65 mph)
while towing the vehicle.
9-80 Vehicle Care
Once the destination has been Notice: Do not tow a vehicle with Dolly Towing
reached: the front drive wheels on the (Front-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles)
1. Set the parking brake. ground if one of the front tires is
a compact spare tire. Towing with
2. Shift the transmission to two different tire sizes on the
P (Park). front of the vehicle can cause
3. Turn the ignition key to severe damage to the
LOCK/OFF. transmission.
4. Install fuse 32, the Discrete Dolly Towing (All-Wheel‐Drive
Logic Ignition Switch fuse. See Vehicles)
Instrument Panel Fuse Block on
All-wheel‐drive vehicles should not
page 9‑40.
be towed with two wheels on the
5. Start the engine and let it idle for ground. To properly tow these
more than three minutes before vehicles, they should be placed on
driving the vehicle. a platform trailer with all four wheels To tow the vehicle from the front
Notice: Too much or too off of the ground or dinghy towed with the rear wheels on the ground,
little fluid can damage the from the front. do the following:
transmission. Be sure that the 1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
transmission fluid is at the proper
level before towing with all four 2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
wheels on the ground. 3. Set the parking brake.
Vehicle Care 9-81
4. Secure the vehicle to the dolly. Appearance Care

5. Follow the dolly manufacturer's
instructions for preparing the Exterior Care
vehicle and dolly for towing.
6. Release the parking brake.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/
Lenses
Towing the Vehicle From Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
the Rear soft cloth and a car washing soap to
clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing
the Vehicle” later in this section.
Notice: Towing the vehicle from
the rear could damage it. Also,
Finish Care
repairs would not be covered by Occasional waxing or mild polishing
the vehicle warranty. Never have of the vehicle by hand may be
the vehicle towed from the rear. necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
9-82 Vehicle Care
If the vehicle has a basecoat/ Exterior painted surfaces are Washing the Vehicle
clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat subject to aging, weather and
To preserve the vehicle's finish,
gives more depth and gloss to the chemical fallout that can take their
keep it clean by washing it often.
colored basecoat. Always use toll over a period of years. To keep
waxes and polishes that are the paint finish looking new, keep Do not wash the vehicle in
non-abrasive and made for a the vehicle garaged or covered direct sunlight and use a car
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. whenever possible. washing soap.
Notice: Machine compounding or Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Notice: Certain cleaners contain
aggressive polishing on a Parts chemicals that can damage the
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish emblems or nameplates on the
Bright metal parts should be vehicle. Check the cleaning
may damage it. Use only
cleaned regularly to keep their product label. If it states that it
non-abrasive waxes and polishes
luster. Wash with water or use should not be used on plastic
that are made for a basecoat/
chrome polish on chrome or parts, do not use it on the vehicle
clearcoat paint finish on the
stainless steel trim, if necessary. or damage may occur and it
vehicle.
Use special care with aluminum would not be covered by the
Foreign materials such as calcium
trim. To avoid damaging protective warranty.
chloride and other salts, ice melting
trim, never use auto or chrome Do not use cleaning agents that are
agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
polish, steam or caustic soap to petroleum based or that contain
bird droppings, chemicals from
clean aluminum. A coating of acid or abrasives, as they can
industrial chimneys, etc., can
wax, rubbed to high polish, is damage the paint, metal or plastic
damage the vehicle's finish if they
recommended for all bright metal on the vehicle. Approved cleaning
remain on painted surfaces. Wash
parts. products can be obtained from
the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive your dealer/retailer. Follow all
cleaners that are marked safe for manufacturer directions regarding
painted surfaces to remove foreign correct product usage, necessary
matter.
Vehicle Care 9-83
safety precautions and appropriate Weatherstrips Notice: Chrome wheels and other
disposal of any vehicle care chrome trim may be damaged if
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will
product. the vehicle is not washed after
make them last longer, seal better,
Rinse the vehicle well, before driving on roads that have been
and not stick or squeak. Apply
washing and after to remove all sprayed with magnesium, calcium
silicone grease with a clean cloth.
cleaning agents completely. If they or sodium chloride. These
During very cold, damp weather
are allowed to dry on the surface, chlorides are used on roads for
frequent application may be
they could stain. conditions such as ice and dust.
required. See Recommended Fluids
Always wash the vehicle's
Dry the finish with a soft, clean and Lubricants on page 10‑7.
chrome with soap and water after
chamois or an all-cotton towel to Wheels and Trim — Aluminum exposure.
avoid surface scratches and water or Chrome
spotting. Notice: Using strong soaps,
The vehicle may have either chemicals, abrasive polishes,
High pressure car washes could aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
cause water to enter the vehicle. that contain acid on aluminum or
Avoid using high pressure washes Keep the wheels clean using a soft chrome-plated wheels, could
closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to the clean cloth with mild soap and damage the surface of the
surface of the vehicle. Use of power water. Rinse with clean water. After wheel(s). The repairs would not
washers exceeding 8,274 kPa rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft be covered by the vehicle
(1,200 psi) can result in damage or clean towel. A wax may then be warranty. Use only approved
removal of paint and decals. applied. cleaners on aluminum or
Notice: Conveyor systems on chrome-plated wheels.
some automatic car washes could The surface of these wheels is
damage the vehicle. There may similar to the painted surface of the
not be enough clearance for the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
undercarriage. Check with the car chemicals, abrasive polishes,
wash manager before using the abrasive cleaners, cleaners with
automatic car wash. acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
9-84 Vehicle Care
on them because the surface could Windshield and Wiper Blades Tires
be damaged. Do not use chrome
Clean the outside of the windshield Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to
polish on aluminum wheels.
with glass cleaner. clean the tires.
Notice: Using chrome polish on
Clean the rubber blades using a lint Notice: Using petroleum-based
aluminum wheels could damage
free cloth or paper towel soaked tire dressing products on the
the wheels. The repairs would
with windshield washer fluid or a vehicle may damage the paint
not be covered by the vehicle
mild detergent. Wash the windshield finish and/or tires. When applying
warranty. Use chrome polish on
thoroughly when cleaning the a tire dressing, always wipe off
chrome wheels only.
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and any overspray from all painted
Use chrome polish only on a buildup of vehicle wash/wax surfaces on the vehicle.
chrome-plated wheels, but avoid treatments may cause wiper
any painted surface of the wheel, streaking. Replace the wiper blades Sheet Metal Damage
and buff off immediately after if they are worn or damaged. If the vehicle is damaged and
application. requires sheet metal repair or
Wipers can be damaged by:
Notice: Driving the vehicle replacement, make sure the body
. Extreme dusty conditions repair shop applies anti-corrosion
through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire . Sand and salt material to parts repaired or
cleaning brushes, could damage replaced to restore corrosion
. Heat and sun protection.
the aluminum or chrome-plated
. Snow and ice, without proper
wheels. The repairs would not be Original manufacturer replacement
covered by the vehicle warranty. removal parts will provide the corrosion
Never drive a vehicle that has protection while maintaining the
aluminum or chrome-plated vehicle warranty.
wheels through an automatic car
wash that uses silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes.
Vehicle Care 9-85
Finish Damage At least every spring, flush these Interior Care

materials from the underbody with
Any stone chips, fractures or deep The vehicle's interior will continue to
plain water. Clean any areas where
scratches in the finish should be look its best if it is cleaned often.
mud and debris can collect. Dirt
repaired right away. Bare metal will Dust and dirt can accumulate on the
packed in close areas of the frame
corrode quickly and may develop upholstery and cause damage to
should be loosened before being
into major repair expense. the carpet, fabric, leather, and
flushed. Your dealer/retailer or an
Minor chips and scratches can be underbody car washing system can plastic surfaces. Stains should be
repaired with touch-up materials do this. removed quickly as extreme heat
available from your dealer/retailer. could cause them to set rapidly.
Larger areas of finish damage can Chemical Paint Spotting
Lighter colored interiors may
be corrected in your dealer's/ Some weather and atmospheric require more frequent cleaning.
retailer's body and paint shop. conditions can create a chemical Newspapers and garments that can
fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall transfer color to home furnishings
Underbody Maintenance
upon and attack painted surfaces on can also transfer color to the
Chemicals used for ice and snow the vehicle. This damage can take vehicle's interior.
removal and dust control can collect two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped
Remove dust from small buttons
on the underbody. If these are not discolorations, and small, irregular
and knobs with a small brush with
removed, corrosion and rust can dark spots etched into the paint
soft bristles.
develop on the underbody parts surface.
such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
9-86 Vehicle Care
Your dealer/retailer has products for Cleaners can contain solvents that
. Never apply heavy pressure or
cleaning the vehicle's interior. When can become concentrated in the rub aggressively with a cleaning
cleaning the vehicle's interior, only vehicle's interior. Before using cloth. Use of heavy pressure can
use cleaners specifically designed cleaners, read and adhere to all damage the interior and does
for the surfaces that are being safety instructions on the label. not improve the effectiveness of
cleaned. Permanent damage can While cleaning the vehicle's interior, soil removal.
result from using cleaners on maintain adequate ventilation by . Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
surfaces for which they were not opening the vehicle's doors and Avoid laundry detergents or
intended. Apply the cleaner directly windows. dishwashing soaps with
to the cleaning cloth to prevent Do not clean the interior using the degreasers. Using too much
over-spray. Remove any accidental following cleaners or techniques: soap will leave a residue that
over-spray from other surfaces leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
immediately. . Never use a knife or any other For liquid cleaners, about
sharp object to remove a soil 20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners from any interior surface.
when cleaning glass surfaces on water is a good guide.
the vehicle, could scratch the . Never use a stiff brush. It can . Do not heavily saturate the
glass and/or cause damage to the cause damage to the vehicle's upholstery while cleaning.
rear window defogger. When interior surfaces.
. Damage to the vehicle's interior
cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass may result from the use of many
cleaner. organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
Vehicle Care 9-87
Fabric/Carpet 3. Start on the outside edge of the Leather

soil and gently rub toward the
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft To remove dust, a soft cloth
center. Continue cleaning, using
brush attachment to remove dust dampened with water can be used.
a clean area of the cloth each
and loose dirt. A canister vacuum If a more thorough cleaning is
time it becomes soiled.
with a beater bar in the nozzle may necessary, a soft cloth dampened
only be used on floor carpet and 4. Continue to gently rub the with a mild soap solution can be
carpeted floor mats. For soils, soiled area. used. Allow the leather to dry
always try to remove them first with 5. If the soil is not completely naturally. Do not use heat, steam,
plain water or club soda. Before removed, use a mild soap or spot lifters or spot removers,
cleaning, gently remove as much of solution and repeat the cleaning or shoe polish on leather. Many
the soil as possible using one of the process with plain water. commercial leather cleaners
following techniques: and coatings that are sold to
If any of the soil remains, a preserve and protect leather
. For liquids: gently blot the commercial fabric cleaner or spot
remaining soil with a paper may permanently change the
lifter may be necessary. Test a small appearance and feel of the leather
towel. Allow the soil to absorb hidden area for colorfastness before
into the paper towel until no and are not recommended. Do not
using a commercial upholstery use silicone or wax-based products,
more can be removed. cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally or those containing organic solvents
. For solid dry soils: remove as cleaned area gives any impression to clean the vehicle's interior
much as possible and then that a ring formation may result, because they can alter the
vacuum. clean the entire surface. appearance by increasing the gloss
To clean: A paper towel can be used to blot in a non-uniform manner.
excess moisture from the fabric or
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white
carpet after the cleaning process.
cloth with water or club soda.
2. Remove excess moisture.
9-88 Vehicle Care
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Some commercial products may

Other Plastic Surfaces increase gloss on the instrument
panel. The increase in gloss may
To remove dust, a soft cloth cause annoying reflections in the
dampened with water can be used. windshield and even make it difficult
If a more thorough cleaning is to see through the windshield under
necessary, a clean soft cloth certain conditions.
dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust Care of Safety Belts
and dirt. Never use spot lifters or
Keep belts clean and dry.
removers on plastic surfaces.
Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve { WARNING
and protect soft plastic surfaces
may permanently change the Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
appearance and feel of the interior It may severely weaken them. In
and are not recommended. Do not a crash, they might not be able to
use silicone or wax-based products, provide adequate protection.
or those containing organic solvents Clean safety belts only with mild
to clean the vehicle's interior soap and lukewarm water.
because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss
in a non-uniform manner.
Service and Maintenance 10-1
Service and General Information Because of all the different ways

people use vehicles, maintenance
Maintenance Notice: Maintenance intervals,
checks, inspections,
needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services.
recommended fluids, and Please read the information under
General Information lubricants are necessary to keep Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 this vehicle in good working the vehicle in good condition, see
condition. Damage caused by your dealer/retailer.
Scheduled Maintenance failure to follow scheduled
The maintenance schedule is for
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 10-2 maintenance might not be
vehicles that:
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Recommended Fluids, . Carry passengers and cargo
Lubricants, and Parts Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
within recommended limits on
Recommended Fluids and keep the vehicle in good working
the Tire and Loading Information
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 condition, improves fuel economy,
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
Maintenance Replacement and reduces vehicle emissions for
on page 8‑24.
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 better air quality.
. Are driven on reasonable road
Maintenance Records surfaces within legal driving
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 10-10 limits.
10-2 Service and Maintenance
. Are driven off-road in the dealer/retailer has specially trained
recommended manner. See service technicians, uses genuine
Scheduled
Off-Road Driving on page 8‑8. GM replacement parts, as well as, Maintenance
. Use the recommended fuel. See up to date tools and equipment to
Recommended Fuel on ensure fast and accurate When the Change Engine Oil
page 8‑54. diagnostics. Soon Message Displays
The proper replacement parts, Change engine oil and filter. See
{ WARNING fluids, and lubricants to use are Engine Oil on page 9‑10. An
Emission Control Service.
listed in Recommended Fluids and
Performing maintenance work can Lubricants on page 10‑7 and When the Change Engine Oil Soon
be dangerous. Some jobs can Maintenance Replacement Parts on message displays, service is
cause serious injury. Perform page 10‑9. We recommend the use required for the vehicle as soon
maintenance work only if you of genuine parts from your as possible, within the next
have the required know-how dealer/retailer. 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under
and the proper tools and Rotation of New Tires the best conditions, the engine oil
equipment. If in doubt, see your life system might not indicate the
dealer/retailer to have a qualified To maintain ride, handling, and need for vehicle service for more
technician do the work. See performance of the vehicle, it is than a year. The engine oil and filter
Doing Your Own Service Work on important that the first rotation must be changed at least once a
page 9‑4. service for new tires be performed year and the oil life system must
when they have 8 000 to 13 000 km be reset. Your dealer/retailer has
At your General Motors (5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire trained service technicians who will
dealer/retailer, you can be certain Rotation on page 9‑56. perform this work and reset the
that you will receive the highest system. If the engine oil life system
level of service available. Your is reset accidentally, service the
vehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 miles
since the last service. Reset the oil
life system whenever the oil is

. Windshield washer fluid level Maintenance II
changed. See Engine Oil Life check. See Washer Fluid on
page 9‑22.
. Perform all services described in
System on page 9‑12.
Maintenance I.
When the Change Engine Oil Soon
. Tire inflation check. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑50.
. Steering and suspension
message displays, certain services,
inspection. Visual inspection for
checks, and inspections are . Tire wear inspection. See Tire damaged, loose, or missing
required. The services described for Inspection on page 9‑56. parts or signs of wear.
Maintenance I should be performed
at every engine oil change. The
. Rotate tires. See Tire Rotation . Engine cooling system
services described for Maintenance on page 9‑56. inspection. Visual inspection
II should be performed when: . Fluids visual leak check of hoses, pipes, fittings, and
(or every 12 months, whichever clamps and replacement,
. Maintenance I was performed
occurs first). A leak in any if needed.
the last time the engine oil was
changed. system must be repaired and the . Windshield wiper blade
fluid level checked. inspection for wear, cracking,
. It has been 10 months or more . Engine air cleaner filter or contamination and windshield
since the Change Engine Oil
inspection (vehicles driven in and wiper blade cleaning,
Soon message has displayed or
dusty conditions only). See if contaminated. See Exterior
since the last service.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on Care on page 9‑81. Worn
Maintenance I page 9‑13. or damaged wiper blade
replacement. See Wiper Blade
. Change engine oil and filter. . Brake system inspection (or
Replacement on page 9‑29.
See Engine Oil on page 9‑10. every 12 months, whichever
An Emission Control Service. occurs first).
. Engine coolant level check.
See Engine Coolant on
page 9‑16.
. Body hinges and latches, Additional Required Services Once a Year
key lock cylinders, folding
seat hardware, and sunroof At Each Fuel Stop
. See Starter Switch Check on
(if equipped) lubrication. page 9‑27.
. Engine oil level check.
See Recommended Fluids and See Engine Oil on page 9‑10.
. See Automatic Transmission
Lubricants on page 10‑7. Shift Lock Control System
More frequent lubrication may
. Engine coolant level check. Check on page 9‑27.
be required when vehicle is See Engine Coolant on
. See Ignition Transmission Lock
exposed to a corrosive page 9‑16.
Check on page 9‑28.
environment. Applying silicone . Windshield washer fluid level
grease on weatherstrips with a check. See Washer Fluid on
. See Park Brake and P (Park)
clean cloth makes them last page 9‑22. Mechanism Check on
longer, seal better, and not stick page 9‑28.
or squeak. Once a Month . Engine cooling system and
. Restraint system component
. Tire inflation check. See Tire pressure cap pressure check.
check. See Safety System Pressure on page 9‑50. Radiator and air conditioning
Check on page 2‑24. . Tire wear inspection. See Tire condenser outside cleaning.
. Inspection on page 9‑56. See Cooling System on
Automatic transmission fluid
page 9‑15.
level check and adding fluid,
. Exhaust system and nearby heat
if needed. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on shields inspection for loose or
page 9‑13. damaged components.
. Engine air cleaner filter . Accelerator pedal check for
inspection. See Engine Air damage, high effort, or binding.
Cleaner/Filter on page 9‑13. Replace if needed.
First Engine Oil Change After

. Transfer case fluid change First Engine Oil Change After
Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles (severe service) for vehicles Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
mainly driven in hilly or
. Fuel system inspection for mountainous terrain, when
. Engine cooling system drain,
damage or leaks. frequently towing a trailer, flush, and refill, cooling system
or used for taxi, police, and cap pressure check, and
First Engine Oil Change After cleaning of outside of radiator
Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles or delivery service.
and air conditioning condenser
. Engine air cleaner filter First Engine Oil Change After (or every 5 years, whichever
replacement. See Engine Air Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles occurs first). See Cooling
Cleaner/Filter on page 9‑13. . Automatic transmission fluid System on page 9‑15. An
. Automatic transmission fluid change (normal service). See Emission Control Service.
change (severe service) for Automatic Transmission Fluid on . Engine accessory drive belt
vehicles mainly driven in heavy page 9‑13. inspection for fraying, excessive
city traffic in hot weather, in hilly . Transfer case fluid change cracks, or obvious damage and
or mountainous terrain, when (normal service). replacement, if needed. An
frequently towing a trailer, Emission Control Service.
. Spark plug replacement. An
or used for taxi, police,
or delivery service. See Emission Control Service.
Automatic Transmission Fluid on
page 9‑13.
Maintenance
Service Maintenance I II
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. • •
Engine coolant level check. • •
Windshield washer fluid level check. • •
Tire inflation pressures check. • •
Tire wear inspection. • •
Rotate tires. • •
Fluids visual leak check. • •
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only). • •
Brake system inspection. • •
Steering and suspension inspection. •
Engine cooling system inspection. •
Windshield wiper blades inspection. •
Body components lubrication. •
Restraint system components check. •
Automatic transmission fluid level check. •
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions). •
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst
Engine Oil
symbol. To determine the proper viscosity for the vehicle's engine, see
Engine Oil on page 9‑10.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL ® Coolant.
Engine Coolant
See Engine Coolant on page 9‑16.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12377967,
Hydraulic Brake System
in Canada 89021320).
Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Hydraulic Power Steering System
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
(V6 engines only)
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Transfer Case (All-Wheel Drive) Transfer Case Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88861950, in Canada 88861951).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Key Lock Cylinders
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and in Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Release Pawl Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Hood, Door, and Folding Seat Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021668,
Power Liftgate Actuator Ball Joint
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)
Weatherstrip Conditioning or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your retailer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 25899727 A3138C
Engine Oil Filter
2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G
3.0L V6 Engine 89017524 PF48
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 19130294 CF177
Spark Plugs
2.4L L4 Engine 12620540 41-108
3.0L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109
Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 60 cm (23.6 in) 20794123 —
Passenger Side – 42.5 cm (16.7 in) 20794124 —
Rear – 32.5 cm (12.8 in) 25788783 —
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Odometer
Reading
Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Odometer
Reading
Technical Data 11-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN
Vehicle Identification is the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 on page 11‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 11-4 This legal identifier is in the front Identification Label
corner of the instrument panel, on This label, on the inside of the glove
the left side of the vehicle. It can be box, has the following information:
seen through the windshield from . Vehicle Identification
outside. The VIN also appears on
Number (VIN)
the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and certificates of title . Model designation
and registration. . Paint information
. Production options and special
equipment
Do not remove this label from the
vehicle.
11-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
Metric English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Engine Cooling System
2.4L L4 Engine 7.8 L 8.2 qt
3.0L V6 Engine 10.2 L 10.8 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt
3.0L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt
Fuel Tank
2.4L L4 Engine 71.1 L 18.8 gal
3.0L V6 Engine 79.1 L 20.9 gal
Technical Data 11-3
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Transmission Fluid (Drain and Refill)
2.4L L4 6–Speed Automatic* 8.5 L 9.0 qt
3.0L V6 6–Speed Automatic* 9.0 L 9.5 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 170 Y 125 ft lb
*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 9‑13 for information on checking fluid level.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
2.4L L4 W Automatic 0.9 mm (0.035 in)
3.0L V6 Y Automatic 1.1 mm (0.043 in)
11-4 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
3.0L V6 Engine
2.4L L4 Engine
Customer Information 12-1
Customer Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Information
Information the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 Customer Satisfaction
Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure
Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Customer Satisfaction Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 important to your dealer and to
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Reporting Safety Defects to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
Customer Assistance General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
with the sales transaction or the
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 Vehicle Data Recording and operation of the vehicle will be
Customer Assistance for Text resolved by the dealer's sales or
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 12-4
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and service departments. Sometimes,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 12-5 however, despite the best intentions
GM Mobility Reimbursement Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 12-15 of all concerned, misunderstandings
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 can occur. If your concern has not
Roadside Assistance OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 12-16 been resolved to your satisfaction,
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 the following steps should be taken:
Scheduling Service Radio Frequency
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 12-16 STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Courtesy Transportation Radio Frequency with a member of dealership
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 management. Normally, concerns
Collision Damage Repair . . . 12-10 can be quickly resolved at that level.
Service Publications If the matter has already been
Ordering Information . . . . . . 12-12 reviewed with the sales, service,
or parts manager, contact the owner
of the dealership or the general
manager.
12-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO : If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, case will generally be heard within
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will 40 days. If you do not agree with the
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's decision given in your case, you
resolved by the dealership without facility. That is why we suggest may reject it and proceed with any
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. other venue for relief available
Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: to you.
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and your You may contact the BBB Auto
Canada, call General Motors of dealer are committed to making Line Program using the toll-free
Canada Customer Communication sure you are completely satisfied telephone number or write them
Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English), with your new vehicle. However, at the following address:
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). if you continue to remain unsatisfied BBB Auto Line Program
We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Council of Better Business
toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you Bureaus, Inc.
inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business 4200 Wilson Boulevard
following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program to Suite 800
give the Customer Assistance enforce your rights. Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Representative: The BBB Auto Line Program is an Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
. Vehicle Identification Number out of court program administered www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
(VIN). This is available from the by the Council of Better Business
vehicle registration or title, or Bureaus to settle automotive This program is available in all
the plate at the top left of the disputes regarding vehicle repairs or 50 states and the District of
instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may vehicle age, mileage, and other
be required to resort to this informal factors. General Motors reserves
. Dealership name and location. the right to change eligibility
dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the limitations and/or discontinue its
present mileage. program is free of charge and your participation in this program.
STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Assistance

Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Offices
addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call Chevrolet encourages customers
procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2, the General Motors Customer to call the toll-free number for
General Motors of Canada Limited Communication Centre, assistance. However, if a customer
wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-3777 (English), wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
participation in a no-charge 1-800-263-7854 (French), the letter should be addressed to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program. or write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited United States — Customer
The Mediation/Arbitration Program Assistance
has committed to binding arbitration c/o Customer Communication
of owner disputes involving Centre Chevrolet Motor Division
factory-related vehicle service General Motors of Canada Limited Chevrolet Customer Assistance
claims. The program provides for Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Center
the review of the facts involved by 1908 Colonel Sam Drive P.O. Box 33170
an impartial third party arbiter, and Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Detroit, MI 48232-5170
may include an informal hearing Chevrolet.com
before the arbiter. The program is Your inquiry should be accompanied
designed so that the entire dispute by the Vehicle Identification 1-800-222-1020
settlement process, from the time Number (VIN). 1-800-833-2438 (For Text
you file your complaint to the final Telephone devices (TTYs))
decision, should be completed in Roadside Assistance:
about 70 days. We believe our 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
impartial program offers advantages
over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.
From Puerto Rico: Overseas — Customer Customer Assistance for

1-800-496-9992 (English) Assistance Text Telephone (TTY)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) Please contact the local General Users
From U.S. Virgin Islands: Motors Business Unit.
To assist customers who are deaf,
1-800-496-9994 Mexico, Central America and hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
Caribbean Islands/Countries and who use Text Telephones
Canada — Customer (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.
Assistance equipment available at its Customer
Virgin Islands) — Customer
General Motors of Canada Limited Assistance Assistance Center. Any TTY user
Customer Communication Centre, in the U.S. can communicate
CA1-163-005 General Motors de Mexico, S. with Chevrolet by dialing:
1908 Colonel Sam Drive de R.L. de C.V. 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Customer Assistance Center (TTY users in Canada can dial
gmcanada.com Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 1-800-263-3830.)
Col. Lomas de Bezares
1-800-263-3777 (English) C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text 01-800-508-0000
Telephone devices (TTYs)) Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800
Online Owner Center Other Helpful Links: Here are a few of the valuable
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com tools and services you will have
Online Owner Center (U.S.) — access to:
www.gmownercenter.com/ Chevrolet Merchandise —
www.chevymall.com
. My Showroom: Find and save
chevrolet information on vehicles and
Information and services Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/ current offers in your area.
customized for your specific helpcenter . My Dealers/Retailers: Save
vehicle — all in one convenient . FAQ details such as address and
place. phone number for each of your
. Contact Us
. Digital owner manual, warranty preferred GM dealers/retailers.
information, and more My GM Canada . My Driveway: Access quick
(Canada) — www.gm.ca links to parts and service
. Online service and maintenance
records My GM Canada is a estimates, check trade-in
password-protected section of values, or schedule a service
. Find Chevrolet dealers for www.gm.ca where you can save appointment by adding the
service nationwide information on GM vehicles, get vehicles you own to your
. Exclusive privileges and offers personalized offers, and use handy driveway profile.
. Recall notices for your specific tools and forms with greater ease. . My Preferences: Manage your
vehicle profile and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
. OnStar® and GM Cardmember
Services Earnings summaries To sign up, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gm.ca.
. Odometer reading, Vehicle
GM Mobility Roadside Assistance Identification Number (VIN), and
Reimbursement Program Program delivery date of the vehicle
For U.S. purchased vehicles, . Description of the problem
call 1‐800‐CHEV‐USA
(1‐800‐243‐8872); (Text telephone Coverage
(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438). Services are provided up to
For Canadian purchased vehicles, 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
call 1-800-268-6800. whichever comes first.
This program, available to qualified Service is available 24 hours a day, In the U.S., anyone driving the
applicants for cost reimbursement 365 days a year. vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
of eligible aftermarket adaptive person driving the vehicle without
equipment required for your Calling for Assistance permission from the owner is not
vehicle, such as hand controls or a When calling Roadside Assistance, covered.
wheelchair/scooter lift for the have the following information Roadside Assistance is not a part of
vehicle. ready: the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
For more information on the limited . Your name, home address, and Chevrolet and General Motors of
offer visit gmmobility.com or call the home telephone number Canada Limited reserve the right to
GM Mobility Assistance Center at make any changes or discontinue
. Telephone number of your the Roadside Assistance program at
1-800-323-9935. Text telephone location
(TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935. any time without notification.
. Location of the vehicle Chevrolet and General Motors of
General Motors of Canada also
has a Mobility Program. Call . Model, year, color, and license Canada Limited reserve the right
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) plate number of the vehicle to limit services or payment to an
for details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.
owner or driver if they decide the

. Flat Tire Change: Service is Services Specific to Canadian
claims are made too often, or the provided to change a flat tire Purchased Vehicles
same type of claim is made many with the spare tire. The spare
times. tire, if equipped, must be in good . Fuel delivery: Reimbursement
condition and properly inflated. is approximately $5 Canadian.
Services Provided It is the owner's responsibility for Diesel fuel delivery may be
the repair or replacement of the restricted. Propane and other
. Emergency Fuel Delivery:
tire if it is not covered by the fuels are not provided through
Delivery of enough fuel for the
warranty. this service.
vehicle to get to the nearest
service station. . Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
. Battery Jump Start: Service is
provided to jump start a dead registration is required.
. Lock‐Out Service: Service is
provided to unlock the vehicle if battery. . Trip Routing Service: Detailed
you are locked out. A remote Services Not Included in maps of North America are
unlock may be available if you Roadside Assistance provided when requested either
have OnStar®. For security with the most direct route or the
reasons, the driver must present . Impound towing caused by most scenic route. There is a
identification before this service violation of any laws. limit of six requests per year.
is given. . Legal fines. Additional travel information is
. also available. Allow three
Emergency Tow From a Public . Mounting, dismounting or weeks for delivery.
Road or Highway: Tow to the changing of snow tires, chains,
nearest Chevrolet dealer for or other traction devices.
warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
. Towing or services for vehicles
driven. Assistance is also given driven on a non-public road or
when the vehicle is stuck in the highway.
sand, mud, or snow.
. Trip Interruption Benefits
and Assistance: Must be
Scheduling Service Courtesy Transportation
over 250 kilometres from Appointments Program
where your trip was started to When your vehicle requires To enhance your ownership
qualify. General Motors of warranty service, contact your experience, we and our participating
Canada Limited requires dealer/retailer and request an dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
pre-authorization, original appointment. By scheduling a Transportation, a customer support
detailed receipts, and a copy service appointment and advising program for vehicles with the New
of the repair orders. Once your service consultant of your Vehicle Limited Warranty (Base
authorization has been received, transportation needs, your Warranty Coverage period in
the Roadside Assistance advisor dealer/retailer can help minimize Canada) and extended powertrain,
will help you make arrangements your inconvenience. and hybrid specific warranty in both
and explain how to receive the U.S. and Canada.
payment. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled
into the service department Several courtesy transportation
. Alternative Service: If immediately, keep driving it until options are available to assist in
assistance cannot be provided it can be scheduled for service, reducing your inconvenience when
right away, the Roadside unless, of course, the problem is warranty repairs are required.
Assistance advisor may give safety-related. If it is, please call
you permission to get local Courtesy Transportation is not a
your dealership/retailer, let them part of the New Vehicle Limited
emergency road service. You will know this, and ask for instructions.
receive payment, up to $100, Warranty. A separate booklet
after sending the original If the dealer/retailer requests you to entitled “Warranty and Owner
receipt to Roadside Assistance. bring the vehicle for service, you are Assistance Information” furnished
Mechanical failures may be urged to do so as early in the work with each new vehicle provides
covered, however any cost for day as possible to allow for the detailed warranty coverage
parts and labor for repairs not same day repair. information.
covered by the warranty are the
owner responsibility.
Transportation Options Public Transportation or Fuel Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Reimbursement Your dealer may arrange to provide
Warranty service can generally be
completed while you wait. However, If your vehicle requires overnight you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
if you are unable to wait, GM helps warranty repairs, and public reimburse you for a rental vehicle
to minimize your inconvenience by transportation is used instead of the that you obtain if your vehicle is
providing several transportation dealer's shuttle service, the expense kept for an overnight warranty
options. Depending on the must be supported by original repair. Rental reimbursement will be
circumstances, your dealer can receipts and can only be up to the limited and must be supported by
offer you one of the following: maximum amount allowed by GM original receipts. This requires
for shuttle service. In addition, for that you sign and complete a
Shuttle Service U.S. customers, should you arrange rental agreement and meet
Shuttle service is the preferred transportation through a friend or state/provincial, local, and rental
means of offering Courtesy relative, limited reimbursement for vehicle provider requirements.
Transportation. Dealers may provide reasonable fuel expenses may Requirements vary and may include
you with shuttle service to get you be available. Claim amounts minimum age requirements,
to your destination with minimal should reflect actual costs and be insurance coverage, credit card,
interruption of your daily schedule. supported by original receipts. etc. You are responsible for fuel
This includes one‐way or round trip See your dealer for information usage charges and may also be
shuttle service within reasonable regarding the allowance amounts responsible for taxes, levies, usage
time and distance parameters of the for reimbursement of fuel or other fees, excessive mileage, or rental
dealer's area. transportation costs. usage beyond the completion of the
repair.
It may not be possible to provide a
like-vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Collision Damage Repair Recycled original equipment parts

Information may also be used for repair. These
If your vehicle is involved in a parts are typically removed from
All program options, such as shuttle collision and it is damaged, have the vehicles that were total losses in
service, may not be available at damage repaired by a qualified prior crashes. In most cases, the
every dealer. Please contact your technician using the proper parts being recycled are from
dealer for specific information equipment and quality replacement undamaged sections of the vehicle.
about availability. All Courtesy parts. Poorly performed collision A recycled original equipment GM
Transportation arrangements will repairs diminish your vehicle's part, may be an acceptable choice
be administered by appropriate resale value, and safety to maintain your vehicle's originally
dealer personnel. performance can be compromised designed appearance and safety
General Motors reserves the in subsequent collisions. performance, however, the history of
right to unilaterally modify, Collision Parts these parts is not known. Such parts
change or discontinue Courtesy are not covered by your GM New
Transportation at any time and to Genuine GM Collision parts are new Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
resolve all questions of claim parts made with the same materials related failures are not covered by
eligibility pursuant to the terms and and construction methods as the that warranty.
conditions described herein at its parts with which your vehicle
was originally built. Genuine GM Aftermarket collision parts are also
sole discretion. available. These are made by
Collision parts are your best choice
to ensure that your vehicle's companies other than GM and
designed appearance, durability, may not have been tested for your
and safety are preserved. The use vehicle. As a result, these parts
of Genuine GM parts can help may fit poorly, exhibit premature
maintain your GM New Vehicle durability/corrosion problems,
Limited Warranty. and may not perform properly
in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered Many insurance policies provide If a Crash Occurs
by your GM New Vehicle Limited reduced protection to your GM
If there has been an injury, call
Warranty, and any vehicle failure vehicle by limiting compensation
emergency services for help. Do not
related to such parts are not for damage repairs by using
leave the scene of a crash until all
covered by that warranty. aftermarket collision parts. Some
matters have been taken care of.
insurance companies will not
Repair Facility Move the vehicle only if its position
specify aftermarket collision parts.
puts you in danger, or you are
We recommend that you choose a When purchasing insurance, we
instructed to move it by a police
collision repair facility that meets recommend that you assure your
officer.
your needs before you ever need vehicle will be repaired with GM
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer original equipment collision parts. Give only the necessary information
may have a collision repair center If such insurance coverage is not to police and other parties involved
with GM-trained technicians and available from your current in the crash.
state of the art equipment, or be insurance carrier, consider switching For emergency towing see
able to recommend a collision to another insurance carrier. Roadside Assistance Program on
repair center that has GM-trained If your vehicle is leased, the leasing page 12‑6.
technicians and comparable company may require you to have
equipment. Gather the following information:
insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment . Driver's name, address, phone
Insuring Your Vehicle number
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
Protect your investment in your GM Genuine Manufacturer replacement . Driver's license number
vehicle with comprehensive and parts. Read your lease carefully, as
collision insurance coverage. There you may be charged at the end of
. Owner's name, address, phone
are significant differences in the your lease for poor quality repairs. number
quality of coverage afforded by . Vehicle license plate
various insurance policy terms.
. Vehicle make, model and
model year
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
original GM parts. Remember, Service Publications
recycled parts will not be covered
. by your GM vehicle warranty.
Ordering Information
Insurance company and policy
number Insurance pays the bill for the repair, Service Manuals
. General description of the but you must live with the repair. Service Manuals have the diagnosis
damage to the other vehicle Depending on your policy limits, and repair information on engines,
your insurance company may transmission, axle, suspension,
Choose a reputable repair facility initially value the repair using
that uses quality replacement parts. brakes, electrical, steering,
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with body, etc.
See “Collision Parts” earlier in this your repair professional, and insist
section. on Genuine GM parts. Remember if Service Bulletins
If the airbag has inflated, see What your vehicle is leased you may be Service Bulletins give additional
Will You See After an Airbag obligated to have the vehicle technical service information
Inflates? on page 2‑32. repaired with Genuine GM parts, needed to knowledgeably service
even if your insurance coverage General Motors cars and trucks.
Managing the Vehicle Damage does not pay the full cost.
Repair Process Each bulletin contains instructions
If another party's insurance to assist in the diagnosis and
In the event that your vehicle company is paying for the repairs, service of your vehicle.
requires damage repairs, GM you are not obligated to accept a
recommends that you take an repair valuation based on that Owner Information
active role in its repair. If you have insurance company's collision Owner publications are written
a pre-determined repair facility of policy repair limits, as you have no specifically for owners and intended
choice, take your vehicle there, contractual limits with that company. to provide basic operational
or have it towed there. Specify In such cases, you can have control information about the vehicle.
to the facility that any required of the repair and parts choices as The owner manual includes the
replacement collision parts be long as cost stays within reasonable Maintenance Schedule for all
original equipment parts, either new limits. models.
Genuine GM parts or recycled
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, ORDER TOLL FREE: Reporting Safety

Owner Manual, and Warranty 1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday
Booklet. 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time Defects
RETAIL SELL PRICE: For Credit Card Orders Only
$35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), Reporting Safety Defects
Without Portfolio: Owner
visit Helm, Inc. on the World Wide to the United States
Web at: helminc.com Government
Manual only.
Or you can write to:
RETAIL SELL PRICE: If you believe that your vehicle
$25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee Helm, Incorporated has a defect which could cause
P.O. Box 07130 a crash or could cause injury or
Current and Past Model Detroit, MI 48207
Order Forms death, you should immediately
Prices are subject to change without inform the National Highway
Technical Service Bulletins and notice and without incurring Traffic Safety Administration
Manuals are available for current obligation. Allow ample time for
and past model GM vehicles.
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
delivery. General Motors.
To request an order form, specify
year and model name of the vehicle. Note to Canadian Customers:
All listed prices are quoted in U.S.
If NHTSA receives similar
funds. Canadian residents are to complaints, it may open an
make checks payable in U.S. funds. investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects

become involved in individual to the Canadian to General Motors
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
Government In addition to notifying NHTSA
If you live in Canada, and you (or Transport Canada) in a situation
To contact NHTSA, you may believe that your vehicle has a like this, please notify General
call the Vehicle Safety Hotline safety defect, notify Transport Motors.
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 Canada immediately, in addition Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to notifying General Motors of
to http://www.safecar.gov; or Chevrolet Motor Division
Canada Limited. Call them at
Chevrolet Customer Assistance
write to: 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Center
Administrator, NHTSA Transport Canada P.O. Box 33170
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Road Safety Branch Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Washington D.C. 20590 2780 Sheffield Road
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
You can also obtain other (English) or 1-800-263-7854
information about motor (French), or write:
vehicle safety from General Motors of Canada Limited
http://www.safecar.gov. Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances
Recording and This vehicle has an Event Data in which crashes and injuries occur.
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
Privacy of an EDR is to record, in certain Important: EDR data is recorded
crash or near crash-like situations, by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
Your GM vehicle has a number of crash situation occurs; no data is
sophisticated computers that record such as an airbag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that recorded by the EDR under normal
information about the vehicle’s driving conditions and no personal
performance and how it is driven. will assist in understanding how a
vehicle's systems performed. The data (e.g., name, gender, age,
For example, your vehicle uses and crash location) is recorded.
computer modules to monitor and EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and However, other parties, such as
control engine and transmission law enforcement, could combine
performance, to monitor the safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. the EDR data with the type of
conditions for airbag deployment personally identifying data routinely
and deploy airbags in a crash and, The EDR in this vehicle is designed
to record such data as: acquired during a crash
if so equipped, to provide antilock investigation.
braking to help the driver control the . How various systems in your
vehicle. These modules may store vehicle were operating To read data recorded by an EDR,
data to help your dealer/retailer special equipment is required, and
technician service your vehicle.
. Whether or not the driver and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
Some modules may also store data passenger safety belts were needed. In addition to the vehicle
about how you operate the vehicle, buckled/fastened manufacturer, other parties, such as
such as rate of fuel consumption or . How far, if at all, the driver was law enforcement, that have the
average speed. These modules may pressing the accelerator and/or special equipment, can read the
also retain the owner’s personal brake pedal information if they have access to
preferences, such as radio pre-sets, the vehicle or the EDR.
. How fast the vehicle was
seat positions, and temperature traveling
settings.
GM will not access this data or Navigation System Radio Frequency

share it with others except: with the
consent of the vehicle owner or, If your vehicle has a navigation Statement
if the vehicle is leased, with the system, use of the system may This vehicle has systems that
consent of the lessee; in response result in the storage of destinations, operate on a radio frequency that
to an official request of police or addresses, telephone numbers, and comply with Part 15 of the Federal
similar government office; as part of other trip information. Refer to the Communications Commission (FCC)
GM's defense of litigation through navigation system operating manual Rules and with RSS-210/211 of
the discovery process; or, as for information on stored data and Industry and Science Canada.
required by law. Data that GM for deletion instructions.
Operation is subject to the following
collects or receives may also be
Radio Frequency two conditions:
used for GM research needs or may
be made available to others for Identification (RFID) 1. The device may not cause
research purposes, where a need is interference.
shown and the data is not tied to a RFID technology is used in some
vehicles for functions such as tire 2. The device must accept any
specific vehicle or vehicle owner. interference received, including
pressure monitoring and ignition
interference that may cause
OnStar® system security, as well as in
connection with conveniences undesired operation of the
If your vehicle has OnStar and you such as key fobs for remote door device.
subscribe to the OnStar services, locking/unlocking and starting, and Changes or modifications to any of
please refer to the OnStar Terms in-vehicle transmitters for garage these systems by other than an
and Conditions for information on door openers. RFID technology in authorized service facility could void
data collection and use. See also GM vehicles does not use or record authorization to use this equipment.
OnStar® System on page 4‑44 in personal information or link with any
this manual for more information. other GM system containing
personal information.
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont.) Antilock Brake

What Will You See After System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Accessories and
an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .2-32 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
When Should an Airbag Appearance Care
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-81
Add-On Electrical
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .2-27 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-85
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
Airbags Assistance Program,
Adding Equipment to the
Adding Equipment to the Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 2-38
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Adjustments
Passenger Status Indicator . . .4-17 CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16 Audio System
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . 9-13
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 6-2
Airbag System
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25 Automatic Climate Control
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Alarm System System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
How Does an Airbag
Anti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 8-35
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . 8-38, 9-26 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Passenger Sensing
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Antenna Shiftlock Control System
What Makes an Airbag
Multi-Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Anti-Theft Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . 6-28, 6-31
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Alarm System Messages . . . . .4-37
i-2 INDEX
B Bulb Replacement (cont.) Cautions, Danger, and

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Sidemarker, Stoplamps, CD
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-74
and Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . .9-35 DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21
Voltage and Charging
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58 CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 3-1
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . 9-29
Bluetooth . . . . 6-42, 6-43, 6-46, 6-58 C Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 4-18
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
California Check
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .8-54 Engine Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
Perchlorate Materials Ignition Transmission Lock . . .9-28
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Child Restraints
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Infants and Young
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 8-49 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iv Lower Anchors and
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Capacities and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .2-50
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 9-35
Carbon Monoxide Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56, 2-58
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 1-9 Where to Put the Restraint . . .2-48
Headlamps, Front Turn
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21 Cleaning
Signal, Sidemarker, and
Cargo Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-81
Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-85
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . .9-36
INDEX i-3
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 7-1 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 Drive Systems

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 8-38, 9-26
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10, 4-11 Text Telephone (TTY) Driver Information
Cluster, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 12-10 Customer Information Driving
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73 Service Publications Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Ordering Information . . . . . . 12-12 Characteristics and
Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Customer Satisfaction Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-58
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 D Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Coolant Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 12-10 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . .8-20
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16 Danger, Warnings, and If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .8-23
Engine Temperature Gage . . . .4-15 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 12-15 Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33 Daytime Running Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Courtesy Transportation Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Covers Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . 6-28, 6-31 DVD
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Rear Seat Entertainment
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Door System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44 Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33 DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32 Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
i-4 INDEX
E Engine (cont.) Fog Lamps

Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . 5-3, 9-35
ECO Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Economy Mode
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .8-34 Front Seats
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Electrical Equipment,
Engine Oil Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Electrical System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-55
Engine Compartment Fuse
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63 Economy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 12-15 Filling a Portable Fuel
Instrument Panel Fuse
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-57
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-56
Engine
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .8-54
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Check and Service Engine F Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Filter Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .8-54
Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . .9-13 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .4-25
Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . 9-6
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-54
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 5-2 Requirements, California . . . . .8-54
Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64 System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Coolant Temperature Gage . . .4-15
Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66 Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
Fluid Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Cooling System Messages . . .4-33
Automatic Transmission . . . . . .9-13 Engine Compartment Fuse
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21 Instrument Panel Fuse
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
INDEX i-5
G H Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 8-20
Gages Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 5-2
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Engine Coolant Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15 Headlamps
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14 Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
How to Wear Safety Belts
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14 Daytime Running
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Warning Lights and Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 I
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12 Headlamps, Front Turn Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Gasoline Signal, Sidemarker, and Ignition Transmission Lock
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-54 Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
General Information High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .4-26 Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Service and Maintenance . . . . .10-1 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 5-2 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-57 Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .4-27 Infants and Young Children,
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
GM Mobility Reimbursement Heater Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31 Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 6-1
i-6 INDEX
J LATCH System Lights (cont.)

Replacing Parts After a High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 5-2
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55 Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Latch, Lower Anchors and Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .4-15
K Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 4-35 Liftgate Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Keyless Entry Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 1-9 Traction Control System
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 1-3 Light (TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23 Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Lighting Locks
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
L Lights Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . 9-44 Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Lamps Antilock Brake System Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 5-2 (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 4-25
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27 for Children (LATCH
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .4-24 SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .4-18 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27 Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26 Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
INDEX i-7
M Messages (cont.) N
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Maintenance Navigation System
Object Detection System . . . . .4-35
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Vehicle Data Recording
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Maintenance Schedule and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Recommended Fluids and Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . .10-2
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 4-18
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31 O
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37 Object Detection System
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Mass Storage Media (MEM) . . . 6-25 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Mirrors
Messages Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Automatic Dimming
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37 Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .4-37 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Battery Voltage and Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32 Oil
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . .9-12
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Monitor System, Tire
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .4-33 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34 Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 2-41
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
i-8 INDEX
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 Passenger Sensing System . . . 2-33 R

Operation, Infotainment Perchlorate Materials
Radio Frequency
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Requirements, California . . . . . . 9-3
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 12-16
Outlets Phone
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Bluetooth . . . . . . . 6-42, 6-43,
Radios
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 6-46, 6-58
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Overview, Infotainment Power
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-5 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
P Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .8-29
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Park Rear Seat Entertainment
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 8-49
Pregnancy, Using Safety
Parking Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 4-8
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-46 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Privacy
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Radio Frequency
Brake and P (Park) Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 12-16
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . .9-28 Recommended Fluids and
Program
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .8-33 Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .12-8
Passenger Airbag Status Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
Proposition 65 Warning,
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
INDEX i-9
Records Retained Accessory Safety Belts (cont.)

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . 9-78 Ride Control Systems Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .2-24
Reimbursement Program, Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36 Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .2-23
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Roadside Assistance Safety Defects Reporting
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Canadian Government . . . . . . 12-14
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Roof General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Replacement Parts Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56 Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 11-4 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Running the Vehicle While Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 10-2
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 2-40 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34 Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 12-8
Replacing LATCH System Seats
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55 S Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Replacing Safety Belt Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
System Parts After a Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24 Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23 Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 2-6
Reporting Safety Defects How to Wear Safety Belts Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 2-4
Canadian Government . . . . . . 12-14 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37 Securing Child
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56, 2-58
i-10 INDEX
Security Sidemarker Storage

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35 Mass Media (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . .6-25
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 Signals, Turn and Storage Areas
Service Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Accessories and Spare Tire Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73 Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Specifications and Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Engine Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . .4-18 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 10-10 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Maintenance, General StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43 Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1 StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Parts Identification Label . . . . . 11-1 Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Publications Ordering Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 System
Scheduling Appointments . . . . .12-8 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30 Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 System Check
Servicing the Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21 Automatic Transmission
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 2-38 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Shiftlock Control . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Shifting Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32 Stoplamps and Back-Up Lamps
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
INDEX i-11
T Tires (cont.) Traction

Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56 Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .8-41
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44 Control System (TCS)/
Taillamps
Terminology and StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47 Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 12-4
Uniform Tire Quality Trailer
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 1-13
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-61 Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . .8-64
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Wheel Alignment and Tire Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10, 4-11
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-62 Transmission
Tires
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . .9-63 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58
When It Is Time for New Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-66
Towing Transportation Program,
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .8-58 Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-63 Turn and Lane-Change
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-60
General Information . . . . . . . . . .8-57 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .9-78 Turn Signal
Inflation Monitor System . . . . . .9-53
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-61 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . .8-64
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-78
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Pressure Monitor System . . . . .9-51
i-12 INDEX
U W
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 8-46 Warning Lights, Gages, and
Uniform Tire Quality Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
V Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Vehicle Wheels
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv Alignment and Tire
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-62
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-60
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-63
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39 When It Is Time for New
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 Where to Put the Child
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-78 Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Vehicle Care Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Vehicle Identification Windshield
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Service Parts Identification Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . 9-29
Vehicle Reminder Wipers
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

2010 Chevrolet Equinox Owner&#39;s Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2010 Chevrolet Equinox Owner&#39;s Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2010 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Please refer to the purchase

limited viewing uses only unless Canadian Vehicle Owners

Using this Manual Symbols

Vehicle Symbol Chart # : Fog Lamps

Keys, Doors and Exterior Mirrors

Keys and Locks

Shutting the Engine Off After a

Doors WARNING (Continued)

Liftgate (Power) WARNING (Continued) { WARNING

such as a garage door or roof

3. Adjust each outside mirror so Park Tilt Mirrors Interior Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Automatic Dimming Mirror Windows

Express Down Windows To program the window: Window Lockout

Seats and Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 2-24

Front Seats { WARNING

Power Seat Adjustment Adjust the power seat by moving the

Lumbar Adjustment Reclining Seatbacks

Power Reclining Seatbacks

Rear Seats WARNING (Continued)

Safety Belts { WARNING

Why Safety Belts Work

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The lap belt is too loose. It will

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong A: The belt is over an armrest.

Q: What is wrong with this?

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

Lap-Shoulder Belt 4. If equipped with a shoulder belt

Before a door is closed, be sure the

Safety Belt Extender

Safety System Check Safety Belt Care WARNING (Continued)

Airbag System All of the airbags in the vehicle will

Here are the most important things

Where Are the Airbags?

There is an airbag readiness light

In many crashes severe enough to

The passenger sensing system We recommend that children be

Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System WARNING (Continued)

Child Restraints The manufacturer's instructions that

Older children who have outgrown

Q: What is the proper way to In a crash, children who are not

Children who are not restrained

Q: What are the different types of child restraint. In addition, there

Child Restraint Systems

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats

Where to Put the

Wherever you install a child Configurations for Use of

Be sure to use an anchor located on Securing a Child Restraint

This system is designed to make

Replacing LATCH System

Securing Child Restraints In Canada, the law requires that

6. If the child restraint has a top

You will be using the lap-shoulder

Storage Storage Additional Storage

Roof Rack System Notice: Loading cargo on the

Try sliding the crossrails forward

Instruments and Warning Lights, Gages, and

Information Displays Ride Control System

Instrument Panel Overview

Controls To adjust the steering wheel: Steering Wheel Controls

2010 Chevrolet Equinox Owner's Manual

2010 Chevrolet Equinox Owner's Manual